AO2 PIW Pgs-a.pm6 - Hartman Office Furniture, Inc.

Transcription

Walls Introduction
Walls
Introduction
The basic building blocks for planning with the Action Office Series 2 system are
structural panels. Most often, they are connected to one another, but they can also be
connected to fixed architectural walls. Series 2 panels, available powered and
nonpowered, come in a wide variety of finishes, coverings, and sizes.
L
Action Office® Series 2 Planning Guide 3
Walls Structure
Structure
PAINTED
PANEL TOP CAPS
VERTICAL FRAME
BETWEEN PANELS
WIDER-PROFILE
PANEL BASE
Action Office Series 2 panels define and divide space, hold wall-attached
components, and distribute power and voice/data cables. The panels come in a wide
range of heights, widths, finishes, and types to offer a variety of design options. Series
2 panels can be attached to one another or to architectural walls but cannot be
attached to Action Office Series 1 or Series 3 panels or to Ethospace® frames. Series
1 panels and connectors, when fitted with conversion base kits, are compatible with
Series 2 panels and connectors.
Series 2 panels have several distinguishing characteristics: They have a wider profile
at the base (5/8" wider on each side of the panel run), with a 5"-high, dual-hinged side
cover on each side of the cable management raceway. Series 2 panels have a painted
top cap.
The panels are available powered or nonpowered; either way, they are shipped
complete with the cable management raceway already in place at the panel base. No
additional field assembly is required to prepare the panels for immediate or future
installation.
Series 2 panels have the capacity to meet current and future needs for power. The
panels provide access to power both at work surface height (with the cable
management panel) and at the panel base. There are also channels for cabling at the
base of the panels and vertically within the cable management panel. An optional
panel-top voice/data cable channel can provide continuous horizontal cable
management for equal-height panels, allowing separation of data cables in the panel
top from electrical components or cables in the panel base. An optional cable/energy
barrier is also available to provide separation within the panel base.
L
Walls Structure
Overview of Panels
1 ‡«•"-THICK
PANEL
3 ⁄«¢" THICK
AT BASE
1"
SLOTS EVERY 1" FOR
ATTACHING COMPONENTS
HINGED
SIDE COVERS
LEVELING GLIDES
(MAXIMUM 1 ‹«¢" OF
HEIGHT ADJUSTABILITY)
Panels
Series 2 panels have slotted hanger rails for adjusting the height of wall-attached
components in 1" increments.
Panels are available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67", and 85" heights and in 12", 18",
24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and 60" widths. The special-purpose cable management panel
is 6" wide and is available in all panel heights except 32" high.
All Series 2 panels measure 1 7/8" thick with a 3 1/4"-thick panel base; this provides
the distinctive, wider-base profile of this panel series.
Leveling glides provide a maximum of 1 3/4" of adjustability to compensate for uneven
floors. (The 1 3/4" adjustment is measured from the floor to the underside of the panel
base.)
The painted panel top cap comes with the Series 2 panel (it is not ordered
separately).
All panels, except for glazed and door panels, are available powered and
nonpowered, with a 5"-high cable management raceway at the base with hinged side
covers. On the powered panels, the side covers have removable receptacle cutouts;
nonpowered panel side covers are available with or without receptacle cutouts.
(Nonpowered panels can be retrofitted for power, however, using the base power
adapter.)
A base cover option that provides a prepunched communication port location on the
left half of the base cover on each side accepts commercially available
communication ports; this provides access to voice and data communications cables
at the panel base.
L
Walls Structure
There are two baseline receptacle locations and one optional communication port
location per side in 24"-, 30"-, 36"-, 42"-, 48"-, and 60"-wide panels. There are no
receptacle locations at the base in 12"- and 18"-wide panels. The cable management
panel provides two receptacle locations (one on the 40"-high panel) on each side of
the panel at work surface height, as well as one prepunched communication port
opening at work surface height and two more near the panel base.
Powered panels come with electrical harnesses already installed in the base for all
connections. The powered panel is available with an optional energy/cable barrier in
the base to separate the electrical system from the voice/data cables; it can also be
added later in the field.
POWERED PANEL
HINGED
SIDE COVERS
ALL ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
MADE WITH A
SINGLE HARNESS
OPTIONAL
COMMUNICATION PORT
LOCATION (1 PER SIDE)
2 RECEPTACLE LOCATIONS (PER SIDE)
ON PANELS 24" WIDE OR WIDER
NONPOWERED PANEL
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
AVAILABLE TO CONVERT
NONPOWERED PANEL TO
POWERED PANEL
5"
GLIDES LOCATED
UNDERNEATH BASE—
1 ‹«¢" ADJUSTMENT
L
SIDE COVERS AVAILABLE WITH OR
WITHOUT RECEPTACLE LOCATIONS
(OPTIONAL)
Walls Structure
Ergonomic Considerations for Panels
WORK SURFACES AT VARIABLE HEIGHTS
TO MEET INDIVIDUAL WORK NEEDS
TACKBOARDS
FOR VISUAL
REMINDERS
HANGING WORK SURFACES
FOR FEWER FURNITURE LEGS
OPEN PANEL FRAME
FOR SHARED EQUIPMENT
PANELS AT DIFFERENT
HEIGHTS FOR DIFFERENT
LEVELS OF PRIVACY AND
FOR VISUAL APPEAL
GLAZED PANEL
FOR MORE
NATURAL LIGHT
IN WORKSTATION
CABLE MANAGEMENT PANEL
FOR ACCESS TO POWER AND
CABLES FOR EQUIPMENT AT
WORK SURFACE HEIGHT
TOOL BARS
AND TOOLS
TO ORGANIZE
WORK
SLOTS AT
1" INCREMENTS
FOR ADJUSTABILITY
OF COMPONENTS
The selection of appropriate types and sizes of Series 2 panels is important in
planning for ergonomic considerations in the workplace. Work surfaces, storage, and
other components are important as well. (Please note, however, that other factors—
such as job design and the design of office machines and tools—are equally
significant.)
Because the hanger rails in Series 2 panels have slots in 1" increments, it is possible
to position work surfaces, storage, and other work-organizing components within easy
reach and to provide workstations that meet individual preferences for working sitting
down or standing up. Vertical adjustability of work surfaces creates work environments
that accommodate the needs of workers with disabilities; and hanging work surfaces
eliminate furniture legs, which may cause problems for workers with limited mobility.
Since Series 2 panels come in various widths, the expanse of work surfaces and the
accessibility of storage can be modified for different work processes. Likewise, varying
the panel heights and types can be helpful in locating hang-on components where
they can easily be reached and where they can provide maximum efficiency. The
varied panel heights provide design flexibility to meet the need for different levels of
privacy and communication.
L
Walls Structure
Glazed panels allow workers a sense of connection to the environment outside the
workspace without compromising the privacy and noise control workers need. Being
able to look into the distance can also relieve the eyestrain of particularly intensive
tasks, like reading, writing, or looking at a computer screen. Open panel frames can
increase air circulation, especially where electronic equipment may generate intense
heat.
Using glazed panels and placing walls so that they block less of the natural light
coming into a building can help open up interior offices to outside light. Where fullheight barriers are required for privacy or acoustics, placing them perpendicular,
rather than parallel, to the windows allows more light to reach inner offices.
Where office walls must run parallel to the windows, keeping walls lower and using
glazed panels for higher walls still allows light to penetrate to inner offices. Clustering
offices with lower walls nearer the windows and full-height private offices around the
building core also allows all offices to receive light. Each of these efforts at opening up
the interior to outside light can be a positive factor in employee productivity and
satisfaction.
Another ergonomic benefit is easy access to power and energy. Because cable
management panels can be placed at any point along the panel run to bring access to
electricity and telecommunications, receptacles and cable communication modules
can be located at a point that is easy to reach at the work surface height, even for
workers with disabilities. In addition, if equipment needs to be moved to another place
on the work surface for better work flow, cable management panels can be moved to
a location accessible to the equipment.
Tool bars and their accessories can be used to organize work for greater accessibility,
better work flow, and more work surface area. Also, marker boards and tackboards
that are easily seen and reached provide a place for visual reminders without causing
workers to stretch, twist, or overreach.
Note: This planning guide includes comments and suggestions about how certain
products may enable customers to comply with the letter and spirit of the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990.
While these are generally useful as guidelines, they are not all-inclusive of ADA
solutions. Accommodating a worker with disabilities may require additional
adaptations and applications based on the individual’s particular needs. It is
recommended that, in each case, the designer work with the individual to ensure
complete accommodation of those needs within the specific work process.
L
Walls Structure
Acoustical Considerations for Panels
While the acoustical performance of panels is an important element in controlling
sound, it is just one of many acoustical factors in the work environment. It must,
therefore, be considered in relationship to those other factors that affect acoustical
control—the building design itself (including ceilings, floor coverings, and window
treatments), the background or ambient noise, and the overall layout of the offices.
In terms of performance, there are three factors that demonstrate a panel’s acoustical
properties: Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC), Sound Transmission Class (STC), and
Noise Isolation Class (NIC').
NRC Measurement
NRC measures the ability to absorb sound; an NRC of at least .65 represents good
acoustical ratings, with ratings of .80 or above in the optimal range.
STC Measurement
STC measures the ability to stop sound from being transmitted (through the panel
core to the other side); an STC of at least 14 is good, with an STC of 22 or above
representing optimal acoustical ratings.
NRC MEASURES ABILITY
TO ABSORB SOUND
SOUND
L
STC MEASURES ABILITY
TO STOP SOUND
SOUND
Walls Structure
NIC' Measurement
NIC' measures the speech privacy afforded by panels in a typical workstation
configuration; it is one of three basic interzonal rating systems that tests how all the
components of a particular open-plan space function together to control sound. The
rating is, in effect, a combined NRC and STC rating. At an NIC' rating of 16,
54 percent of speech is understood; at an NIC' rating of 18, 34 percent of speech is
understood; at an NIC' rating of 21, only 8 percent of speech is understood.
MEASURING NIC' FOR SPEECH PRIVACY IN
TYPICAL WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION
SOUND
METER
ABSORPTIVE
WALLS
SOUND
SOURCE
EXPERIMENTAL
CONFIGURATION
OF WORKSTATIONS
SOUND
MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS
L
Action Office® Series 2 Planning Guide
10
Walls Structure
Panel Types
Action Office Series 2 panels offer a number of alternatives for controlling sound. The
acoustical panel has optimal ratings for both absorbing sound and stopping its
transmission (NRC rating of .80 and STC rating of 22). The fabric-covered panel is not
designed to absorb sound (NRC rating of .10) as much as it is meant to stop sound (a
high STC rating of 25). The tackable acoustical-barrier panel combines a high level of
sound control with tackability, without sacrificing panel strength. This panel is
designed to deliver different functions at different levels (zones of performance)—for
example, superior acoustical control and tackability in the upper portion, where they’re
most needed, and superior strength and durability in the lower portion, where they will
have the most effect. The tackable acoustical-barrier panel has an NIC' rating of 23,
an STC of 28, and an NRC rating of .60 in the user area (.45 across the entire panel).
It is designed to provide effective sound control in environments where workstations
are smaller in size, where panel heights are lower, and where there are more
components and other items hanging on the panel.
Depending on the acoustical needs, all three panel types may be used together to
control sound.
Series 2 Panel Sound-Control Performance
Sound-Controlling Panels
NRC Rating
STC Rating
NIC' Rating
Acoustical Panel
.80
22
—
Fabric-Covered Panel
.10
25
—
Tackable AcousticalBarrier Panel
.60 (user area)
.45 (overall)
28
23
While an NIC' rating is the most relevant predictor of speech privacy in the open-plan
office, it is not yet in widespread use; therefore, many panels do not carry an NIC'
rating. It is important, then, to be able to effectively judge the relationship between a
panel’s NRC and STC ratings and the tradeoffs they require, for it is the relative
balance between the NRC and STC ratings that determines how effectively a panel
can control sound. For example, a higher STC can offset the need for a higher NRC—
and vice versa. In fact, a high NRC alone is not necessarily a reliable indicator of
effective acoustical performance. In many situations, a lower NRC coupled with a
higher STC may deliver the most effective acoustical performance.
Because there is no one “ideal” relationship between the NRC and the STC, both
should be taken into account for the best effect; the balance should be skewed to
favor either absorption or lack of transmission—whichever is the more important
objective. For example, where phone conversations may need to take place in areas
with noisy equipment, NRC (sound absorption) may be the deciding factor. Where
preserving the confidentiality of conversations within a workstation is important or
where eliminating distractions between one workstation and the next is critical, STC
(sound transmission blocking) may be the more decisive factor.
L
11
Walls Structure
Panel Heights
In addition to the appropriate choice of panel type, the height of a panel run has a
significant impact on sound control in an environment. In general, the higher the
panel, the better the acoustical control. Some panel heights—32" and 39" high, for
example—are not offered in an acoustical option, since the acoustical effect would be
so minimal. (The exception is the tackable acoustical-barrier panel, which provides
tacking capability as well as acoustical control and is available in heights from 39" to
85". This panel concentrates its sound control capabilities above work surface height,
where most office sound—conversation, equipment sounds, etc.—occurs.)
Component Placement
The placement of components can also have an impact on a panel’s capacity for
sound control. Hanging a flipper door unit on a panel, for example, decreases the
amount of sound that is transmitted through the panel; hanging the flipper door unit on
an acoustical panel, however, actually decreases the amount of acoustical surface
readily available to absorb sound.
So, the choice of panel type, the height of the panel run, and the number of
components on the panels work together to affect the ability of the panel system to
control sound.
L
12
Walls Structure
Summary of Panel Types and Sizes
This chart summarizes the types of Action Office Series 2 panels available and the
heights and widths in which they can be specified.
Panel Type
Height
Hard-Surfaced Panel (A1110.) Generalpurpose divider; enameled surface
Width
30" 36"
12"
18"
24"
42"
48"
60"
32"
39"
47"
53"
62"
67"
85"
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Fabric-Covered Panel (A1120.) Generalpurpose divider; covered in fabric
32"
39"
47"
53"
62"
67"
85"
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Tackable Acoustical-Barrier Panel
(A1125.) For high degree of sound control
and high degree of tackability and strength;
different performance levels for top and
bottom portions; fabric covered on both
sides
39"
47"
53"
62"
67"
85"
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Acoustical Panel (A1130.) For reducing
sound; fabric covered on both sides
53"
62"
67"
85"
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Glazed Panel (A1160.) For see-through
capability; translucent acrylic insert;
available nonpowered only
62"
67"
85"
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Open Panel Frame (A1150.) For high
degree of accessibility or for shared use of
equipment
62"
67"
85"
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Door Panel (A1190.) For selective privacy;
available with laminate or veneer door and
glazed side panel; nonpowered only; lockable
85"
Cable Management Panel (A1180.)
For vertical distribution of electrical power
and voice/data cables; consists of cable
management panel frame and panel faces
(A1181., A1182.) to cover each side; vinylor fabric-covered panel faces
39"
47"
53"
62"
67"
85"
L
6"
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
13
Walls Structure
Hard-Surfaced Panel
A1110.
Description
This structural panel has enameled
surfaces, a painted top cap, cable
management side covers, and
adjustable glides. It is UL listed and has
a Class A fire-retardant rating.
The powered panel has a factoryinstalled electrical harness that
distributes double-sided, four-circuit
power within a cable management
raceway. Electrical components are UL
listed and CSA certified. 12"- and 18"wide panels have no receptacle or
communication port locations.
Dimensions
Available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67",
and 85" heights and 12", 18", 24", 30",
36", 42", 48", and 60" widths.
Panel depth is 1 7/8".
Panel base height is 4 5/8" (5" nominal)
and depth is 3 1/4".
L
14
Walls Structure
Planning Considerations
The panel hanger rail is slotted at 1"
increments to allow for vertical
adjustment of panel-attached
components.
The leveling glides provide a maximum
of 1 3/4" of height adjustability to
compensate for uneven floors. (The
1 3/4" adjustment is measured from the
underside of the panel base cover to the
floor.)
ENAMELED SURFACE
ON BOTH SIDES
1 ‡«•"
This panel is available in powered and
nonpowered versions. The nonpowered
version is available with or without base
receptacle locations.
Powered panels 12" or 18" wide have no
baseline receptacle or communication
port locations; powered panels 24" to
60" wide have two baseline receptacle
locations and one optional
communication port location per side.
5"
3 ⁄«¢"
The powered version of this panel comes
with an electrical harness for four-circuit
power already installed in the base; it is
also available with an optional cable/
energy barrier between the electrical
system and the voice/data cables. This
barrier is also available as a separate
product to retrofit a panel on site.
Panel top caps are included with the
panels. To distribute cables horizontally
along the top of this panel and adjacent
Series 2 panels requires a voice/data
cable channel.
Panel-top distribution requires that all
panels, panel frames, and connections
be of equal height.
Converting a nonpowered panel to a
powered panel requires a base power
adapter.
Extending power from a powered panel
through a nonpowered panel to the next
adjacent panel requires a panel passthrough power jumper.
Connecting this panel directly to the
building’s electrical supply requires a
power entry product.
L
15
Walls Structure
Connecting panels of equal heights in
a straight line requires a draw rod, cable
management panel draw rod, or spacer.
Connecting a panel to a spacer of the
same height requires only a spacer, but
no additional draw rod. Connecting
panels of equal heights at an angle
requires a two-, three-, or four-way 90°
connector.
Connecting panels of unequal heights
in a straight line requires the appropriate
change-of-height draw rod and panel/
panel change-of-height finished end.
Connecting panels of unequal heights at
an angle requires the appropriate two-,
three-, or four-way 90° connector and
the panel/connector change-of-height
finished end. Connecting a panel to a
spacer of a different height requires a
spacer and a panel/connector changeof-height finished end.
CONNECTING PANELS OF EQUAL HEIGHT
REQUIRES SEPARATE DRAW
ROD, CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL DRAW ROD, OR SPACER
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
REQUIRES 2-, 3-, OR
4-WAY CONNECTOR
…AT ANGLE
CONNECTING PANELS OF UNEQUAL HEIGHTS
Covering the exposed end of a panel
used at the end of a panel run requires
a finished end.
See “Determining Proper Support" in
this section for guidelines on panel
configurations.
Options
Order optional panel connection
components separately:
• Wall Start (AO210.)
• Draw Rod (AO215.)
• Draw Rod, Change of Height
(AO219.)
• Draw Rod, Cable Management Panel
(AO214.)
• 2-Way 90° Connector (A1220.)
• Spacer (A1260.)
• Finished End (A1250.)
• Finished End, Change of Height,
Panel/Panel (AO251.)
Panel/Connector (AO259.)
REQUIRES CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
DRAW ROD AND PANEL/
PANEL CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
…AT ANGLE
CONNECTING PANEL TO SPACER
REQUIRES NO OTHER
CONNECTOR
…OF EQUAL HEIGHT
L
REQUIRES 2-, 3-, OR 4WAY CONNECTOR AND
PANEL/CONNECTOR
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
REQUIRES SEPARATE PANEL/
CONNECTOR CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
…OF DIFFERENT HEIGHT
16
Walls Structure
Order optional power entry products
separately:
• Base Power Entry, Direct Connect,
4 Circuit (A1322.)
• Base Power Entry, Junction Box,
4 Circuit (A1323.)
• Ceiling Power Entry, 4 Circuit (A1331.)
• Ceiling Power Entry, 4 Circuit, Top
Mounted (NP239.)
Order optional energy distribution
• Base Power Adapter, 4 Circuit, with
Side Covers (A1354.)
• Base Power Adapter, 4 Circuit, without
• Panel Pass-Through Power Jumper
(A1342.)
For optional electrical access, order the
following components separately:
• Receptacle, 4 Circuit, 15 Amp
(A1311.)
(X1311.)
• Electrical Distributor, 3 Outlet
(G1313.)
• Electrical Distributor, Multi-Outlet
(NP289.)
Order optional cable management
• Cable Management Trough, Panel
Suspended (AO381.)
• Cable Management Trough,
Horizontal/Vertical (AO383.)
• Cable/Energy Barrier, Panel (A1380.)
For optional panel-top cable distribution,
order the following components
separately:
• Voice/Data Cable Channel (NP227.–
233., NP271.)
• Voice/Data Cable Channel Connector
(NP251., NP234.–237.)
• Voice/Data Cable Channel End Cap
(NP238.)
L
17
Walls Structure
Fabric-Covered Panel
A1120.
Description
This structural panel has fabric surfaces,
a painted top cap, cable management
side covers, and adjustable glides. It is
UL listed and has a Class A fireretardant rating, except when
upholstered with Customer’s Own
Material (COM).
Dimensions
Available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67",
and 85" heights and 12", 18", 24", 30",
36", 42", 48", and 60" widths.
L
18
Walls Structure
components.
FABRIC COVERING
ON BOTH SIDES
1 ‡«•"
floor.)
The fabric-covered panel, while not
designed specifically to control sound,
has a Noise Reduction Coefficient
(NRC) rating of .10 and a Sound
Transmission Class (STC) rating of 25.
5"
3 ⁄«¢"
NRC RATING OF .10,
STC RATING OF 25
cable channel.
be of equal height.
adapter.
L
19
Walls Structure
Connecting panels of equal heights in a
straight line requires a draw rod, cable
connector.
Connecting panels of unequal heights in
a straight line requires the appropriate
a finished end.
See “Determining Proper Support” in
configurations.
Options
(AO219.)
(AO214.)
• Spacer (A1260.)
DRAW ROD, OR SPACER
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
…AT ANGLE
DRAW ROD AND PANEL/
FINISHED END
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
PANEL/CONNECTOR
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
…AT ANGLE
REQUIRES SPACER
…OF EQUAL HEIGHT
L
REQUIRES 2-, 3-, OR
4-WAY CONNECTOR
FINISHED END
20
Walls Structure
separately:
4 Circuit (A1322.)
4 Circuit (A1323.)
Mounted (NP239.)
(A1342.)
(A1311.)
(X1311.)
(G1313.)
(NP289.)
Suspended (AO381.)
separately:
233., NP271.)
(NP251., NP234.– 237.)
(NP238.)
L
21
Walls Structure
Tackable Acoustical-Barrier Panel
A1125.
Description
This structural sound-barrier panel has
fabric surfaces, a painted top cap, cable
management side covers, and
adjustable glides. The panel surface
above the standard work surface height
(approximately 29" from the floor) is
tackable and has a Noise Reduction
Coefficient (NRC) of .60. It has a Sound
Transmission Class (STC) rating of 28
and is UL listed. The panel has a
Class A fire-retardant rating, except
when upholstered with Customer’s Own
Material (COM).
Dimensions
Available in 39", 47", 53", 62", 67", and
85" heights and 12", 18", 24", 30", 36",
42", 48", and 60" widths.
L
22
Walls Structure
components.
FABRIC COVERING
ON BOTH SIDES
1 ‡«•"
floor.)
This panel is constructed to control
sound and provide tackability above the
work surface and to provide structural
strength and durability below the work
surface height.
The tackable acoustical-barrier panel
has a Noise Reduction Coefficient
(NRC) rating of .60 in the user area and
.45 overall, a Sound Transmission Class
(STC) rating of 28, and an NIC' rating
of 23.
29"
5"
3 ⁄«¢"
The tackable area in a tackable
acoustical-barrier panel is the area
above the standard work surface
height—approximately 29" above the
floor.
For applications resulting in heavy
component loading on a tackable
acoustical-barrier panel (for example,
where more than four load-bearing
components are used), a Component
Brace (A3910.) for the hanging
components is recommended. For
applications requiring the component
brace, see “Need for Additional Support”
in the “Determining Proper Support”
section.
NRC RATING OF .60 IN USER
AREA AND .45 OVERALL,
STC RATING OF 28,
NIC' RATING OF 23
TACKABLE AREA
OF PANEL
29"
L
23
Walls Structure
The powered version of this panel
comes with an electrical harness for
four-circuit power already installed in the
base; it is also available with an optional
cable/energy barrier between the
electrical system and the voice/data
cables. This barrier is also available as a
separate product to retrofit a panel on
site.
cable channel.
be of equal height.
adapter.
DRAW ROD, OR SPACER
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
REQUIRES 2-, 3-, OR
4-WAY CONNECTOR
…AT ANGLE
connector.
DRAW ROD AND PANEL/
FINISHED END
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
PANEL/CONNECTOR
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
…AT ANGLE
REQUIRES SPACER
…OF EQUAL HEIGHT
L
FINISHED END
24
Walls Structure
a finished end.
configurations.
Options
• Draw Rod, Change of Height (AO219.)
(AO214.)
• Spacer (A1260.)
separately:
4 Circuit (A1322.)
4 Circuit (A1323.)
Mounted (NP239.)
(A1342.)
(A1311.)
• Receptacle, 4 Circuit, 20 Amp (X1311.)
• Electrical Distributor, 3 Outlet (G1313.)
(NP289.)
L
25
Walls Structure
Suspended (AO381.)
separately:
233., NP271.)
(NP251., NP234.–237.)
(NP238.)
Order the Component Brace (A3910.)
separately.
L
26
Walls Structure
Acoustical Panel
A1130.
Description
This sound-reducing, structural panel
has fabric surfaces, a painted top cap,
cable management side covers, and
adjustable glides. It has a Noise
Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating of
.80 and a Sound Transmission Class
(STC) rating of 22. The panel is UL listed
and has a Class A fire-retardant rating,
except when upholstered with
Customer’s Own Material (COM).
Dimensions
Available in 53", 62", 67", and 85"
heights and 12", 18", 24", 30", 36", 42",
48", and 60" widths.
L
27
Walls Structure
components.
ACOUSTICAL CONTROL
ON BOTH SIDES
1 ‡«•"
floor.)
This panel is designed for areas needing
a high degree of sound reduction.
5"
3 ⁄«¢"
NRC RATING OF .80,
STC RATING OF 22
cable channel.
be of equal height.
adapter.
L
28
Walls Structure
connector.
DRAW ROD, OR SPACER
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
REQUIRES 2-, 3-, OR
4-WAY CONNECTOR
…AT ANGLE
a finished end.
configurations.
Options
(AO219.)
(AO214.)
• Spacer (A1260.)
DRAW ROD AND PANEL/
FINISHED END
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
…AT ANGLE
REQUIRES SPACER
…OF EQUAL HEIGHT
L
PANEL/CONNECTOR
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
FINISHED END
29
Walls Structure
separately:
4 Circuit (A1322.)
4 Circuit (A1323.)
Mounted (NP239.)
(A1342.)
(A1311.)
(X1311.)
(G1313.)
(NP289.)
Suspended (AO381.)
separately:
233., NP271.)
(NP251., NP234.– 237.)
(NP238.)
Limitations
Acoustical panels have a more limited
component load and stricter support
requirements than hard-surfaced panels.
(See “Determining Proper Support” for
specifics.)
L
30
Walls Structure
Glazed Panel
A1160.
Description
This nonpowered structural panel has a
painted frame and top cap, a translucent
acrylic insert, cable management side
covers, and adjustable glides. It cannot
be used as a return panel.
Dimensions
Available in 62", 67", and 85" heights
and 24", 30", 36", 42", and 48" widths.
Actual panel depth is 1 7/8".
components.
GLAZED PANEL ALLOWS
COMPLETE VERTICAL
VISUAL ACCESS
A glazed panel allows visual
communication for people with a hearing
impairment.
floor.)
The glazed panel offers clear glazing for
complete see-through capability or
smoked glazing for translucence only.
While the glazed panel allows power to
pass through the base (using a passthrough power jumper) to adjacent
panels, it does not allow for access to
power. (Its use to distribute power may
be subject to local codes.) Connecting
this panel directly to the building’s
electrical supply requires a separate
cable channel.
L
31
Walls Structure
be of equal height.
connector.
DRAW ROD, OR SPACER
REQUIRES 2-, 3-, OR
4-WAY CONNECTOR
…AT ANGLE
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
a finished end.
Two glazed panels attached to one
another, with load-bearing components
on them, require a connector brace
(Service Part No. 239842). A glazed
panel attached to an open panel frame,
with load-bearing components on them,
requires the same connector brace.
DRAW ROD AND PANEL/
FINISHED END
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
configurations.
…AT ANGLE
REQUIRES SPACER
…OF EQUAL HEIGHT
L
PANEL/CONNECTOR
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
FINISHED END
32
Walls Structure
Options
(AO219.)
(AO214.)
• Spacer (A1260.)
Order the Panel Pass-Through Power
Jumper (A1342.) separately.
separately:
233., NP271.)
(NP251., NP234.– 237.)
(NP238.)
Limitations
The glazed panel cannot be used as a
return panel.
Glazed panels have a more limited
specifics.)
L
33
Walls Structure
Open Panel Frame
A1150.
Description
This structural panel has an opening for
communicating and sharing equipment.
It has a painted frame and top cap,
cable management side covers, and
adjustable glides. The panel cannot be
used as a return panel. It is UL listed
and has a Class A fire-retardant rating.
listed and CSA certified.
Dimensions
Available in 62", 67", and 85" heights
and 24", 30", 36", 42", and 48" widths.
Actual panel depth is 1 7/8".
L
34
Walls Structure
components.
An open panel frame allows visual
communication for people with a hearing
impairment.
Using a turntable for shared equipment
with an open panel frame requires a
minimum panel width of 42" for sufficient
inside clearance. A pass-through cover
(ordered separately) is also required to
fill the gap between the back-to-back
work surfaces.
VARIETY OF PANEL
HEIGHTS AND WIDTHS
TO ACCOMMODATE
SIZE OF EQUIPMENT
TO BE SHARED
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
SHARED THROUGH OPEN
PANEL FRAME
floor.)
Powered panels have two baseline
receptacle locations and one optional
The powered version of this panel
comes with an electrical harness for
four-circuit power already installed in the
base; it is also available with an optional
cable/energy barrier between the
electrical system and the voice/data
cables. This barrier is also available as a
separate product to retrofit a panel on
site.
OPEN PANEL FRAMES
42" AND WIDER
ALLOW SUFFICIENT
INSIDE CLEARANCE
FOR TURNTABLE AND
SHARED EQUIPMENT
OPTIONAL PASS-THROUGH COVER
FILLS GAP BETWEEN
BACK-TO-BACK WORK SURFACES
cable channel.
be of equal height.
L
35
Walls Structure
adapter.
connector.
a finished end.
Two open panel frames attached to one
another, with load-bearing components
on them, require a connector brace
(Service Part No. 239842). An open panel
frame attached to a glazed panel, with
load-bearing components on them,
requires the same connector brace.
DRAW ROD, OR SPACER
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
REQUIRES 2-, 3-, OR
4-WAY CONNECTOR
…AT ANGLE
DRAW ROD AND PANEL/
FINISHED END
…IN STRAIGHT LINE
PANEL/CONNECTOR
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
…AT ANGLE
configurations.
REQUIRES SPACER
…OF EQUAL HEIGHT
L
FINISHED END
36
Walls Structure
Options
• Draw Rod, Change of Height (AO219.)
(AO214.)
• Spacer (A1260.)
separately:
4 Circuit (A1322.)
4 Circuit (A1323.)
Mounted (NP239.)
• Base Power Adapter, with Side
Covers, 4 Circuit (A1354.)
• Base Power Adapter, without Side
Covers, 4 Circuit (A1355.)
(A1342.)
(A1311.)
(X1311.)
(G1313.)
(NP289.)
Suspended (AO381.)
L
37
Walls Structure
separately:
233., NP271.)
(NP251., NP234.– 237.)
(NP238.)
Order the Pass-Through Cover (A2399.)
separately.
Limitations
The open panel frame cannot be used
as a return panel.
Open panel frames have a more limited
specifics.)
L
38
Walls Structure
Door Panel
A1190.
Description
This 85"-high, 48"-wide panel has a
painted frame and top cap, a glazed side
panel, a door, two cable management
side covers, and adjustable glides. The
door can be installed to swing left or
right and to open in or out. The door
cannot be keyed alike. Electrical wires
and voice/data cable cannot be routed
through this panel. Shipped knocked
down.
The panel has a laminate or veneer
door.
Dimensions
Height is 85"; width is 48".
Actual door width is 36".
All doors have a 10 1/2"-wide side
panel, which is available with either clear
glazing for complete see-through
capability or smoked glazing for
translucence only.
CABLE MANAGEMENT CAN
CONTINUE THROUGH OPTIONAL TOP
CHANNELS ACROSS TOPS OF
DOOR PANEL AND ADJACENT PANELS
Panels adjacent to the door panel must
be the same height as the door panel.
Neither electrical wires nor voice/data
cables can be routed through the top
cap included with this panel. To
distribute cables horizontally along the
top of this panel and adjacent Series 2
panels requires a voice/data cable
channel.
Connecting panels to the door panel in a
straight line requires a draw rod for each
connection, ordered separately.
The 36"-wide door permits wheelchair
access, with an opening clearance of
32" with the door at a 90° angle. The
lever handle option conforms to the
guidelines of the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA).
ENERGY CANNOT BE
TRANSMITTED THROUGH
DOOR PANELS
configurations.
L
39
Walls Structure
Options
(AO214.)
• Spacer (A1260.)
order the following:
233., NP271.)
(NP251., NP234.–237.)
(NP238.)
Limitations
The door panel can be used at the end
of a run only if it is adjacent to a
perpendicular wall attached to the door
panel.
L
40
Walls Structure
Cable Management Panel Frame
A1180.
Description
This 6"-wide structural frame holds cable
management panel faces on each side
and has a top cap and cable
management side covers. It is UL listed.
The 39"-high powered frame has one
receptacle location per side; 47"- to 85"high powered frames have two
receptacle locations per side.
Receptacle locations are at work surface
height. The powered frame includes a
harness to extend baseline power to an
adjacent panel and a harness to route
power to work surface height. Electrical
components are UL listed and CSA
certified.
Dimensions
Available in 39", 47", 53", 62", 67", and
85" heights.
Width is 6".
components.
The panel frame forms two separate
vertical chases to house power and
voice/data cables. It includes a metal
conduit to carry electrical power from
the baseline to the work surface and a
pass-through harness at the base.
Another conduit carries voice/data
cables between the baseline and the
ceiling, or from either the baseline or the
ceiling to communication port locations
in the panel frame. The cable capacity is
59 4-pair Category 5 cables when the
panel is nonpowered, and 50 4-pair
Category 5 cables when the panel is
powered.
L
41
Walls Structure
Each side of the panel frame is enclosed
with a separate panel face, which
provides access to power and voice/data
cables at standard vertical locations.
Nonpowered panel faces are one piece;
powered panel faces are segmented,
with the joint at 27" high, to allow access
to the interior of the cable management
panel frame without removing the work
surface.
On powered panel frames, access
options include two duplex receptacle
locations above the work surface, or two
duplex receptacle locations and one
communication port location above the
work surface and two port locations
below it. (The 39"-high panel holds only
one duplex receptacle.) The frame can
also be used as an enclosed chase for
cables, with no point of access.
The powered panel frame accepts
duplex receptacles and accommodates
most manufacturers’ communications
modules (purchased separately from the
manufacturer).
panel frames. This top cap does not
accommodate horizontal cable
distribution. To distribute cables
horizontally along the top of this panel
and adjacent Series 2 panels requires a
voice/data channel. (This alternative
raceway provides an additional 24 4-pair
Category 5 cable capacity, as well as a
channel for cables that is physically
separated from the panel’s baseline
electrical system. Cable distribution
within this voice/data channel is
horizontal only; it does not allow for
vertical distribution to or from the cable
management panel.)
Panel-top cable distribution requires all
to be of equal height.
L
WITH OPTIONAL TOP CHANNEL,
VOICE/DATA CABLES CAN TRAVEL
HORIZONTALLY ACROSS CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL FRAME—BUT
CANNOT TRAVEL VERTICALLY
FROM PANEL TOP CHANNEL
PANEL FRAME
CAN BRING BASE
ELECTRICAL
POWER TO WORK
SURFACE HEIGHT
VOICE/DATA
CABLES AND POWER CAN
TRAVEL HORIZONTALLY
ALONG BASE AND VERTICALLY IN
CABLE
MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME
90Å
CONNECTOR
ELECTRICAL POWER
DISTRIBUTION SIDE
AWAY FROM CONNECTOR
VOICE/DATA
DISTRIBUTION
SIDE NEXT TO
CONNECTOR
42
Walls Structure
A cable management panel frame can
be connected to a panel of the same
height or to a connector of equal or
greater height. Connecting the panel
frame to an adjacent panel of equal
height requires a cable management
panel draw rod. Attaching a panel frame
to a Series 2 connector requires only the
wedge block package included with the
panel frame.
Connecting a panel frame to a
connector that is higher requires a
panel/connector change-of-height
finished end on the adjacent taller
connector.
In connecting the cable management
panel frame to a two-way, three-way, or
four-way 90° connector, the electrical
side of the panel should be positioned
away from the connector and the cable
management side next to the connector.
In connecting the cable management
panel frame to a spacer, the electrical
side of the panel should be positioned
next to the connector and the cable
management side away from the
connector.
CONNECTING CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME TO ANOTHER PANEL…
REQUIRES SEPARATE
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL DRAW ROD
PANEL OF SAME
HEIGHT
CONNECTING CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME TO CONNECTOR…
CONNECTOR OF
GREATER HEIGHT
Options
Order these components separately:
• Cable Management Panel Face
(A1181. for Side 1 and A1182. for
Side 2)
• Communication Port Faceplate,
Reducer (G1189.A)
• Communication Port Faceplate,
Extender (G1189.B)
To connect a cable management panel
frame to another panel of equal height,
order a Draw Rod, Cable Management
Panel (AO214.), separately.
To connect a cable management panel
frame to a connector that is higher, order
a Finished End, Change of Height,
Panel/Connector (AO259.), separately.
L
REQUIRES CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL
DRAW ROD TO MATCH
HEIGHT OF SHORTER
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME
CONNECTOR OF
SAME HEIGHT
REQUIRES ONLY WEDGE BLOCK
PACKAGE INCLUDED WITH CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL FRAME
43
Walls Structure
Order the following optional power entry
products separately:
(A1342.)
(K1311.)
(X1311.)
separately:
NP233., NP271.)
• Voice/Data Channel Connector
(NP251., NP234.– NP237.)
• Ceiling Power Entry (NP239.)
Limitations
The cable management panel frame
cannot be used as the last panel in a
run, because it will not accept any
finished end.
In order to prevent deflection, two cable
management panel frames must not be
attached to each other.
The cable management panel cannot
be connected directly to a panel of a
different height or a lower connector (it
can be connected to a higher
connector).
The cable management panel frame
cannot route cables vertically through its
interior from the optional panel-top
voice/data cable channel; vertical cable
distribution through the panel frame
must originate in the panel frame base
or the ceiling.
L
44
Walls Structure
Cable Management Panel Face
A1181. Side One
A1182. Side Two
Description
This panel face attaches to side one or
side two of a cable management panel
frame.
The panel face has a vinyl or fabric
surface. The 39"-high powered panel
face has one receptacle location per
side; 47"- to 85"-high powered panel
faces have two receptacle locations per
side. Receptacle locations are at work
surface height. The powered panel face
is manufactured in two pieces with a
joint just below work surface height; the
nonpowered panel face has no joint.
Dimensions
Available in heights to fit 39"-, 47"-, 53"-,
62"-, 67"-, and 85"-high cable
management panel frames.
Width is 6".
The joint dividing the segmented
versions is approximately 27" above the
floor.
One panel face is required for each side
of the frame; the frame and each panel
face are ordered separately.
The panel face comes in a one-piece
nonpowered version or a two-piece
segmented powered version, with
options for four-circuit power or fourcircuit power plus communication ports.
The panel face for both powered
versions is manufactured in two
separate sections, an upper and a lower,
which can each be removed to allow
access to the interior of the cable
management panel frame without
removing the work surface.
REMOVABLE PANEL FACE
SNAPS ON AND OFF
The panel face is field installed and is
removable for cable access.
The actual panel face is shorter than the
cable management panel frame, to allow
for the base cover.
L
45
Walls Structure
SIDE 1 OPTIONS
The panel face for side one provides
cable access on the left and electrical
power access on the right; the panel
face for side two provides cable access
on the right and electrical power access
on the left.
The panel face accommodates most
manufacturers’ communications
modules (purchased separately from the
manufacturer).
The panel face can also be field cut to
accommodate custom communication
port locations by selecting the panel
face most closely matching the required
locations and adding custom cutouts.
(The number of custom ports must be
limited to maintain the structural integrity
of the panel face; this can be assured by
maintaining a minimum of 1 1/2"
between cutouts. Also, the placement of
the cutouts must not interfere with the
placement of hanging components.) If
only a few custom ports will be cut, an
ordinary utility knife will suffice. If more
custom ports are needed, contact the
Herman Miller Customer Service
Department for the appropriate dies and
punch.
Options
Order the Communication Port
Faceplate (G1189.A and G1189.B)
separately.
Purchase preconfigured cable
communication modules/faceplates
separately from their manufacturers.
ACCESS TO
POWER ONLY
ACCESS
TO POWER…
NO POWER
OR CABLE
ACCESS
HA OR FA
…AND TO
VOICE/DATA
CABLES
HB OR FB
HC OR FC
SIDE 2 OPTIONS
ACCESS TO
POWER ONLY
ACCESS
TO POWER…
NO POWER
OR CABLE
ACCESS
HA OR FA
…AND TO
VOICE/DATA
CABLES
HB OR FB
HC OR FC
OPTIONAL PORT ACCESS (CUT IN FIELD)—
FOR VOICE/DATA CABLES ONLY, NOT POWER
SPACING OF AT LEAST 1 ⁄«™" REQUIRED
BETWEEN ACCESS HOLES
L
46
Walls Structure
Carpet Gripper
G1190.
Description
These molded, clear plastic grippers fit
onto the adjustable glides of frames and
panels for added stability on carpet.
They cannot be used on hard floors.
Package contains 25.
Carpet grippers have a minimal effect on
the height of the panels.
Limitations
Do not use on hard floors.
CARPET
GRIPPERS
GLIDE FITS INTO
CUPPED CAVITY OF
CARPET GRIPPER
CARPET GRIPPER HELPS
PREVENT PANEL OR
FRAME FROM SLIDING
L
47
Walls Determining Proper Support
Determining
Proper Support
Every wall run requires support. The Action Office system was designed to hold the
maximum number of components per panel. To support a full load of components and
ensure safe, supported, and stable configurations, Action Office walls must be
supported properly and at appropriate intervals.
All support requirements for the Action Office system should be used carefully:
• when designing and specifying
• when installing components and equipment
• when reconfiguring workstations during the life of the facility
Caution: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in product failure and/or
personal injury.
L
48
Types of Support
The Action Office system provides two different types of wall support: those that are
wall height and those that are work surface height. Wall-height supports include
support walls (panels used as returns), wall starts, and Liaison® cabinets; work
surface-height supports include work surface support panels, work surface support
pedestals, and Arrio™ freestanding work surfaces.
Wall-Height Supports
SUPPORT WALL
WALL START
LIAISON CABINET
Support Walls
Support walls are return panels mounted at right angles to a wall run. (A wall run
consists of panels connected in a straight line.) Support walls are used to stabilize
panels used alone or walls carrying load-bearing (and in some cases non-loadbearing) components. Rigid connectors are used to connect support walls.
The following panels are structurally acceptable for use as support walls:
• hard-surfaced panels
• fabric-covered panels
• tackable acoustical-barrier panels
• acoustical panels
• cable management panels connected to any of the above (but not used as the last
panel in the support wall)
Open panel frames and glazed panels should not be used as support panels.
Although peninsula work surfaces are also placed perpendicular to a wall run, they
cannot be used as support elements for the run.
Wall Starts
Wall starts allow panels to be installed at right angles to structural, load-bearing
building walls, columns, or full-height V-Walls.
Note: Herman Miller, Inc., defines a structural wall as a load-bearing wall constructed
of materials such as poured concrete, concrete block, or a composite board (drywall)
attached to metal or wood studs. The composite board (drywall) must be a minimum
of 5/8" thick. The wood studs must be a nominal 2" x 4" size, and the metal studs must
be C channel, 20-gauge thick and of a nominal 2" x 4" size. Whether of wood or
metal, the studs must be on centers no greater than 24", be limited to a maximum
height of 14', and be restrained at the floor and the ceiling.
Liaison Cabinets
Liaison cabinets can be integrated into a run of Action Office panels to provide support.
(Refer to the Liaison cabinet system planning information for support considerations.)
L
49
Work Surface-Height Supports
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT PANEL—END
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT PEDESTAL
ARRIO FREESTANDING
WORK SURFACES
Work Surface Support Panels
End work surface support panels offer a lower (work surface-height) alternative to
support walls (return panels). The work surface support panel generally functions as
the end support—a full-depth supporting panel used below the end of a work surface
to replace a return panel, connector, and work surface support bracket. It can also be
used as a mid-run support in a wall run of panels with work surfaces attached, as a
stabilizer to allow longer, uninterrupted panel runs. (There is no separate mid-run
support for Series 2.)
Work Surface Support Pedestals
Work surface support pedestals are storage units used beneath work surfaces for end
or mid-run support; like work surface support panels, they support both a panel run
and the work surfaces. As mid-run supports, they can be used as stabilizers to allow
longer, uninterrupted panel runs.
Arrio Freestanding Systems Work Surfaces
Arrio work surfaces include fixed- and adjustable-height freestanding table desks,
three-legged corner table desks, and freestanding peninsulas that, when integrated
with Herman Miller systems furniture, provide support to panels. The supporting Arrio
work surfaces can be used either perpendicular or parallel to the wall run and be
positioned at the end of the wall run or at interim points along the wall where support
is required. (Refer to the Arrio freestanding systems furniture planning information for
support considerations.)
L
50
Types of Components
Whether wall-height or work surface-height support is used, it is important to know the
type of components that hang on the panels in order to determine the panel’s load
capacity.
Components that hang on panels fall into two categories: those that are load-bearing
and those that are non-load-bearing (and have no effect on the panel’s load capacity).
Components that fall into each category are listed in the “Component Types” chart.
All load-bearing components must be accounted for in determining the support
requirements of panels, although not all load-bearing components require the same
degree of support. (Work surfaces, hanging pedestals, and lateral files create the
greatest stress.) Some components, like marker boards, are considered non-loadbearing because they create little or no stress on the supporting panel. They are not
counted in determining component load.
Component Types
Load-Bearing Components
Non-Load-Bearing Components
Rectangular Work Surfaces (All)
Peninsula Work Surfaces
Corner Work Surfaces (All)
Transaction Surfaces
Work Surface-Attached Pedestals
Display Shelves
Suspended Lateral Files
Tackboards, Marker Boards
Flipper Door Units
Tool Bars with Work Tools
Shelves
Coat Bars and Shelves
L
51
Support Considerations for Wall-Height Support
The following considerations are critical for determining proper support when using
support walls and wall starts:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Placement of support
Width of support
Height of support
Need for additional support
Frequency of support
Component load capacity
Liaison work cabinets
These support considerations are interdependent: Changing one of them may affect
the requirements for the others. For example, a run of panels of a certain length and
height has a maximum number of load-bearing components that it can carry; if the
length of the wall run is reduced, however, those same-height panels can carry a
greater number of components. This ability to adjust one factor to compensate for
another allows designers and specifiers to meet users’ specific needs for privacy,
space, and amount of storage and work surface area.
The basic support requirements for most wall-height support situations are covered in
this section.
L
52
Placement of Support
Support panels must be attached to both ends of a wall run, regardless of the length
of the wall run or the presence of hanging components.
RIGHT!
ANY WALL RUN REQUIRES
SUPPORT ON BOTH ENDS
WRONG!
NEEDS SUPPORT ON BOTH ENDS
Other than assuring support on both ends of a wall run, the major consideration for
placing support walls is whether or not the wall run carries any load-bearing
components. Support must be placed on the side(s) of the wall carrying load-bearing
components.
RIGHT!
SUPPORT WALLS MUST BE ATTACHED
TO SIDE(S) OF WALL RUN CARRYING
LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS
L
WRONG!
SUPPORT WALLS REQUIRED ON
SIDE(S) OF WALL RUN SUPPORTING
LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS
53
Width of Support
Panels without Load-Bearing Components
Panels used in a freestanding (U ) configuration with no components or with only nonload-bearing components must have returns at least 30" wide for runs up to 60" long
and at least 36" wide for runs greater than 60" long.
UP TO 60"
GREATER THAN 60"
AT LEAST 30"
ONLY NON-LOAD-BEARING
COMPONENTS ATTACHED
RETURNS MUST BE AT LEAST 30" WIDE
FOR RUNS UP TO 60" LONG
WITH SUPPORT WALLS ON ONLY 1 SIDE
AT LEAST 36"
COMPONENTS ATTACHED
RETURNS MUST BE AT LEAST 36" WIDE
FOR RUNS GREATER THAN 60" LONG
WITH SUPPORT WALLS ON ONLY 1 SIDE
When support walls are used on both ends and on both sides (in an H configuration)
as support to a panel run with no components or with non-load-bearing components,
the minimum width for the support walls is 12".
AT LEAST 12"
AT LEAST 12"
COMPONENTS ATTACHED
RETURNS MUST BE AT LEAST
12" WIDE FOR RUNS WITH
SUPPORT WALLS ON BOTH SIDES
The maximum width of a support wall is 60". After that, it becomes a wall run that
itself needs support at both ends; therefore, panel combinations used as support
cannot exceed 60" in width.
L
54
Panels with Load-Bearing Components
For panels carrying load-bearing components, the width of the support wall is
determined independently for each side of the wall run—by the support requirements
for the components attached to that side of the wall run.
24"
24"-DEEP WORK SURFACE
REQUIRES 24"-WIDE
SUPPORT WALL
18"
16"-DEEP SHELF
REQUIRES 18"-WIDE
SUPPORT WALL
WIDTH OF SUPPORT WALL DETERMINED
INDEPENDENTLY FOR EACH SIDE OF WALL RUN
The minimum width of a support wall is determined by the depth of the deepest
component attached to the wall run (at its extended depth, if applicable). If, for
example, a panel within a wall run holds a 24"-deep work surface and another panel
in the same run holds a 16"-deep shelf, a 24"-wide support wall is required at each
end of the wall run.
24"
24"
16"-DEEP SHELF
24"-DEEP WORK SURFACE REQUIRES
24"-WIDE SUPPORT WALL AT EACH END
WIDTH OF SUPPORT WALL DETERMINED BY DEPTH
OF DEEPEST COMPONENT ATTACHED TO WALL RUN
A wall run holding a lateral file requires a support wall at least 24" wide because, even
though the component itself is only 15 1/2" deep, the center of gravity extends to 22"
when the drawer is pulled out. (Technically, the drawer extends to 28", but the center
of gravity, at 22", is more critical.)
22"
24"
24"
CENTER OF GRAVITY WITH
OPEN LATERAL FILE DRAWER
ATTACHED LATERAL FILE REQUIRES
24"-WIDE SUPPORT WALL AT EACH END
WIDTH OF SUPPORT WALL DETERMINED BY EXTENDED DEPTH
OF DEEPEST COMPONENT ATTACHED TO WALL RUN
See “Support Considerations for Work Surface-Height Support” for alternative support
methods.
L
55
A corner work surface requires a support wall matching or exceeding the width of the
corner work surface: 36", 42", 48", or 60".
24"
48"
24" X 48"
CORNER WORK SURFACE
DIFFERENT WIDTH OF SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
ON EACH END FOR CORNER WORK SURFACE
A wall start attached to a building’s structural wall or column always fulfills the support
requirements for a wall run with or without load-bearing components.
COLUMN
LOAD-BEARING
STRUCTURAL
WALL
WALL START
WALL START
WALL START ATTACHED TO STRUCTURAL WALL OR COLUMN ALWAYS
FULFILLS SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS FOR 1 END OF WALL RUN
L
56
The “Component Support Requirements” chart gives a listing of minimum support
requirements for the most commonly used components and configurations in a wall
run. Note that, in general, larger or heavier components require a wider support wall
for support. In contrast, a wall run with no components or only non-load-bearing
components requires a 30"- or 36"-wide return support panel to compensate for the
lack of component weight on the run.
Component Support Requirements
Components Used in Wall Run
Minimum Support Requirements (Per End)
• No components
• Non-load-bearing components
• 30"-wide support wall in run up to 60" long and with no support walls on
opposite side (U configuration)
• 36"-wide support wall in run greater than 60" long and with no support walls on
opposite side (U configuration)
• 12"-wide support panels on both sides (H configuration)
• Wall start attached to structural wall or column
• Shelves: 15 1/2" high (13" or 16" deep)
or 7 1/2" high
• Flipper door unit
• 18"-wide support wall with support walls on both sides (H configuration)
• 24"-wide support wall with no support walls on opposite side (U configuration)
• Work surface, 24" deep
(except peninsula)
• 24"-wide support wall or work surface support panel
• Work surface, 30" deep
(except peninsula)
• 30"-wide support wall or work surface support panel
• Lateral file
• 24"-wide support wall
L
57
Height of Support
The height of support needed to stabilize a configuration is determined by the height
of the panel and the number of load-bearing components on the panel. For example,
a 67"-high panel with four load-bearing components requires a 53"-high support wall
at each end of the wall run. If one component were removed, a 39"-high support panel
would be sufficient. In a panel run where height support requirements vary, the most
stringent requirements (i.e., the support guidelines for the highest panel) apply.
SUPPORT GUIDELINES FOR HIGHEST
PANELS IN WALL RUN APPLY
Support considerations related to panel height assume that differences in height
between adjacent panels are no greater than 28". This restriction applies between
panels in a run as well as between the panel run and its support panels.
28" OR LESS
28" OR LESS
Any time a change in height occurs within a panel configuration, lateral files and work
surfaces must be installed no higher than the height of the lowest panel in that
configuration.
L
58
The “Height of Support” chart illustrates the support panel height requirements under
varying conditions. It shows the minimum height requirements of support panels for
representative numbers of load-bearing components.
Height of Support
Height of
Tallest Panel
in Wall Run
Minimum Height of Support Wall Required to Support Load-Bearing Components
32"
32"
1–3
Components
39"
1–3
Components
47"
1
Component
39"
47"
2–3
Components
4
Components
53"
62"
53"
1–3
Components
4
Components*
62"
1–3
Components*
4
Components*
5–6
Components
4–5
Components*
6
Components*
1
Component
2–3
Components
67"
85"
1–3
Components
67"
85"
4–5
6–8
Components* Components*
*Only hard-surfaced, fabric-covered, and tackable acoustical-barrier panels can support more than 3 load-bearing components per
panel. (See the loading information for other panels under “Component Load Capacity.”)
L
59
Need for Additional Support
Component braces, which must be ordered separately from the components, must be
used with tackable acoustical-barrier panels under the following conditions:
• where four flipper door units, shelves, or lateral files are used in any combination;
• where a flipper door unit or shelf is used above a work surface and suspended
pedestal;
• where more than four load-bearing components are used in any combination.
Note: Because of the way the component brace clips over the bottom edges of two
adjacent components, the components to which the additional support is attached
must hang on adjacent panels and align at the bottom.
Ganging plates, shipped with all squared-edge work surfaces, should be used on all
squared-edge work surfaces hung adjacent to one another along a wall run.
COMPONENT BRACES ENSURE
ADEQUATE SUPPORT AND
MUST BE USED UNDER
CERTAIN CONDITIONS
GANGING PLATES SHOULD
BE USED ON ALL ADJACENT
SQUARED-EDGE WORK SURFACES
Work surface brackets should be used on the front corners of all work surfaces used
on 85"-high panels. The brackets will also provide additional support on other panel
heights.
85"
L
WORK SURFACE BRACKETS
SHOULD BE USED ON FRONT
CORNERS OF WORK SURFACES
ON 85"-HIGH PANELS
60
Effect of Panel Type
Whether panels are load bearing or not, support is required—at the beginning and
end of the wall run and possibly within the wall run itself. Because of the variety of
Action Office panels available and the different type of construction for each one, load
capacity or frequency of support may differ from the general guidelines.
Frequency of Support
The length of the wall run between support walls depends on the type of panel used
in the run and on the components attached to the panels.
Whenever panels with different support requirements are used in the same wall run,
the most stringent support requirements must be followed.
Hard-surfaced, fabric-covered, and tackable acoustical-barrier panels—and cable
management panels when used in conjunction with those panels—require support
every 10' when used in a run carrying any number of load-bearing components.
MAXIMUM SPAN BETWEEN SUPPORTS—10'
WITH ANY NUMBER OF LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS
10'
HARD-SURFACED, FABRIC-COVERED, TACKABLE
ACOUSTICAL-BARRIER, OR CABLE MANAGEMENT PANELS
When an acoustical panel is used in a run carrying load-bearing components, the limit
is 8' or 10' between support walls (8' with three components per panel, 10' with two
components).
WITH 3 LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS PER PANEL
WITH 2 LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS PER PANEL
10'
8'
WITH ONE OR MORE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
Glazed panels and open panel frames have an 8' wall run limit.
8'
GLAZED AND OPEN PANEL FRAMES
L
61
Any single panel, whether it carries load-bearing components or not, requires support
at each end. In a wall run, if the panels carry no load-bearing components, support is
required at the beginning and the end of the wall run, and only every 12' in between,
no matter what type of panel is in the run.
WITH NON-LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS
12'
ALL PANEL TYPES
Frequency of Support
Type of Panel
With Load-Bearing
Components
With Non-Load-Bearing
Components
Hard-Surfaced
Every 10'
Every 12'
Fabric-Covered
Every 10'
Every 12'
Tackable AcousticalBarrier
Every 10'
Every 12'
Acoustical
Every 8' (with 3 components)
Every 10' (with 2 components)
Every 12'
Glazed
Every 8'
Every 12'
Open Panel Frame
Every 8'
Every 12'
Door Panel
Every 8'*
Every 12'*
Cable Management
Panel
Every 10'*
Every 12'*
*In combination with other panels
L
62
Component Load Capacity
Action Office hard-surfaced, fabric-covered, and tackable acoustical-barrier panels,
and cable management panels used with them, are designed to support any number
of load-bearing components that can fit on the panel. Within the physical limitations
imposed by their height, there is no load-bearing component limit on these panels.
(When these panels are used in conjunction with a cable management panel, the
load-bearing component capacity remains the same.) Other panel types, however,
have unique construction properties that affect load capacity.
Acoustical Panels
Acoustical panels are designed to support the sound-control efforts in an office. To
achieve the maximum sound-control benefit, as well as to account for their different
construction, it is advisable to minimize the number of components hung on these
panels.
Acoustical panels—no matter what height—have a maximum load capacity of three
load-bearing components per side, only one of which can be a work surface. It is
possible to have more than one work surface only if there are no other load-bearing
components on the panel. Also, these panels cannot carry three of the same loadbearing components per side, except shelves or flipper door units.
Frequency of support for acoustical panels also differs from the guidelines for hardsurfaced, fabric-covered, and tackable acoustical-barrier panels. With two components
(on one or both sides) on the panel, the frequency of support (at 10') is the same as
any other panel, but the frequency of support increases to every 8' when a third
component is added.
The chart that follows summarizes the maximum capacities—by component—for
acoustical panels:
Load Capacities for Acoustical Panels
Length of
Wall Run
Maximum Number of Load-Bearing
Components Per Panel Per Side
8'
3
• 3 shelves or flipper door units
• 1 work surface, plus 2 shelves or 2 flipper door units
• 2 work surfaces with no other load-bearing components,
including hanging pedestals
• 1 suspended lateral file plus 2 shelves or 2 flipper door units
• 2 suspended lateral files with no other load-bearing
components
10'
2
• 2 shelves or flipper door units
• 1 work surface, plus 1 shelf or 1 flipper door unit
12'
0
• No load-bearing components
L
63
When hanging lateral files, work surfaces, or work surfaces with hanging pedestals on
any configuration of acoustical panels, the following additional guidelines must also be
observed:
• None of the components can be installed above the 62" height.
• None of the components can be installed above the height of the lowest panel in
the configuration.
If additional components (more than the stated limits) are hung on any acoustical
panel, then one of the following two options must be applied:
• Counterbalancing must be applied. (Components of equal load are hung on the
panel’s other side to offset the load on the first side.)
• The wall run length must be reduced to a maximum of 6' between support walls.
Glazed Panels and Open Panel Frames
Glazed panels and open panel frames are panels designed to provide visual access
or pass-through functions for shared equipment. The number of load-bearing
components per panel is the same as for acoustical panels (a maximum of three), but
these panels are to be used only in runs up to 8' long.
If additional components (more than the stated limits) are hung on any glazed panel
or open panel frame, then one of the following two options must be applied:
• Counterbalancing must be applied. (Components of equal load are hung on the
panel’s other side to offset the load on the first side.)
• The wall run length must be reduced to a maximum of 6' between support walls.
Liaison Work Cabinets
Liaison work cabinets are often integrated into a run of Action Office Series 2 panels.
The dimensions of Liaison work cabinets are not included when adding up panel
widths to determine the length of the wall run and the proper frequency of support.
(See the Liaison cabinet system planning information for specifics about support
guidelines for work cabinets.)
30"
30"
30" RETURN
(REQUIRED FOR
60" WALL RUN)
LIAISON CABINET WIDTH NOT
INCLUDED IN DETERMINING
SUPPORT FOR WALL RUN
L
64
Support Considerations for Work Surface-Height Support
The second type of support for Action Office wall runs comprises work surface-height
support products: end work surface support panels, work surface support pedestals,
and Arrio freestanding work surfaces, which can be used as either end or mid-run
support. Unlike wall-height supports, work surface support panels and support
pedestals can be used as support only for a wall run with work surfaces along its
entire length.
Work surface support panels and pedestals can replace support walls under some
conditions. They are used as stabilizers to allow longer, uninterrupted runs, replacing
a return panel, connector, and work surface support bracket.
When work surface support panels or pedestals are used, all work surfaces along the
entire wall run must be ganged together to ensure maximum support, and work
surface brackets must be used at the front outside corners of the work surface run.
WHEN WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANELS OR
PEDESTALS ARE USED (END OR MID-RUN)
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET—
WORK SURFACE BRACKETS
FOR ADDITIONAL SUPPORT
WORK SURFACES
MUST BE GANGED
WORK SURFACES MUST BE USED THE
ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE WALL RUN
The following considerations are critical for determining proper support when using
work surface-height supports:
•
•
•
•
Placement of support
Depth of support
Panel height and component load
Length of wall run and frequency of support
This section outlines some of the design guidelines that must be met to ensure the
proper performance of end work surface support panels or support pedestals used as
work surface-height support. The guidelines for proper support when using Arrio
freestanding work surfaces are covered under “Determining Proper Support” in the
Arrio Freestanding Systems Furniture Planning Guide.
L
65
Placement of Support
A work surface support panel or work surface support pedestal can be used at one
end of a wall run only. The other end must be supported by a support wall.
RIGHT!
WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANEL
OR PEDESTAL CAN BE USED AT
1 END OF WALL RUN
WRONG!
WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANEL
OR PEDESTAL CANNOT BE USED
AT BOTH ENDS OF WALL RUN
Likewise, if a work surface support panel or pedestal is used at the end of a wall run,
then a work surface-height support cannot be placed as the next support in the wall run.
RIGHT!
WORK SURFACE-HEIGHT SUPPORT PANELS
AND PEDESTALS CAN BE USED SINGLY OR
IN MULTIPLES WITHIN WALL RUN AS LONG
AS WALL RUN IS SUPPORTED AT BOTH
ENDS BY WALL-HEIGHT RETURNS
WRONG!
IF WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANEL OR
PEDESTAL IS USED AT END OF WALL RUN,
THEN WORK SURFACE-HEIGHT SUPPORT CANNOT
BE PLACED AS NEXT SUPPORT IN WALL RUN
For placement of Arrio work surfaces used as support, see the Arrio Freestanding
Systems Furniture Planning Guide.
L
66
Depth of Support
The depth of the work surface support panel used at the end of a wall run must match
the depth of the work surface it supports—for example, the 24"-deep end support
panel must be used to support a 24"-deep work surface, and the 30"-deep end
support panel to support a 30"-deep work surface.
RIGHT!
WIDTH OF SUPPORT
PANEL MATCHES DEPTH
OF WORK SURFACE
WRONG!
MUST USE SUPPORT PANEL IN
WIDTH THAT MATCHES DEPTH
OF WORK SURFACE
With support pedestals used at the end of a panel run, the 20"-deep support pedestal
must be used to support a 24"-deep work surface and the 24"-deep pedestal must be
used to support a 30"-deep work surface.
FILLER MAKES SUPPORT
PEDESTAL FLUSH WITH FRONT
EDGE OF WORK SURFACE
The work surface support pedestal can be used within a wall run to extend the length
of that wall run and to stabilize the longer run. As an alternative, the 24"-deep work
surface support panel end can be used in the middle of a run to support 24"- or
30"-deep work surfaces. Note, however, that neither mid-run work surface support
alternative allows the panel base cover to flip down to provide access to wiring and
cabling.
DOES NOT ALLOW ACCESS TO
CABLE MANAGEMENT BASE
END WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANEL OR SUPPORT PEDESTAL CAN
BE USED AS MID-RUN STABILIZER WITH CERTAIN LIMITATIONS
When using Arrio freestanding work surfaces for support, see the Arrio Freestanding
Systems Furniture Planning Guide for requirements.
L
67
Panel Height and Component Load
The maximum height for panels in a run utilizing work surface support panels or
pedestals is 67". (Because of the extreme difference in height between the panels in
the wall run and the work surface support, panels 85" high can be used only if they
hold no load-bearing components other than work surfaces.)
Because the work surface support panel is attached to both the work surface and the
panel, there is no restriction on maximum difference in height between adjoining
panels.
The maximum component load per panel when supported by a work surface support
panel or pedestal is as follows:
• one flipper door unit
• one tackboard
• one work surface
85"
67"
MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 67"
FOR PANELS IN WALL RUN;
MAXIMUM LOAD PER PANEL—
FLIPPER DOOR UNIT, TACKBOARD,
AND WORK SURFACE
MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 85"
IF PANELS IN WALL RUN HOLD
NO LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS
OTHER THAN WORK SURFACE
Suspended lateral files cannot be used on the same wall run as the work surface
support panel or pedestal.
WRONG!
WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANEL OR
PEDESTAL CANNOT BE USED ALONG SAME
WALL RUN AS PANEL-HUNG LATERAL FILES
Load and height allowances are also affected by the length of the wall run; see
“Length of Wall Run and Frequency of Support” for further guidelines. See also
“Determining Proper Support” in the Arrio Freestanding Systems Furniture Planning
Guide when Arrio work surfaces are used for support.
L
68
Length of Wall Run and Frequency of Support
A wall run supported by a work surface support panel or pedestal on one end must
meet the following guidelines. When using Arrio freestanding work surfaces for
support, see the Arrio Freestanding Systems Furniture Planning Guide for
requirements.
• Maximum length of wall run with hard-surfaced, fabric-covered, and tackable
acoustical-barrier panels is 10'.
MAXIMUM SPAN
10'
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT PANEL
(OR PEDESTAL)
HARD-SURFACED,
FABRIC-COVERED, OR
TACKABLE ACOUSTICALBARRIER PANEL
• Maximum length of wall run with a 6"-wide cable management panel is 8' plus the
6"-wide panel (a total of 8'-6").
MAXIMUM SPAN
8'-6"
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT PANEL
(OR PEDESTAL)
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL
• Maximum length of wall run with acoustical panels is 8'.
MAXIMUM SPAN
8'
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT PANEL
(OR PEDESTAL)
L
69
End work surface support panels or support pedestals used within a run of work
surfaces can be used as stabilizers to increase the length of the run between support
walls if the following guidelines are met. (As with other uses of work surface-height
support, work surfaces must be used the entire length of the wall run, and the work
surfaces must be secured at their front corners with ganging clips.)
• All wall runs (any panel type) between 10' and 16' must have one mid-run stabilizer
(an end support panel or a support pedestal), and the mid-run stabilizer must be
centered. A 16' panel run of acoustical panels requires work surface brackets at
both ends of the wall run.
16'
(MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 67")
RETURN WALL
RETURN WALL
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT (CENTERED)
MAXIMUM RUN OF 16' WITH MID-RUN
STABILIZER (MUST BE CENTERED)—
APPLICABLE FOR ANY PANEL TYPE
• To extend the wall run to a maximum of 20', two mid-run stabilizers (centered) are
required; only hard-surfaced, fabric-covered, or tackable acoustical-barrier panels
with a maximum height of 67" can be used.
20'
RETURN WALL
RETURN WALL
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT (CENTERED)
MAXIMUM RUN OF 20' WITH 2 MID-RUN STABILIZERS
(MUST BE POSITIONED NEAR CENTER OF RUN)—
APPLICABLE FOR HARD-SURFACED, FABRICCOVERED, AND TACKABLE ACOUSTICAL-BARRIER
PANELS ONLY
L
70
• To extend the wall run to a maximum of 24', two mid-run stabilizers (equally
spaced) are required, and the panel height of the wall is limited to a maximum of
53". Under this condition, hanging components are limited to the low shelf, small
tackboard, and work tool bar with tools in addition to the work surface.
24'
RETURN WALL
RETURN WALL
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT (CENTERED)
MAXIMUM RUN OF 24' WITH 2 MID-RUN STABILIZERS
(LIMITED LOADING)
There is an exception to these length-of-run guidelines: a group of workstations of any
height using only work surfaces along its entire length and carrying no load-bearing
components above the work surface height. Because of the absence of load-bearing
components above the work surface height, this configuration is stable enough to
carry no length-of-run limitations. The only support required is mid-run support (work
surface support panels or pedestals) every 10' along the entire length of the wall run.
UNLIMITED
RETURN WALL
RETURN WALL
MID-RUN SUPPORT EVERY 10'
UNLIMITED LENGTH OF WALL RUN
(NO LOAD-BEARING COMPONENTS ABOVE WORK SURFACE HEIGHT)
L
71
A Summary of Work Surface Support Panel/Support Pedestal Considerations
The following chart summarizes, by length of run, the support required, the maximum
height allowed, and the maximum number of components allowed when using work
surface support components.
Work Surface Support Panel and Support Pedestal Requirements*
Length of
Wall Run
Maximum Height
of Panels in
Wall Run
8'
67"
• Used at 1 end only
• Requires work surfaces across entire width of wall run
• Requires all work surfaces to be ganged
10'
67"
• Used at 1 end only
• Requires use of hard-surfaced, fabric-covered, or tackable acoustical-barrier
panels only
• Requires use of front ganging clip
10' – 16'
67"
• Requires use of wall-height support, not work surface-height support components,
at ends
• Requires mid-run support (centered)
18' – 20'
67"
at ends
• Requires use of hard-surfaced, fabric-covered, or tackable acoustical-barrier
panels only
• Requires 2 mid-run supports (centered)
• Requires use of front ganging clip
22' – 24'
53"
at ends
• Requires 2 mid-run supports
• Requires work surfaces across entire width of wall run; other hanging components
limited to low shelf, small tackboard, and work tool bar with tools
Unlimited
85"
at ends
• Requires mid-run support every 10'
• Requires work surfaces across entire width of wall run—no other load-bearing
components
Work Surface Support Requirements
(Panel or Pedestal)
* See the Arrio Freestanding Systems Furniture Planning Guide for work surface
support requirements when Arrio work surfaces are used as work surface-height
support.
L
72
Walls Connecting and Finishing Walls
Connecting and
Finishing Walls
RECTANGULAR PAINTED TOP CAPS
ON PANELS, CONNECTORS, AND
FINISHED ENDS
There is a range of choices in hardware for connecting panels (of equal or unequal
heights) to one another or to architectural walls, and for finishing off a panel run. With
finished-end products, exposed changes of panel height are given a finished look.
L
73
Making Panel Connections
With Series 2 connecting hardware, panels can be connected in a straight line, using
draw rods or spacers, or in as many as four different 90° connections, using 90°
connectors or wall starts.
The connecting hardware for Series 2 panels is easy to assemble and reconfigure.
The metal draw rod/wedge block mechanism pulls the panels together and
automatically aligns the tops of the panels. The result is a strong, rigid, panel-to-panel
joint that retains its strength and rigidity through numerous reconfigurations.
Adjoining panels can be of equal height or can vary by as much as 28". Such panelto-panel, in-line changes of height are possible without spacers or other corner
connectors. When baseline cable management is used, changes in height do not
interfere with this capability. When optional panel-top voice/data cable channels are
used, panels must be of equal height.
Finished ends and change-of-height products give the layout a finished appearance at
the end of a wall run or at the point where there is a change of height between
adjacent panels.
CONNECTION USING
2-WAY 90Å CONNECTOR
FINISHED
END
CONNECTION USING
CONNECTION USING CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL TO
PROVIDE ELECTRICAL AND
DATA ACCESS
PANELS CONNECTED
IN STRAIGHT LINE
WITH DRAW ROD
90Å CONNECTION
USING WALL START
CONNECTION USING
PANELS CONNECTED IN
STRAIGHT LINE USING SPACER
(USED INSTEAD OF DRAW ROD
TO BALANCE USE OF 3-WAY 90Å
CONNECTOR ON OPPOSITE WALL)
L
74
Wall Attachment Hardware
Wall strips, along with their fasteners, are used to attach Action Office hanging
components to architectural walls. When centered on a modular dimension ranging
from 24" to 96" in 6" increments, wall strips can accept standard-width Series 2 wallattached components in much the same way as a panel does. (Note that wall strips
may also be centered on other dimensions to match the widths of work surfaces that
do not match panel widths.)
CENTER AT MODULAR DIMENSION
RANGING FROM 24" TO 96" IN
6" INCREMENTS TO ACCEPT
MOST STANDARD-WIDTH
WALL-ATTACHED COMPONENTS
POSITION FLUSH
TO FLOOR
Note: Action Office Series 2 panels can also be connected to V-Wall® full-height walls,
a floor-to-ceiling partition system designed to complement Series 2 panels. V-Wall
products are available in matching trim and surface finishes to provide an
aesthetically integrated facility with the privacy of ceiling-height walls.
While V-Wall products can be used alone, they are fully compatible with Series 2
panel-attached components and can intersect with Series 2 panels. This capability to
interface allows complete planning continuity, whether utilizing full- or partial-height
dividers. (Call 1-800-255-9255 for planning information for V-Wall products.)
L
75
Planning for Dimensional Gain
All connections, except those using the straight-line draw rod, add inches to a panel
run. This factor must be kept in mind, especially where panel runs are long and space
is limited, or where two opposite panel runs must be of equal length. The various
connections and their dimensional gain are as follows:
Straight-line connection made with Draw Rod (AO215.): No dimensional gain.
IN
GA
NO
Straight-line connection made with Spacer (A1260.): Add 3 1/2" to the panel run for
each connection.
+3
"
⁄«™
A 90° connection made with 2-Way 90° Connector (A1220.): Add 3 1/2" for each
connection, in both directions.
™"
⁄«
+3
L
+3
⁄«™
"
76
A 90° connection made with 3-Way 90° Connector (A1230.): Add 3 1/2" to panel run
for each connection of two panels abutting one another in a straight line and 3 1/2" for
each perpendicular connection.
™"
⁄«
+3
+3
⁄«™
"
A 90° connection made with 4-Way 90° Connector (A1240.): Add 3 1/2" to panel run
for each connection.
+3
⁄«™
"
+3
"
⁄«™
A 90° connection made with Wall Start (AO210.) and Draw Rod (AO215.) of same
height as the wall start: Add 13/16" for each 90° connection.
+⁄
‹«¡
§"
L
77
Trim made with Finished End (A1250.): Add 5/8" for each finished end.
«•"
+ fi
L
78
This chart serves as a quick reference to dimensional gain with Action Office Series 2
connecting and finishing hardware.
Dimensional Gain from Connecting and Finishing Hardware
Hardware
Dimensional Gain
(Per Connection or Finished End)
Frame Connectors
Draw Rod
Spacer
2-Way 90° Connector
Wall Start
None
3 1⁄ 2"
3 1⁄ 2"
3 1⁄ 2"
3 1⁄ 2"
13⁄16"
Finished Ends
Finished End
5⁄ 8"
Note: Work surface support panels add no dimensional gain to panel run.
L
79
Wall Strip
AO213.
Description
This wall strip attaches with wall
fasteners to a structural wall to support
hanging components. Two wall strips are
required to hang a component.
The 60"-high wall strip requires 8
fasteners; the 72"-high wall strip requires
9 fasteners; and the 84"-high wall strip
requires 11 fasteners.
Dimensions
Available in 60", 72", and 84" heights.
Width is 1"; depth is 3/4".
Wall strips have slots that allow hanging
components to be adjusted vertically in
1" increments.
Two wall strips are required to hang
components—one on each end of the
product; the wall strips should be
centered on modular dimensions that
match the wall-attached components to
be hung.
Components can be hung to the left and
to the right from each wall strip—one
component from the slot on the left and
one from the slot on the right.
Finishing the exposed edge of a wall
strip requires attachment of a trim strip.
1"
SLOTS EVERY 1"
FOR ATTACHING
COMPONENTS
CENTER AT MODULAR
DIMENSIONS TO MATCH
WALL-ATTACHED
COMPONENTS TO BE HUNG
The selection of the appropriate wall
fastener package depends on whether
the wall strips are to be fastened to
concrete block or poured walls, to
drywall, or to metal or wood studs. Wall
strips are shipped without fasteners.
Wall strips should be attached flush to
the floor for maximum stability.
POSITION FLUSH
TO FLOOR
L
80
When using wall strips in a corner
formed by two architectural walls, the
first wall strip should be centered 1 1/2"
from the corner; this achieves modular
dimensions for components at 90°
angles.
Using a wall strip in a corner formed by
a panel and an architectural wall
requires that the wall strip be flush to a
wood shim 11/16" x 1 1/2". (The wood
block shim, which must be provided by
the installer, is required to maintain
proper alignment of modular
components hung perpendicular to one
another.)
1 ⁄«™"
1 ⁄«™"
CENTER STRIPS
1 ⁄«™" FROM CORNER
1 ⁄«™"
Options
Order the appropriate Wall Fasteners
(AO291.) separately.
Order the Trim Strip (AO212.)
separately.
Limitations
To ensure stability, wall strips may not
be cut to a shorter length.
WOOD SHIM
(SUPPLIED BY
INSTALLER)
⁄⁄«¡§" SHIM
WALL
START
SHIM REQUIRED TO
MAINTAIN MODULAR
DIMENSION WITH
PERPENDICULAR
WORK SURFACE
WALL
STARTS
L
81
Trim Strip
AO212.
Description
This strip finishes one exposed edge of
a wall strip.
Dimensions
Available in 60", 72", and 84" heights.
Select the trim strip to match the height
of the wall strip.
The Wall Strip (AO213.) is ordered
separately.
Wall Fastener
AO291.
Description
This black panhead fastener attaches a
wall strip to a wall. Package contains
100.
Dimensions
Available in 1 1/2"- and 3"-long sheet
metal screws and 3"-long machine
screw types to fit 60"-, 72"-, and 84"high wall strips.
Select the appropriate wall fastener to
accommodate the following wall types:
• No. 10 x 1 1/2" panhead sheet metal
screw for use with cement blocks,
poured walls, and brick
• No. 10 x 3" panhead sheet metal
screw for use with studs or TC toggles
in drywall
• No. 10 x 3" machine screw for use
with wing toggles or mollys in drywall
WALL STUD
The drywall must be a minimum of 5/8"
thick.
Each 60"-high wall strip requires 10
fasteners; each 72"-high wall strip
requires 12 fasteners; and each 84"-high
wall strip requires 14 fasteners.
L
82
Wall Start
AO210.
Description
This assembly connects an Action Office
Series 1 or 2 panel to an architectural
wall, column, or panel of equal height at
a 90° angle.
Dimensions
Available in 27", 34", 42", 48", 57", 62",
and 80" heights.
For Action Office Series 1 panels, the
wall start is ordered to match the panel
height. For Action Office Series 2
panels, the wall start is 5" shorter than
the actual panel to allow for the height of
the panel base and top cap.
CONNECTS PANEL TO
STRUCTURAL WALL
OR BUILDING COLUMN
AT 90Å ANGLE
DRAW ROD
The connection requires a draw rod.
When a wall start is used in conjunction
with wall strips, a wood shim is required
to maintain proper modular dimensions.
See the wall strip product information in
this section for more information.
The wall start adds 13/16" to a panel
run. See “Planning for Dimensional
Gain” in this section for more
information.
Options
Order the Draw Rod (AO215.)
separately.
L
83
Draw Rod
AO215.
Description
This draw rod connects Action Office
Series 1 or 2 panels of equal heights in
a straight line.
Dimensions
Available in 27", 34", 42", 48", 57", 62",
and 80" heights.
This draw rod is used to connect an
Action Office Series 1 or Series 2 panel
to another Action Office Series 1 or
Series 2 panel of the same height or to
a wall start of equal height. The
connections must be in a straight line.
5" SHORTER THAN
SERIES 2 PANEL
draw rod is ordered to correspond to the
panel height. For Action Office Series 2
panels, the draw rod is ordered 5"
shorter than the actual panel height to
allow for the height of the base.
The chart below lists the draw rod
heights and the corresponding Action
Office Series 1 or Series 2 panel
heights.
180Å
Draw
Rod
Action Office
Series 1 Panel
Action Office
Series 2 Panel
27"
34"
42"
48"
57"
62"
80"
27"
34"
42"
48"
—
62"
80"
32"
39"
47"
53"
62"
67"
85"
L
84
Draw Rod, Change of Height
AO219.
Description
The change-of-height draw rod connects
Action Office Series 1 or 2 panels of
unequal heights in a straight line.
Dimensions
Available in 27", 34", 42", 48", 57",
and 62" heights.
This change-of-height draw rod is used
to connect an Action Office Series 1 or
Series 2 panel to another Action Office
Series 1 or Series 2 panel that is higher
or lower. The panels must be in a
straight line.
WEDGE
BLOCK
HOOKS
change-of-height draw rod is ordered to
correspond to the height of the lower
panel. For Action Office Series 2 panels,
the draw rod is ordered 5" shorter than
the actual panel height (of the lower
panel) to allow for the height of the base.
MATCHES HEIGHT
OF LOWER PANEL
REQUIRES PANEL/PANEL
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END
The chart below lists the draw rod
heights and the corresponding Action
Office Series 1 or Series 2 panel
heights.
Finishing off the exposed end of the
higher panel requires a change-ofheight finished end.
180Å
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT DRAW
ROD CONNECTS 2 PANELS
OF UNEQUAL HEIGHT IN
STRAIGHT LINE
The height difference between two
connected panels is limited to a
maximum of 28".
Options
Order the Finished End, Change of
Height, Panel/Panel (AO251.),
separately.
L
Change-of-Height
Draw Rod
Action Office
Series 1 Panel
Action Office
Series 2 Panel
27"
34"
42"
48"
57"
62"
27"
34"
42"
48"
—
62"
32"
39"
47"
53"
62"
67"
85
Draw Rod, Cable Management Panel
AO214.
Description
This draw rod connects a cable
management frame to an Action Office
Series 2 panel of equal height in a
straight line.
Dimensions
Actual heights are 34", 42", 48", 57",
62", and 80".
This draw rod is used only with a cable
management panel—to connect it to an
Action Office Series 2 panel of equal
height in a straight line.
CABLE
MANAGEMENT
PANEL
The height of the draw rod corresponds
to the height of the cable management
panel; but the draw rod is ordered 5"
shorter than the actual height of the
cable management panel to allow for the
height of the base. The chart below lists
the draw rod heights and the
corresponding panel heights.
Cable
Management
Panel Draw Rod
Cable
Management
Panel
34"
42"
48"
57"
62"
80"
39"
47"
53"
62"
67"
85"
L
5" SHORTER THAN
PANEL TO ALLOW FOR
BASE AND TOP CAP
86
A1220.
Description
This connector joins two panels of equal
or unequal heights at a 90° angle and
has a cable management side cover.
The connector has an enameled or
fabric surface.
Dimensions
Available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67",
and 85" heights to match standard panel
heights.
Connecting two panels of equal height
requires a 90° connector the same
height as the panels.
ORDER CONNECTOR
TO MATCH HIGHER PANEL
REQUIRES CHANGEOF-HEIGHT FINISHED
END TO COVER
EXPOSED PORTION
Connecting two panels of unequal
heights requires a 90° connector the
height of the higher panel; a separate
change-of-height finished end finishes
the exposed end of the connector.
Adjacent panels with cable/energy
barriers also require a cable/energy
barrier for the connector.
The connector adds 3 1/2" to a panel
information.
Options
Height, Panel/Connector (AO259.),
separately.
90Å
90Å
CONNECTS 2 PANELS OF
EQUAL OR UNEQUAL HEIGHTS
Order Cable/Energy Barrier, Connector
(A1381.1), separately.
L
87
Spacer
A1260.
Description
This spacer joins two panels of equal or
unequal heights in a straight line and
also compensates for dimensional gain
in a panel run. It has two cable
management side covers.
The spacer has enameled or fabric
surfaces.
Dimensions
Available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67",
heights.
Connecting two panels of equal height
requires a spacer the same height as
the panels.
requires a spacer the height of the
higher panel; a separate panel/
connector change-of-height finished end
finishes off the exposed end of the
spacer.
ORDER CONNECTOR
TO MATCH HIGHER PANEL
REQUIRES PANEL/
CONNECTOR CHANGEOF-HEIGHT FINISHED
END TO COVER
EXPOSED PORTION
barrier for the spacer.
The spacer adds 3 1/2" to a panel run.
See “Planning for Dimensional Gain” in
this section for more information.
Options
separately.
180Å
180Å
L
88
A1230.
Description
This connector joins three panels of
equal or unequal heights at 90° angles
and has a cable management side
cover.
The connector has an enameled or
fabric surface.
Dimensions
Available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67",
heights.
Connecting three panels of the same
height requires a connector the same
height as the panel.
requires a three-way 90° connector the
height of the highest panel; a separate
panel/connector change-of-height
finished end finishes each exposed end
of the connector.
ORDER CONNECTOR
TO MATCH HIGHEST PANEL
REQUIRES PANEL/
END TO COVER
EXPOSED PORTION
90Å
barrier for the 90° connector.
information.
Options
separately.
180Å
L
89
A1240.
Description
This connector joins four panels of equal
or unequal heights at 90° angles and
has an enameled surface. It does not
require a cable management side cover.
Dimensions
Available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67",
heights.
Connecting four panels of the same
height requires a connector the same
height as the panels.
requires a four-way 90° connector the
height of the highest panel; order a
separate panel/connector change-ofheight finished end to finish each
exposed end of the connector.
barrier for the 90° connector.
ORDER CONNECTOR
TO MATCH HIGHEST PANEL
REQUIRES PANEL/
END TO COVER
EXPOSED PORTION
90Å
information.
Options
separately.
L
90Å
90
Finished End
A1250.
Description
This cover finishes the exposed end of a
panel. It has an enameled surface and a
cable management end cover.
Dimensions
Available in 32", 39", 47", 53", 62", 67",
heights.
Order the finished end to match the
height of the panel to which it is to be
attached.
The finished end adds 5/8" to a panel
run (this includes the top cap and the
base cover). See “Planning for
Dimensional Gain” in this section for
more information.
To support a squared-edge transaction
surface in addition to finishing the
exposed end of a panel, specify the
finished end with transaction surface
end support (T option). All other
applications require the H option.
This finished end cannot be used on the
cable management panel.
FINISHES EXPOSED
END OF PANEL
L
H OPTION
T OPTION
ATTACHES TO
TRANSACTION
SURFACE AND
PANEL
91
Finished End, Change of Height,
Panel/Panel
AO251.
Description
panel that joins panels of unequal
heights. The cover is 32" long but can be
field cut to the appropriate length.
Dimensions
Available in 5", 6", 7", 8", 9", 14", 15",
18", 20", 21", 23", and 28" heights—the
exposed differences in height when two
Series 2 panels of unequal height are
connected in a straight line.
Order the finished end to match the
difference in height between the two
panels.
A change-of-height draw rod must be
specified to match the height of the
lower panel.
FINISHES EXPOSED
PORTION OF
HANGER FRAME
NO DIMENSIONAL GAIN
FOR SPACE PLANNING
ORDER PANEL/PANEL
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
FINISHED END TO
MATCH DIFFERENCE
IN PANEL HEIGHTS
Since the finished end does not cover
the end of the lower panel, it does not
cause any dimensional gain for space
planning.
L
92
Finished End, Change of Height,
Panel/Connector
AO259.
Description
connector that joins panels or cabinets
of unequal heights. The cover is 46" long
but can be field cut to the appropriate
length.
Dimensions
Height is 46".
Width is 1 3/4".
Cut the finished end height to match the
difference in height between the panel
or cabinet and connector.
Since the finished end does not cover
the end of the lower panel, it does not
cause any dimensional gain for space
planning.
FINISHES EXPOSED END
OF CONNECTOR
WHEN PANELS OF
UNEQUAL HEIGHTS
ARE CONNECTED
FINISHED END
IS FIELD CUT
TO MATCH
DIFFERENCE
IN HEIGHT
NO DIMENSIONAL
GAIN FOR
SPACE PLANNING
Attachment hardware is included.
L
93
L
94
Walls Energy Distribution
Energy Distribution
POWER CAN BE
DISTRIBUTED
IN 3 DIRECTIONS
VERTICALLY TO WORK
SURFACE HEIGHT WITHIN
HORIZONTALLY IN
EITHER DIRECTION
WITHIN PANEL BASE
Today’s electronic office environments demand high-performance electrical
distribution solutions. The power system for Action Office Series 2 panels responds
easily to these needs. It is a four-circuit, eight-wire system that is extremely flexible—
flexible enough to be used with nearly any common wiring system found in office
buildings today, even those buildings without an eight-wire building configuration. It is
the eight-wire building wiring configuration, however, that allows the Series 2 power
system to deliver the optimum level of performance to each workstation.
L
95
System Overview
Action Office Series 2 panels offer these energy features:
• Eight-wire electrical distribution with up to four circuits, including one dedicated
circuit and multiple isolated ground circuits, in the base of the panel
• A vertical cable management panel that allows energy and voice/data cables to be
brought to work surface height and voice/data cables to other heights along the
panel frame, providing easy access to them at various heights within a workstation
• A cable distribution channel, with hinged side covers for quick access to wires and
cables at the panel base; the channel conceals cables and Local Area Network
(LAN) components
• An optional metal barrier to separate sensitive voice/data cables from electrical
wires
• An optional panel-top raceway for equal-height panels, to physically separate
cables and power between the panel top and the panel base
• The ability to provide power entry directly into the panel base from the floor or wall
or through ceiling entry poles
• The ability to convert nonpowered panels to powered panels in the field
• Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) listing, Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
certification, and conformance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and most
local codes
L
96
Basic Electrical Terms
A basic understanding of electrical terms is critical to the planning process. The
following terms are used throughout this planning information; for additional
information, consult the National Electrical Code (NEC).
Amperage—unit of electrical current flowing through a circuit.
Voltage—measurement of electrical pressure required to move electrical current
through a circuit. Most office equipment requires 120 volts; however, many large
pieces of equipment, e.g., copiers, require 220 volts.
Circuit—complete path or loop of electrical current that takes power from its source
to an electrical device or a piece of equipment, then returns what is left to its original
source. A simple circuit requires these three wires:
• Hot wire (delivers electrical current to the device)
• Neutral wire (returns electrical current to the power source)
• Ground wire (diverts short-circuit electricity to the earth)
Ground wire—wire that protects users from shock or electrocution by diverting shortcircuit electricity into the earth. For safety reasons, every circuit utilizes a ground wire
that must be in contact with all exposed-metal parts that could be energized.
Branch circuit—circuit that provides power from the fuse box or breaker to electrical
outlets.
Designated circuit—circuit that has been reserved for a particular usage, e.g.,
lighting; does not require special wiring.
Isolated ground circuit—circuit with an isolated ground wire that is totally separated
from the general or system ground.
Dedicated circuit—circuit that provides unshared power for computers or other
sensitive electronic equipment; requires separate hot, neutral, and ground wiring. (For
additional information, see “Key Regulations.”)
L
97
Circuit Capacity and Configurations
Typical Circuit Configurations
The following diagrams depict several
basic circuit configurations.
Basic Electrical Circuit
H – Hot wire
N – Neutral
G – Ground
Four-Wire, Two-Circuit System
This wiring configuration is commonly
used with single-phase power and is
usually found in homes and older
commercial buildings. The neutral wire is
shared between two hot wires.
H1
H2
N
G
–
–
–
–
H
N
G
BASIC
ELECTRICAL
CIRCUIT
Hot wire—for a circuit
Hot wire—for b circuit
Neutral (shared)
Ground (shared)
Five-Wire, Three-Circuit System
This configuration requires three-phase
power to energize all three circuits and
has become the standard electrical
delivery to most commercial buildings,
due to its efficiency over single-phase
power. In this configuration, the neutral
wire is shared among three hot wires.
The configuration offers three
designated circuits.
H1
H2
H3
N
G
–
–
–
–
–
Hot wire—for c circuit
Neutral (shared)
Ground (shared)
L
98
Six-Wire, Three-Circuit System with
Isolated Ground
In this three-circuit configuration, the
third circuit has an isolated (physically
separated) ground wire.
N
G2
G1
H3
H2
H1
–
–
–
–
–
–
Neutral (shared)
Ground (isolated)
Ground (shared)
Hot wire—for c circuit
Eight-Wire, Four-Circuit System with
Dedicated Circuit
In this Herman Miller four-circuit
electrical system, the fourth circuit has a
separate neutral and isolated ground
wire. This creates a dedicated circuit in
that each of the three wires (N2, G2,
and H4 ) is separate from any other
circuit.
N2
N1
G2
G1
H4
–
–
–
–
–
H3 –
H2 –
H1 –
ISOLATED
CIRCUIT
(GROUND)
Neutral (dedicated)
Neutral (shared)
Ground (isolated)
Ground (shared)
Hot wire (dedicated)—for
d circuit
Hot wire (general)—for c circuit
Hot wire (general)—for b circuit
Hot wire (general)—for a circuit
L
GENERAL-PURPOSE
CIRCUITS
N
G2
G1
H3
H2
H1
N2
N1
G2
G1
H4
H3
H2
H1
DEDICATED
CIRCUIT
DEDICATED CIRCUIT (4-CIRCUIT)
FOR ILLUSTRATION PURPOSES ONLY.
FOR ACTUAL WIRING PATTERN,
SEE WIRING DIAGRAMS.
99
Multiple Isolated Ground Circuit
Configurations
The following configurations allow users
to obtain maximum isolated ground
circuit capacity from this Herman Miller
four-circuit system.
Two Isolated Ground Circuits
N2 –
N1 –
G2 –
G1 –
H4 –
H3 –
H2 –
H1 –
Neutral (shared)
Neutral (shared)
Ground (isolated; shared with
CI ) and d circuit
Ground (shared)
Hot wire (computer)—for d
circuit
Hot wire (computer)—for c
circuit (using CI receptacle)
Hot wire (computer)—for b
circuit (using BI receptacle)
2 GENERAL-PURPOSE
CIRCUITS
N2
N1
G2
G1
H4
H3
H2
H1
Three Isolated Ground Circuits
ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUIT
(4-CIRCUIT WITH 2 ISOLATED
GROUND CIRCUITS)
N2 –
N1 –
G2 –
G1 –
H4 –
H3 –
H2 –
H1 –
Neutral (shared)
Neutral (shared)
Ground (isolated; shared with
BI, CI ) and d circuit
Ground (shared)
Hot wire (computer)—for d
circuit
Hot wire (computer)—for c
circuit (using CI receptacle)
Hot wire (computer)—for b
circuit (using BI receptacle)
2 ISOLATED
GROUND
CIRCUITS
1 GENERAL-PURPOSE
CIRCUIT
N2
N1
G2
G1
H4
H3
H2
H1
3 ISOLATED
GROUND
CIRCUITS
ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUIT
(4-CIRCUIT WITH 3 ISOLATED
GROUND CIRCUITS)
L
Before planning, it is important to understand the types of circuit configurations
commonly found in the office environment—as well as those configurations available
with this product line. The illustrations show the most common connections.
With this Herman Miller system, each of the four circuits is rated to distribute 20 amps
of current at 120 volts. However, due to code requirements, in most cases actual
amperage loads will be less. (See “Key Regulations.”)
Circuit capacity is also stated in terms of duplex receptacles, with a maximum of 13
receptacles allowed per circuit. For planning purposes, circuit capacity should be
based on actual amperage loads, not on the number of duplex receptacles.
CONNECTION TO A GROUNDED
RATING: 120/208V, 3-PH WYE, 60-HZ
THREE-PHASE SYSTEM
20-AMP MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT
L4
PINK
L3
BLUE
WHITE #2
GREEN/YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE #1
L2
RED
L1
BLACK
L1 N1 G1
L2 N1 G1
L3 N1 G1
L4 N2 G2
L2 N2 G2
L3 N2 G2
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
"a"
"b"
"c"
"d"
"b"
"c"
RECEPTACLE CONNECTIONS (LOAD)
CONNECTION TO A GROUNDED
RATING: 120/240V, 1-PH, 60-HZ
SINGLE-PHASE SYSTEM
L4
PINK
L3
BLUE
WHITE #2
GREEN/YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE #1
L2
RED
L1
BLACK
L1 N1 G1
L3 N1 G1
L2 N2 G2
L4 N2 G2
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
"a"
"c"
"b"
"d"
RECEPTACLE CONNECTIONS (LOAD)
NOTES:
1. N1 AND N2 ARE 10-GA. CONDUCTORS.
2. GREEN/YELLOW CONDUCTOR CAN BE USED AS AN ISOLATED GROUND.
L
CONNECTIONS TO MULTIPLE GROUNDED RATING: 120/208-V, 3-PH WYE, 60-HZ
THREE-PHASE POWER SOURCES
RECEPTACLE CONNECTIONS (LOADS)
"a"
"b"
"c"
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
L1 N1 G1
L2 N1 G1
L3 N1 G1
BLACK
SOURCE #1
WHITE #1
GREEN
RED
BLUE
PINK
SOURCE #2
WHITE #2
GREEN/YELLOW
L4 N2 G2
CIRCUIT
"d"
"a"
"b"
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
L1 N1 G1
L2 N1 G1
BLACK
SOURCE #1
WHITE #1
GREEN
RED
BLUE
SOURCE #2
WHITE #2
GREEN/YELLOW
PINK
L3 N2 G2
L4 N2 G2
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
"c"
"d"
"a"
CIRCUIT
L1 N1 G1
BLACK
SOURCE #1
WHITE #1
GREEN
SOURCE #2
RED
WHITE #2
GREEN/YELLOW
BLUE
PINK
L
L2 N2 G2
L3 N2 G2
L4 N2 G2
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
"b"
"c"
"d"
Key Regulations
The National Electrical Codes (NEC) and local codes affect electrical system
planning. A few of the most critical ones follow; however, this listing is by no means
exhaustive. All relevant codes (including local codes) should be reviewed thoroughly
before planning the installation, and all work should be completed by a qualified
contractor in accordance with those codes.
The building’s electrical capacity and wiring configuration (single-phase, three-phase,
or special branch circuits) should also be checked in order to ensure the most
effective application of this four-circuit, eight-wire electrical system.
“Derating” for Continuous Loading
For safety reasons, the NEC requires that a circuit be “derated” by 20 percent when
used under a continuous load. In other words, the 20-amp rating for this circuit makes
this, in effect, a 16-amp-rated circuit under continuous-load conditions.
Continuous load is defined as a load under which maximum current is expected to
continue for three hours or more. Lighting and personal computers are usually
considered continuous-load equipment. Typewriters, calculators, and other desktop
equipment may or may not be; check the requirements of the individual workstation
carefully before assigning an amp rating.
Maximum Number of Receptacles Allowed
According to the NEC, the maximum number of receptacles allowed per circuit is 13.
However, when the circuit is derated by 20 percent for continuous loading, the number
of receptacles per circuit is effectively reduced to 10. To ensure reserve capacity for
future needs, the number should be further reduced.
Receptacle Ratings
Receptacles are rated for a 15- or 20-amp load and can supply a maximum singledevice load of 12 or 16 amps. This four-circuit, eight-wire system is designed to supply
multiple receptacle loads per circuit as specified by the NEC.
Amperage Limitations on Single Devices
If any single device draws more than 80 percent of the available amperage of a circuit,
it must be the only device connected to that circuit. For example, if a copy machine
draws 16 amps, nothing else can be connected to the circuit.
Use of Dedicated Circuits
ANSI/BIFMA (American National Standards Institute/Business and Institutional
Furniture Manufacturers’ Association) guidelines define a dedicated circuit as one that
consists of three conductors (hot, neutral, and ground) between the circuit breaker
and the receptacle dedicated for use with that equipment. These conductors are not
shared with other circuits and must also be fed from a dedicated building circuit.
L
Voltage Limitations
This four-circuit, eight-wire system accommodates only 120-volt devices. This means
that, for instance, a large office copier requiring 220 volts will have to be connected to
an alternative electrical distribution system within the building.
Multiple Power Entries—WARNING
All power sources must be disconnected prior to servicing. No single circuit may be
powered by more than one source.
When more than one power entry is required to power a cluster of workstations,
harnesses from the first infeed must never be electrically connected to harnesses
from another infeed.
Use of Qualified Electrical Contractors
All electrical connections to the building power source must be made by a qualified
electrical contractor in accordance with all national and local codes.
Electrical System Incompatibility
The Series 2 energy system is not compatible with any other system, including the
Action Office Series 1 three-circuit electrical system, the Series 3 electrical system,
the Ethospace electrical system, or any similar energy products used on other
furniture lines. The energy system for Action Office Series 2 panels is compatible
mechanically and electrically with Action Office Series 1 panels and connectors that
have the optional four-circuit conversion base kits.
Forward and Side Reach for Receptacles
In addition to local and national electrical codes, the Federal Register; Volume 56, No.
144; Friday, July 26, 1991, outlines rules and regulations for wheelchair-bound
persons that apply to forward and side reach that can affect placement of receptacles.
If the clear floor space allows only forward approach to an object, the maximum high
forward reach allowed is 48". The minimum low forward reach is 15". If the high
forward reach is over an obstruction, like a work surface, the maximum high forward
reach is reduced to 44" over an obstruction of a maximum 25" wide.
If the clear floor space allows parallel approach to an object, the maximum high side
reach allowed is 54", and the low side reach is no less than 9" above the floor. If the
side reach is over an obstruction, again like a work surface, the maximum high side
reach is reduced to 46" over an obstruction of a maximum 34" high and 24" wide.
L
Planning Process Overview
Effective planning for this Herman Miller electrical distribution system requires four
basic steps. Following these steps in sequence will ensure that the system is
designed to accommodate both present and future power needs.
Step One—Electrical Needs. This step involves listing all office equipment required
in each workstation, along with appropriate amperages.
Step Two—Electrical Access. This step determines the type of circuits (designated,
dedicated, and general) and quantity of receptacles needed to power each
workstation and the total for all workstations. During this step, loads are balanced;
based on special equipment needs, certain circuits are designated or dedicated.
Step Three—Electrical Distribution. This step calculates the total number of circuits
required to meet each cluster’s electrical requirements.
Step Four—Electrical Supply. This step determines the number of power entries
required to supply power from the building’s electrical source to the workstation
cluster.
Each of these steps is discussed in detail in the information that follows.
Note: Individual Electrical Planning Worksheets are available in the Action Office®
Series 2 Panels Documentation Tools package (0.A7000-3).
Electrical Planning Worksheet
Guidelines
Typical Amperage Loads
• Plan circuits based on the actual amperage draw of
known equipment.
*CAD Station
*Calculator
*Coffee Pot
• Accommodate unplanned needs and future expansion by
being conservative in your initial circuit loading (12 to 16
amps per 20-amp circuit).
*Clock
*Radio
*Stereo
• Never exceed maximum capacities or local code
limitations.
*Tape Recorder
*Laser Printer
*Desktop Copier
.07
6.00 – 10.00
10.00 – 15.00
*Electric Eraser
*Fan
*Freestanding Copier (120 volt)
.25
1.10
15.00 – 20.00
• Know your local codes! They always take precedence.
• Be aware of the NEC requirement that limits circuit
capacity to 80 percent (16 amps) for circuits with continuous operating loads (more than three hours, e.g., lighting,
computers, etc.).
• Determine the equipment needs for a dedicated circuit
and plan circuit loading and power feeds accordingly.
• As far as possible, try to balance loads between circuits.
Plan a circuit load that is within 50 percent of the loads on
the other circuits. (Balance does not apply to the dedicated circuit.)
• Do not sacrifice designation for balance.
• Place receptacles for known equipment only, never exceeding maximums allowed per code (13 duplexes per
circuit, or per local code restrictions, whichever is smaller).
• If any single piece of equipment draws more than 80
percent of the available amperage of a receptacle, it must
be the only device connected to that receptacle. For
example, a copy machine draws 10 amps; therefore,
nothing else can be connected to the circuit the machine
is on.
• Always have your electrical layout plans reviewed by a
licensed electrician or electrical inspector to ensure that
they meet all code requirements.
10.00 – 20.00
.25
8.50 – 15.00
.03
.03
.33
*Pencil Sharpener
*Task Light (4')
*Adding Machine
1.00
.67
.35
*Letter Opener
*Dictaphone
*Telecopier
1.90
.25
.50
*Word Processor
*Postage Meter
*Tape Dispenser
1.50 – 3.00
2.80
1.80
*Personal Computer
*Desktop Printer
*CRT
3.50 – 8.00
1.50 – 5.00
1.00 – 3.00
*Space Heater
*Typewriter
*Microfiche Reader
12.50
1.50
.85
*Transcriber
*A.C. Adapter
*100-Watt Lamp
.15
.05
.80
*Some appliances, such as coffee pots, copiers, printers, and heaters,
consume most of the amperage available on a circuit. It is recommended
that these devices be connected directly to the building power supply,
leaving flexibility for other circuit planning.
Loading Capacities
Maximum Load Rating
Per Circuit
Priority Sequence for Electrical Layout
1. Allocate as needed or desired (e.g., designated).
2. Plan for future growth and additions.
Circuits
Amps
Receptacles
L planning information
L
Per Distribution
System
4
80
52
Future-Growth Consideration
Initial Planning
3. Consider and plan for large loads separately.
4. Balance loads across shared circuits.
1
20
13
Per Circuit
Circuits
Amps
Receptacles
1
12–16
8–10
Per Distribution
System
4
48–64
32–40
Action OfficeW Series 2 Panels Documentation Tools
Step One—Electrical Needs
The primary objective of this step is to determine the equipment and amperage
requirements of each individual workstation and, then, of the total cluster.
To arrive at this listing, use the “Electrical Planning Worksheet” from the Action Office
Series 2 Panels Documentation Tools package. (See the sample worksheet.) As an
aid in estimating the required amperage, the worksheet also includes a list of typical
office machines and their amperage draw. Exact information on equipment amperage
and voltage requirements can be found on the equipment itself (on the nameplate) or
on the equipment specifications sheets. This information overrules any of the general
guidelines on the chart.
Notice that when similar workstations (ones having the same electrical requirements)
are clustered, their amperage requirements can be grouped together to save time
(stations 5 – 8, for example).
ACCOUNTANT
#1
ACCOUNTANT
#2
VERTICAL CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANELS
PROJECT ROOM
#3
COPIER
FAX
ACCOUNTANT
#4
PRINTER
ANALYST
#5
ANALYST
#6
ANALYST
#7
ANALYST
#8
FILING
L
IS
T
N
N
ME Y
IP D B TIO
U
A
Q
E
T
E ST KS
LI OR
W
Work
Area
1
Equipment
Description
2
3
Amps
2.00
PC
4.00
FAN
1.1
CALCULATOR
.25
CLOCK
.03
3 TASK LIGHTS
2.00
4.00
PENCIL SHARPENER
1.00
CALCULATOR
.25
RADIO
.03
2 TASK LIGHTS
FAX MACHINE
CALCULATOR
Totals
4
c
d
CI
a
b
c
d
BI
CI
PE
TY
IS
TH USE
AT N
TH CA EM
RE NT ST
SU ME E SY
Amperage Use
KE QUIP IR
A
M E 8-W
General
OF E
Equipment
Description
b
c
TH Amps a
.50
6.00
BI
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
General
N
GE ATIO
A
R T
PE LE S
M
A NG
AL SI
T
TO R A
FO
1.35
Work
Area
Receptacles
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
d
BI
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
General
CI
a
b
c
d
BI
CI
.25
18.10
3 TASK LIGHTS
2.00
PC
4.00
ELECTRIC ERASER
b
7.28
DESKTOP COPIER 10.00
LASER PRINTER
a
7.38
PC
Totals
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
General
3 TASK LIGHTS
.65 AMPS
Totals
Receptacles
Amperage Use
Totals
.25
DICTAPHONE
.25
MICROFICHE READER
.85
Totals
7.35
Cluster Totals
NOTE: If amps are not listed, convert wattage to amperage using the formula
WATTS
—————— = AMPS
120Totals
(VOLTS)
H
R
IT
W NT THE
S E E
N
IO PM OG
AT QUI D T
T
KS E E
OR LAR OUP
W MI GR
SI RE
A
Totals
5-8 8 TASK LIGHTS
4 PCs
5.40
18.00
4 CALCULATORS
4 MICROFICHE READER
1.00
3.40
4 OTHER EQUIPMENT 3.00
Totals
Cluster Totals
E
TH
R
FO S
S ION
P
AM AT
L KST
A
T R
TO WO
8
30.80
70.91
L
WATTS
—————— = AMPS
120 (VOLTS)
Step Two—Electrical Access
Allocating Receptacles
The principal means of electrical access with this Herman Miller system is the
receptacle. Remembering that up to 20 amps or 13 receptacles are available per
circuit, use the right-hand portion of the “Electrical Planning Worksheet” to determine
the number of receptacles needed to power the equipment listed.
Remember to allow for continuous loads and future growth.
Receptacle Locations
When installed in a cutout at the base of a powered panel, a receptacle permits
access to power from that side of the panel. Except on the 12"- and 18"-wide panels
(which have no receptacle locations) and the 6"-wide cable management panel (which
offers two receptacles at work surface height), there are two duplex receptacle
locations on each side of every panel, regardless of the panel width. Those
receptacles are located 2 1/2" from the panel center.
All receptacles are rated at 15 or 20 amps. While most receptacles used with this
system are duplex, a surge suppression simplex receptacle is also available on
certain circuits.
Assessing the Building’s Circuit Capability
Before any circuit selection for an existing building is made, it is critical to know the
building’s circuit capability. If the building can handle only two or three circuits from
each power supply point, or if the building is not wired for extra neutral or isolated
ground wires, then circuit selection will be limited accordingly. If, however, it is early
enough in the planning process to have input concerning the building’s circuit
capacity, specifying a four-circuit, eight-wire system will allow the user to take fullest
advantage of the capabilities of this Herman Miller electrical system.
Remember, the d, BI, and CI receptacles access the second isolated ground and
second neutral and, as a result, will not work unless the building supply has those
same wires.
Determining the Need for Designated Circuits
To facilitate the maintenance of the electrical system and equipment, some planners
prefer to designate circuits for particular types of equipment. (Note how the copier in
Workstation #3 has been designated for the b circuit.) Circuit designation requires no
special wiring.
The “Electrical Planning Worksheet” provides a space for designating equipment on
the a, b, and c circuits.
L
Amperage Use
Work
Area
1
IS
NG TED “A”
I
HT NA UIT
LIG ESIG IRC
D C
2
TO
E,
AG
R
PE
M
A NT 3
S
IT PME D
TO UI TE ”
E EQ GNA “B
U
D IS SI UIT
TH DE IRC
IS C
TO
Equipment
Description
a
2.00 2.00
PC
4.00
FAN
1.1
CLOCK
b
c
PC
4.00
PENCIL SHARPENER
1.00
Totals
2 TASK LIGHTS
FAX MACHINE
1.38
4.00
2
2
1.00
Work
Area
.25
Equipment
Description
.03
1.28 4.00
Amps
a
2
1.35 1.35
2
.50
.50
10.00
1
6.00
6.00
.25
.25
2.00 2.00
PC
4.00
,
LE ULD CLE
B
I
O
SS SH TA
1
PO NT CEP
N E RE
Receptacles
1 Amperage Use HE PM
A
Ded./
W UI Ded./
E
General
General
Iso. Grd.
R Grd.
EQ AIso.
1 b
a
b
c
d
BI CI
c
dSH
BI
CI
E
2 1
AT
TS PAR
H
LIG SE LES ION
K
⁄«™
S IRE C AT
TA QU PTA LOC
RE CE TO
RE UE
1
D
2
1
2
2
4.00
ELECTRIC ERASER
.25
.25
DICTAPHONE
.25
.25
MICROFICHE READER
.85
.85
U
RC
CI
TS
UI LE)
D
O
C
N T
U
OU E CIR R
GR DU OF OAD
ED ED S -L
AT UIR IMIT OUS
L
Q
ISO E Y L NU
2 RE R CIT NTI
A APA CO
C 0%
(8
1
1
1.35 4.00
2
2
1
Cluster Totals
S
IT
1
Totals
7.35 2.00
1
⁄«™
1.35 10.00 6.75
3 TASK LIGHTS
Totals
BI
1
2
7.28 2.00
18.10
d
1
Totals
CALCULATOR
c
1
4.00
LASER PRINTER
b
.03
2.00 2.00
.03
a
.25
3 TASK LIGHTS
RADIO
General
CI
4.00
7.38 2.00
.25
BI
1.1
.25
CALCULATOR
d
ED
ID ED
V
O T
PR ICA
D
E
CI
AR DE ”
A “D
s
PC ITH UIT
W IRC
C
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
2
.03
Totals
Totals
4
General
Amps
3 TASK LIGHTS
.65 AMPS
CALCULATOR
Receptacles
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
WATTS
—————— = AMPS
120 (VOLTS)
Totals
5-8 8 TASK LIGHTS
4 PCs
5.40 5.40
8
18.00
4 CALCULATORS
10.00 8.00
1.00
1.00
3.40
3.40
3.00
4 MICROFICHE READER
Totals
Cluster Totals
30.80 5.40
2
2
2
16 5
2
4
4
7.40 10.00 8.00
8
70.91 12.75 10.00 18.16 22.00 8.00
16
L
2
8
1
WATTS
—————— = AMPS
120 (VOLTS)
Determining the Need for Dedicated Circuits
Certain electronic devices—usually computers—are sensitive to deviations in their
power supply. Such power problems can be caused by the operation of other
equipment on a circuit that “shares” neutral or ground wires with an electronic device.
These problems can be cleared up by providing a dedicated circuit for use by
sensitive equipment or providing isolated circuits that are shared only by other similar
equipment.
To provide a dedicated circuit to a workstation—for example, to utilize the d circuit—
both the systems furniture and the building itself must be wired for a dedicated circuit.
An uninterruptible power system (UPS) is a system that provides an alternate power
supply should the regular power supply be interrupted or disconnected. If the building
has such a system, its power should be brought to the workstation through the
dedicated circuit. In fact, the dedicated circuit is most fully utilized—and offers the
most protection—when it is hooked up to the UPS source.
This Herman Miller electrical system is designed to accommodate both dedicated and
non-dedicated circuits. The “Electrical Planning Worksheet” provides a space for
indicating whether equipment requires a dedicated circuit, isolated ground circuits, or
general circuits. (See the columns under “Receptacles” on the sample worksheet.)
Determining the Need for Isolated Ground Circuits
An isolated ground runs from the receptacle back to the building electrical service
entry. Because it does not come into contact with any other ground structure that
could pick up additional radiated noise, it is a cleaner ground to use with sensitive
computer or electronic equipment that needs a more stable, noise-free ground
situation. This Herman Miller electrical system is designed to provide up to three
isolated ground circuits by using the d circuit and by making either the b or c circuits,
or both, isolated ground circuits. The choice depends on the balance in the office
environment between general office equipment and lighting and other more highly
sophisticated electronic equipment. In a highly computerized office environment, for
example, three isolated ground circuits may be required so that users can take
advantage of the maximum isolated ground capacity from the four-circuit system.
Balancing the Load
Once the total amperage requirements have been calculated and assigned to
dedicated and general circuits, the next step is to balance the load among the
available circuits. (When the line currents are unbalanced, the imbalance is returned
through the neutral line.) Proper circuit balancing can minimize the number of power
entries and allow greater flexibility for future growth.
A good rule for balance is to allocate loads so that the loading of one circuit is within
50 percent of the load on each of the other circuits. Remember, the dedicated circuit
is not affected, since it does not share any wires with the general circuits.
Allocation Priority Sequence
1. Allocate as needed or desired (e.g., designate).
2. Plan for future growth and equipment additions.
3. Plan for single large loads independently.
4. Balance loads across shared circuits to minimize power entry points within the
building.
L
Marking Receptacles on the Floor Plan
Once the electrical load and receptacles have been allocated, the floor plan should be
labeled with baseline receptacle locations and circuit identification. Special notation
should be made of any additional receptacles at other-than-baseline locations as well.
(These should be marked on the floor plan while planning the electrical distribution.)
A
ACCOUNTANT
#1
C
A
D
D
A
A
C
C
A
C
A
A
D
PROJECT ROOM
#3
D
B
C
A
C
ACCOUNTANT
#4
ANALYST
#6
D
C
C
A
A D
B1 A C
ANALYST
#8
ANALYST
#7
A C
C
C
A
ANALYST
#5
A C
ACCOUNTANT
#2
C
C
Legend:
A = Duplex Receptacle
(with circuit identification)
A
B1 A C
D = Duplex Receptacle
at different height
FILING
L
Step Three—Electrical Distribution
Electrical power is transmitted from the building’s point of supply through the furniture
system via the electrical components: the electrical harness in a powered panel or the
pass-through power jumper.
Determining the Number of Circuits Needed
After listing all equipment and appropriate amperages, calculate the total number of
amps required for each workstation cluster. To determine the number of circuits
required, simply use the formula that follows. It is based on the maximum 20-amp
rating for each circuit, but allows for future growth. To provide room for future electrical
equipment, it is wise to plan initial circuit loads conservatively—well below the rated
capacity. The example shown uses a 12-amp capacity per circuit, which was
determined by derating the circuit to 16 amps (20 percent derating for continuous-load
requirement) and then allowing four amps for future growth.
TOTAL AMPS = Number of circuits needed (to allow for growth)
12
Always remember to consider any codes that require derating of circuit capacities.
(See “Key Regulations.”)
On the sample “Electrical Planning Worksheet” shown, the total amperage required to
power the cluster is 40.91 amps for general use and 30 amps for dedicated use.
Using the above formula, the number of circuits required is as follows:
40.91
12
=
30
12
=
4 general circuits*
5 general circuits* and
3 isolated ground circuits
3 isolated ground circuits
*Due to the cluster layout and the desktop copier, which has been designated to its
own circuit (see Workstation #3 on “Electrical Planning Worksheet”), the number of
general circuits used will be increased to five.
Receptacles
Amperage Use
Work
Area
1
IS
G D ”
IN TE “A
HT GNA UIT
G
LI ESI IRC
D C
2
TO
Equipment
Description
,
4.00
FAN
1.1
CLOCK
c
PENCIL SHARPENER
1.00
c
d
1
1
1.38
4.00
2
2
Work
Area
7.28 2.00
.25
1
Equipment
Description
.03
1
,
LE LD LE
IB OU C
SS SH TA
PO NT CEP
N E RE
Receptacles
1 Amperage Use HE PM
A
Ded./
W UI Ded./
General
General
Iso. Grd.
REGrd.
EQ AIso.
1 b
a
b
c
d
BI CI
c
dSH
BI
CI
2
1.28 4.00
Amps
a
2
1.35 1.35
2
1
2
.50
.50
⁄«™
10.00
1
6.00
6.00
.25
.25
1
Totals
CALCULATOR
18.10
⁄«™
1.35 10.00 6.75
3 TASK LIGHTS
2.00 2.00
PC
4.00
2
1
.25
.25
DICTAPHONE
.25
.25
.85
7.35 2.00
2
TS
UI
RC
S
CI
IT )
D
O
CU ULE
N T
OU UE CIR D R
R
G D OF OA
D D
L
TE RE ITS SLA QUI IM OU
ISO RE TY L INU
2 RE CI NT
A APA CO
C 0%
(8
1
1
Totals
Totals
TE
S RA
HT PA
LIG SE LES ION
E
K
S IR C AT
TA QU PTA LOC
RE CE TO
RE UE
D
2
4.00
ELECTRIC ERASER
MICROFICHE READER
BI
1
1.00
.25
LASER PRINTER
b
4.00
.03
FAX MACHINE
a
.03
7.38 2.00
4.00
2 TASK LIGHTS
CI
.25
PC
Totals
BI
1.1
.25
2.00 2.00
RADIO
d
2
.03
Totals
Totals
4
b
ED
ID D
OV TE
PR ICA
E D
CI
AR DE ”
A “D
s
PC ITH UIT
W IRC
C
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
General
4.00
3 TASK LIGHTS
A
ER
P
AM NT 3
S
IT PME D
O
I
T U TE ”
E EQ NA “B
DU IS SIG UIT
H
T DE IRC
IS C
TO
a
2.00 2.00
PC
CALCULATOR
GE
Amps
3 TASK LIGHTS
.65 AMPS
CALCULATOR
Ded./
Iso. Grd.
General
.85
1
1.35 4.00
2
2
1
Cluster Totals
WATTS
—————— = AMPS
120 (VOLTS)
Totals
5-8 8 TASK LIGHTS
4 PCs
5.40 5.40
8
18.00
4 CALCULATORS
10.00 8.00
1.00
1.00
3.40
3.40
3.00
4 MICROFICHE READER
Totals
Cluster Totals
30.80 5.40
2
2
2
2
16 5
2
4
4
7.40 10.00 8.00
8
70.91 12.75 10.00 18.16 22.00 8.00
16
L
40.91 AMPS FOR
GENERAL USE
WATTS
—————— = AMPS
120 (VOLTS)
8
1
30 AMPS FOR
DEDICATED USE
Identifying Powered Panels on the Floor Plan
It is important to identify panels as “powered” on the floor plan. These panels will
deliver the electrical circuits from the building’s supply point to the receptacle
locations. It is also at this point that cable management panels can be identified on
the floor plan—at any location where energy distribution or access is desired above
the baseline.
Panels are identified in one of three ways:
1. Powered—electrical distribution with receptacle access
2. Pass-through—electrical distribution with no receptacle access
3. Nonpowered—no electrical distribution
A
BUILDING
SUPPLY POINT
ACCOUNTANT
#1
C
D
D
A
A
C
A
A
D
PROJECT ROOM
#3
D
B
C
A
C
C
ACCOUNTANT
#4
C
A
ANALYST
#5
A C
ACCOUNTANT
#2
C
C
A
BUILDING
SUPPLY POINT
A
ANALYST
#6
D
C
C
A
A NONPOWERED PANEL IS
APPLIED HERE TO SEPARATE
POWERED PANELS WHICH
ARE ELECTRICALLY FED
FROM DIFFERENT BUILDING
SUPPLY POINTS
B1 A C
Legend:
ANALYST
#8
ANALYST
#7
A C
A D
C
C
A = Duplex Receptacle
D = Duplex Receptacle
A
B1 A C
at different height
= Power Entry
= Powered Panel
FILING
= Pass-Through Harness
= Nonpowered Panel
L
Step Four—Electrical Supply
Power is connected from the building electrical supply points to Action Office Series 2
panels by means of power entry products. These are available in two types: base feed
(either direct connect or through a junction box) and ceiling feed. The product chosen
depends on the site of interface between the building and the Action Office system.
Planning for a Second Infeed
After determining the number of circuits needed, it may be necessary to plan for
additional circuits. In many cases, only one power entry point is required, due to the
small number of workstations in an isolated cluster. However, in the floor plan
example, the number of circuits required is eight. Assuming that the building is able to
deliver up to four circuits at each electrical supply point, two separate power entries
are required to power the cluster. A nonpowered panel can be used to separate two
different infeeds to create a power break.
NONPOWERED PANEL PROVIDES
BREAK BETWEEN 2 SEPARATE
BUILDING POWER ENTRIES
POWER FROM
FLOOR TO
PANEL BASE
FIRST
POWER ENTRY
(4 CIRCUITS)
L
POWER FROM
BUILDING WALL
TO PANEL BASE
POWER FROM
FIRST POWER
ENTRY STOPS HERE
SECOND POWER ENTRY
(4 ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS)
POWER FROM SECOND
POWER ENTRY STOPS HERE
Usually, the most efficient way to access power is to run electricity through central
spines and pull power into workstations or branches of workstations where needed.
The advantage in the use of spines is the ability to run power from both sides of the
spine if needed. (Not only is this usually most cost-effective, it can offer an additional
advantage when planning for data and telecommunications cabling, which often
shares the raceway with the electrical system. Because a spine often represents the
shortest distance from entry point to workstation, it can be an important factor for
certain types of cabling whose quality of transmission tends to deteriorate over long
distances.)
Power Entry Points on the Floor Plan
The locations and types of power entry points to supply the cluster of workstations
must be identified on the floor plan. If a second infeed is required to power the
remaining workstations, it is important to remember that harnesses powered by the
first infeed must never be electrically connected to harnesses from the second infeed.
If such harnesses are electrically connected, there is a risk of fire or electrical shock.
(See “Key Regulations” earlier.)
L
Summary of Electrical Supply
These two drawings illustrate the transfer of power from the building to the Series 2 panels
with either one infeed or two. Note how, in the second drawing, a nonpowered panel is
used to assure that the two infeeds are never electrically connected to one another.
Warning: All power sources must be disconnected prior to servicing. No single circuit
may be powered by more than one source.
When more than one power entry is required to power a cluster of workstations,
harnesses from the first infeed must never be electrically connected to harnesses
from another infeed.
6"-WIDE CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL
SINGLE
POWER
ENTRY
(4 CIRCUITS)
…OR AT WORK
POWER HARNESS USED SURFACE HEIGHT
TO SUPPLY POWER TO
CLUSTER AT BASELINE…
6"-WIDE CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL
USED TO DELIVER POWER
TO WORK SURFACE HEIGHT
NONPOWERED PANEL PROVIDES
BREAK BETWEEN 2 SEPARATE
BUILDING POWER ENTRIES
POWER FROM
FLOOR TO
PANEL BASE
FIRST
POWER ENTRY
(4 CIRCUITS)
POWER HARNESSES USED TO
SUPPLY POWER TO CLUSTER
(FROM FIRST POWER ENTRY)
POWER FROM
BUILDING WALL
TO PANEL BASE
PASS-THROUGH
POWER JUMPER
POWER FROM
FIRST POWER
ENTRY STOPS HERE
SECOND POWER ENTRY
(4 ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS)
POWER HARNESSES USED TO
SUPPLY POWER TO CLUSTER
(FROM SECOND POWER ENTRY)
POWER FROM SECOND
POWER ENTRY STOPS HERE
L
Electrical Planning Checklist
Keep these key points in mind when planning for a facility’s electrical needs with this
Herman Miller power system.
• Plan circuits based on the actual amperage draw, not on the maximum number of
receptacles allowed.
• Accommodate future needs by being conservative in the initial circuit loading (10 to
12 amps per circuit on a 20-amp breaker, or fewer on a 15-amp breaker).
• Never exceed the maximum circuit capacities or local code limitations.
• Know your local codes! They always take precedence.
• Observe continuous-loading limitations (80 percent circuit capacity for devices with
three-hour-plus continuous operation).
• Determine dedicated, isolated ground, and general circuit needs; plan accordingly
for loads and infeeds.
• Try to balance loads between circuits.
• Never exceed the maximum number of receptacles allowed (13 duplexes per circuit,
or per appropriate local code restrictions—whichever is the lower number).
• If a single piece of equipment draws more than 80 percent of the available
amperage, make sure it is the only device connected to that circuit.
• When using a cable management panel, make sure hanging components, like
shelves and work tools, do not cover receptacles located above the work surface
height; also be sure that individual adjustments to the work surface height—
especially with the height-adjustable work surface—do not interfere with access to
those receptacles.
• Always have electrical layout plans and installations reviewed by a licensed
electrician or electrical inspector to ensure that they meet all code requirements.
• Never electrically connect harnesses from one infeed to harnesses from another
infeed.
L
Electrical Products
Planning Step
Product
1. Electrical
Needs
2. Electrical
Access
3. Electrical
Distribution
4. Electrical
Supply
L
Comments
Use “Electrical Planning Worksheet”; use typical amperage guidelines
only when exact requirements for specific equipment are unavailable.
Receptacles
For four-circuit, eight-wire system; designed to access circuit a, b, c, or d ;
15 or 20 amps; also options for isolated ground and isolated ground with
surge suppression. Be certain which circuits will be live (hooked up to the
building) before receptacles are specified.
Electrical Distributor,
Multi-Outlet and 3-Outlet;
Power Center; and
Outlet Strip
Electrical distributor, provides 3 or 6 additional 3-prong standard 15-amp
receptacles at work surface height; uses one baseline receptacle; power
center, alternative to electrical distributor when communication ports also
required; provides up to 4 duplex receptacles and 6 communication ports.
Powered Panels
One-piece harness; shipped installed at panel base; distributes power
horizontally along panel base; no other electrical components required for
any type of connection.
Cable Management Panel
Frame (with Panel Faces)
Provides vertical chase to bring power vertically from the baseline to work
surface height; vertical septum provides separation for power and
communication cables; provides 2 duplex receptacle locations above the
work surface (1 on the 39"-high panel) on each side; also provides 3
communication port locations on each side.
Base Power Adapter
Field retrofitted to nonpowered panels to convert panels to powered ones;
specified with or without side covers. (Specify without side covers only if
nonpowered panels have side covers with receptacle fillers on each side.)
Panel Pass-Through
Power Jumper
Extends power from baseline of powered panel through nonpowered
panels to adjacent powered panel.
Power Jumper
Connects power from baseline to work surface height within cable
management panel frame; plugs into receptacle outlet on right of power
harness.
Harness End Cap
Covers unused end port or side port of electrical harness.
Cable Management Troughs
(AO381. and AO382.)
Suspend from panel or work surface to hold multiple-outlet electrical
distributor, power center, and outlet strip.
Cable Management Trough
(AO383.)
Chase, attached with adhesive backing horizontally or vertically to panel
or wall, to manage and conceal several electrical wires.
Cable/Energy Barrier
Provides barrier to separate data cables and electrical wires within panel
or connector.
Base Power Entry,
Direct Connect
For floor, column, or wall building supply; connects to powered panel at
receptacle location; distributes up to 4 20-amp circuits.
Base Power Entry,
Junction Box
For floor, column, or wall building supply; specified with nonpowered
panels; no receptacle access; used where local codes require a hardwired solution; distributes up to 4 20-amp circuits.
Ceiling Power Entry,
4 Circuit (including TopMounted and Cable
Management Panel)
For ceiling building supply; attaches to panel end, spacer, or corner
connector; distributes up to 4 20-amp circuits; rigid conduit provides metal
separation between electrical wiring and communications cabling; topmounted power entry connects electrical supply to top-mounted voice/data
cable channel or powered panel; cable management panel power entry
connects electrical supply to base of powered panel.
Distribution of Energy
Once electrical needs have been determined, energy must be brought from the
building into this furniture system for distribution through either the baseline or the
cable management panel. At certain locations, electrical access points can be
established with products that distribute energy horizontally and vertically through the
system.
Power Entry
Power entries distribute electrical power from the building to the panel system. These
are available in two types—a base feed (either directly or through a junction box) or a
ceiling feed. The type of entry chosen depends on the site of interface between the
building (floor, perimeter wall or column, or ceiling) and the Herman Miller systems
products.
Power Entry Products
Entry Point
Types of Connection
Floor
• Direct Connect
• Junction Box (hard-wired)
Perimeter (wall or column)
• Direct Connect
• Junction Box (hard-wired)
Ceiling
• Ceiling Power Entry
• Cable Management Panel
Ceiling Power Entry
• Top-Mounted Ceiling Power Entry
Caution: All electrical connections to the building power source must be made by a
qualified electrician in accordance with all national and local codes.
L
Base Power Entry, Direct Connect,
4 Circuit
A1322.
Description
This power entry connects a building’s
electrical supply from a wall, floor, or
column to the base of a powered fourcircuit Action Office Series 2 panel or a
Series 1 nonpowered panel retrofitted
for four-circuit power. It plugs directly
into a receptacle location on the panel’s
baseline electrical harness to distribute
up to four 20-amp circuits. The power
entry is manufactured in a right-hand
direction but can be field converted to a
left-hand direction. The cable is available
in four lengths and can be field cut to the
appropriate length. The power entry is
UL listed and CSA certified.
Dimensions
Available in 6', 12', 18', and 24' lengths.
This power entry is used where local
codes require a hard-wired power entry.
POWER FROM FLOOR TO
PANEL BASE
The power entry length should closely
match the distance between the
building’s electrical supply and the
receptacle location on the panel. The 12'
to 24' lengths are recommended for
downstream, multiple power supply from
a single building entry point. (Special
ground-contact terminals inside the
liquid-tight conduit maintain the integrity
of the ground function for these
extended lengths.)
When a direct-connect power entry is
used, receptacles can still be mounted
in all other receptacle locations on the
panel, including the one opposite the
base power entry.
POWER FROM BUILDING
WALL TO PANEL BASE
3 RECEPTACLE
LOCATIONS AVAILABLE
RECEPTACLE
LOCATIONS
ON THIS SIDE
ONLY
LIQUID-TIGHT
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
Energy can be distributed in either
direction by setting the direction of the
connection during installation or
reconfiguration.
This power entry must be wired by a
licensed electrician.
CONNECTION
DISTRIBUTION
HARNESS
L
90Å CONDUIT CONNECTOR
(PROTRUDES WIDTH OF CONDUIT)
Limitations
Base power entry cannot be used on a
12"- or 18"-wide panel, since it has no
receptacle locations in its base, nor on a
6"-wide cable management panel.
L
Base Power Entry, Junction Box,
4 Circuit
A1323.
Description
This power entry connects a building’s
electrical supply from a wall, floor, or
column to the base of a nonpowered
Action Office Series 2 panel or a Series
1 nonpowered panel retrofitted for fourcircuit power; it distributes up to four 20amp circuits. It includes a junction box,
an electrical harness, and an expanded
side cover. The power entry also
includes 6' of wire that can be field cut to
the appropriate length for connection to
the building’s power. It does not provide
receptacle access. The power entry is
UL listed and CSA certified.
24"- to 36"-wide power entries have a
40-cubic-inch capacity and distribute
power in one direction; 42"- to 60"-wide
power entries have a 60-cubic-inch
capacity and distribute power in both
directions.
JUNCTION BOX
DISTRIBUTION
ASSEMBLY
Dimensions
Available in widths to match standard
24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and 60" panel
sizes.
FOR USE WITH 24"AND 36"-WIDE PANELS
This power entry is used where local
codes require a hard-wired power entry.
The power entry width must match the
width of the panel on which it will be
used.
Power can be distributed only in the
direction opposite the junction box in
24"- and 36"-wide panels. Since the hole
in the side cover is off center, the cover
determines the direction of power
distribution and must be located on the
correct side of the panel. Power in 42",
48", 54", and 60" panels can be
distributed in both directions.
L
JUNCTION BOX
DISTRIBUTION
ASSEMBLY
FOR USE WITH
42"-, 48"-, 54"-,
AND 60"-WIDE PANELS
Exterior wires that connect the junction
box to the building’s electrical supply
must be covered with conduit. A licensed
electrician must supply and wire the
conduit and the conduit connector. When
local electrical codes require wiring
connections inside the junction box, a
licensed electrician must also wire the
connection to the electrical harnesses.
Limitations
A junction box power entry cannot be
used on a 12"- or 18"-wide panel, nor on
a 6"-wide cable management panel.
NONPOWERED PANEL
(WITH POWER ENTRY INSTALLED)
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
(TO BE FIELD WIRED)
The power entry must be field installed.
L
Ceiling Power Entry, 4 Circuit
A1331.
Description
This power entry connects a ceiling’s
electrical supply to the base of a
powered four-circuit Action Office
Series 2 panel or retrofitted Series 1
panel at the end of a panel run or at a
three- or four-way 90° connector. It
distributes up to four 20-amp circuits
and holds up to 110 Category 5 cables.
The power entry has a 10 1/2' pole,
which can be field cut to the appropriate
length; ceiling and base trim; a rigid
conduit and conduit connector; and a
factory-installed electrical harness. The
rigid conduit encloses electrical wires
and provides metal separation for voice/
data cables. The power entry is UL listed
and CSA certified.
CONNECT TO BUILDING
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
CEILING
CEILING
BEZEL
Dimensions
Available to fit 47", 53", 62", 67", and 85"
panel heights.
Exterior width of ceiling bezel is 7"
(nominal); depth is 6" (nominal). Exterior
width of power entry is 3 7/8"; depth is
3 1/8".
POWERED
PANEL
CEILING
ENTRY
EXTRUSION
Interior cavity depth of both ceiling bezel
and power entry is 2 3/4"; width is 1 1/2"
with power and 3 1/2" without power.
The ceiling power entry, when attached
to a three-way or four-way 90°
connector, can be used on any side of
the connector not already attached to a
panel; the product does not prevent the
future connection of a panel in that
same position on the connector.
POWER POLE
HANGER CLIP
CEILING POWER ENTRY CAN
BE LOCATED ON ANY ATTACHING
CONNECTOR SIDE NOT ALREADY
CONNECTED TO PANEL
The ceiling power entry is available in
powered and nonpowered versions. The
nonpowered version is used for voice/
data cable entry only. The capacity of the
power entry is 120 4-pair UTP Category
5 cables (without power) or 90 4-pair
UTP Category 5 cables (with power).
The ceiling power entry can connect to a
nonpowered panel if used only for voice/
data cable entry.
L
4-WAY 90Å
CONNECTOR
Because the internal capacity of the
nonpowered version of the power entry
is greater than that of the panel baseline
raceway, when the cables reach the
panel base, they may need to be divided
and routed in different directions.
POWERED:
ELECTRICAL WIRING
ENCLOSED IN ⁄«™"
TRADE-SIZE ELECTRICAL
METALLIC TUBING
A 10 1/2' length of 1/2" trade-size
electrical metallic tubing (knocked down)
encloses the wiring up to the ceiling
junction box.
The internal electrical harness must be
installed in conduit as required by
national codes.
The power entry must be properly wired
by a licensed electrician, according to
national and local code specification,
with conduit in the ceiling terminating in
a junction box.
Limitations
This power entry cannot be used with
32" and 39" panel heights.
This product cannot be used to provide
access to the energy system or to the
voice/data cabling.
NONPOWERED:
VOICE/DATA
CABLE ENTRY ONLY
CEILING
BEZEL
VOICE/DATA
CABLE ENTRY
(SEPARATED FROM
ELECTRICAL WIRING
BY CONDUIT
ENCLOSING WIRING)
INTERIOR CAVITY
APPROXIMATELY
2 ‹«¢" x 1 ⁄/™"
INTERIOR CAVITY
APPROXIMATELY
2 ‹«¢" x 3 ⁄/™"
CONNECTION TO
DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY
CAPACITY—
WITHOUT POWER: 120 4-PAIR UTP CATEGORY 5 CABLES
WITH POWER: 90 4-PAIR UTP CATEGORY 5 CABLES
L
Ceiling Power Entry, 4 Circuit, Top
Mounted
NP239.
Description
This power entry connects a ceiling’s
electrical supply to a top-mounted voice/
data cable channel or Action Office
Series 2 panel base or a Series 1 panel
base with the four-circuit retrofit kit. It
distributes up to four 20-amp circuits.
The power entry has a 10 1/2' pole,
which can be field cut to the appropriate
length; ceiling and end cap trim; a rigid
conduit and conduit connector; and a
rigid conduit encloses electrical wires
and provides metal separation for voice/
data cables. The power entry is UL listed
and CSA certified. Shipped knocked
down.
CONNECT TO BUILDING
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
ALLOWS VOICE/DATA
CABLES TO BE
DISTRIBUTED
HORIZONTALLY WITHIN
OPTIONAL VOICE/DATA
CABLE CHANNEL
CEILING
POWERED
PANEL OR
NONPOWERED
PANEL
The power entry without power holds up
to 120 4-pair Category 5 cables; the
power entry with power holds up to 90 4pair Category 5 cables.
POWERED
PANEL OR
NONPOWERED
PANEL
Dimensions
Available to fit 47", 53", 62", 67", and 85"
panel heights.
Exterior width is 7" (nominal); depth is
5 1/4" (nominal). Interior cavity width is
2 3/4"; depth is 1 1/2" with power and
3 1/2" without power.
This ceiling power entry has an opening
at the same height as the adjacent
panel height that allows the voice/data
cables to be distributed horizontally
within the optional voice/data cable
channel along the top of the panel.
The ceiling power entry can be used at
the end of a panel run or attached to a
connector within a panel run. When
attached to a three-way or four-way 90°
connector, this ceiling power entry can
be used on any side of the connector
not already attached to a panel; the
product does not prevent the future
connection of a panel in that same
position on the connector.
L
POWER POLE
HANGER CLIP
CEILING POWER ENTRY CAN
BE LOCATED ON ANY ATTACHING
CONNECTOR SIDE NOT ALREADY
CONNECTED TO PANEL
4-WAY 90Å
CONNECTOR
The ceiling power entry is available in
powered and nonpowered versions. The
nonpowered version is used for voice/
data cable entry only. The capacity of the
power entry is 120 4-pair UTP Category
5 cables (without power) or 90 4-pair
UTP Category 5 cables (with power).
The ceiling power entry can connect to a
nonpowered panel if used only for voice/
data cable entry.
Because the internal capacity of the
nonpowered version of the power entry
is greater than that of the panel baseline
raceway, when the cables reach the
panel base, they may need to be divided
and routed in different directions.
A 10 1/2' length of 1/2" trade-size
electrical metallic tubing (knocked down)
encloses the wiring up to the ceiling
junction box.
POWERED:
ELECTRICAL WIRING
ENCLOSED IN ⁄«™"
TRADE-SIZE ELECTRICAL
METALLIC TUBING
VOICE/DATA
CABLE ENTRY
(SEPARATED FROM
ELECTRICAL WIRING
BY CONDUIT
ENCLOSING WIRING)
Limitations
This power entry cannot be used with
32" and 39" panel heights.
CEILING
BEZEL
OPENINGS OPPOSITE
PANEL TOP TO
DISTRIBUTE VOICE/
DATA CABLES
WITHIN VOICE/DATA
CABLE CHANNEL
INTERIOR CAVITY
APPROXIMATELY
2 ‹«¢" x 1 ⁄/™"
The internal electrical harness must be
installed in conduit as required by
national codes.
The power entry must be properly wired
by a licensed electrician, according to
national and local code specification,
with conduit in the ceiling terminating in
a junction box.
NONPOWERED:
VOICE/DATA
TELECOMMUNICATION
CABLE ENTRY ONLY
CONNECTION TO
INTERIOR CAVITY
APPROXIMATELY
2 ‹«¢" x 3 ⁄/™"
CAPACITY—
WITHOUT POWER: 120 4-PAIR UTP CATEGORY 5 CABLES
WITH POWER: 90 4-PAIR UTP CATEGORY 5 CABLES
access to the energy system or to the
voice/data cabling.
L
Ceiling Power Entry, Cable
Management Panel
A1332.
Description
This 6"-wide power entry connects a
ceiling’s electrical supply to the base of
a powered panel and distributes up to
four 20-amp circuits. It has a structural
frame that holds a cable management
panel face on each side; an extender,
which can be cut to the appropriate
length; ceiling and base trim; rigid
conduit; connecting hardware; and a
conduit encloses electrical wires and
provides metal separation for voice/data
cables. The maximum height of the
power entry is 10'-6". Power cannot be
accessed through the frame. The power
entry is UL listed and CSA certified.
Dimensions
Available in 39", 47", 53", 62", 67", and
85" heights (excluding extender).
Width is 6".
CONNECTS CEILING POWER SUPPLY
TO PANEL BASE
EXTENDER REACHES MAXIMUM 10'-6" CEILING
(CUT ON SITE FOR LOWER CEILING)
Interior cavity width is approximately
5 3/8"; depth is 1 5/8".
The ceiling power entry can be located
anywhere in a panel run except at the
end, because it cannot accept a finished
end or a change-of-height finished end.
The ceiling power entry is also available
without the electrical assembly for entry
of voice/data cables only. When used for
only voice/data cables, it can attach at
the base to a nonpowered panel.
INTERIOR CAVITY
APPROXIMATELY
5 ‹«•" x 1 fi«•"
FOR DISTRIBUTION
OF POWER ONLY—
NO ACCESS POINTS;
ACCESS LOCATIONS
FOR VOICE/DATA
CABLES—FIELD CUT
L
ORDER IN
HEIGHT
TO MATCH
ADJACENT
PANELS
HOLDS CABLE
MANAGEMENT
PANEL FACES
ON BOTH SIDES
(ORDERED
SEPARATELY—
FOR BOTTOM
PORTION ONLY)
Order this ceiling power entry to match
the height of the adjacent panels; it
comes with the appropriate-length
extender to reach a 10'-6" ceiling. (For
lower ceilings, the extender can be cut
to size on site.) Because this ceiling
power entry serves as a power
distribution component only, there is no
electrical access, so the nonpowered
cable management panel face should be
specified, separately. If access is desired
to the voice/data cables, ports can be
custom cut in the panel face on site.
The cable capacity for the nonpowered
version is 48 4-pair UTP Category 5
cables; the capacity for the powered
version is 36 4-pair UTP Category 5
cables. The power entry can be
uncovered for easy installation of cables.
DISTRIBUTES UP TO 4 20-AMP CIRCUITS
(POWERED VERSION ONLY) AND
VOICE/DATA CABLES
To connect the power entry to a panel,
order a draw rod separately. To connect
the power entry to a connector, no
additional parts are needed. (The
connector includes the attachment
hardware.)
The ceiling power entry must be wired
by a licensed electrician, and the ceiling
junction box must be supplied by a
licensed electrician.
Options
To connect the cable management panel
ceiling power entry to an adjacent panel,
order the Draw Rod (AO214.)
separately.
Order the Cable Management Panel
Face, Side 1 (A1181.), and the Cable
Management Panel Face, Side 2
(A1182.), separately, to enclose the 6"wide panel frame.
Limitations
access to the energy system; access to
voice/data cabling must be field cut.
L
Baseline Distribution
The baseline is the primary location for carrying power horizontally from the point of
power entry to places throughout the facility where electricity is needed. The
distribution can be from one or more building access points.
Baseline power can be distributed in three directions: left and right (through the
baseline) and vertically (through the cable management panel).
All baseline energy distribution is concealed behind the hinged cover assembly.
Receptacles can be installed for access to power from either side of the panel.
PASS-THROUGH
CAPABILITY ONLY—
NO ACCESS
ACCESS TO POWER
AT BASELINE
HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION
IN BOTH DIRECTIONS
THROUGH PANEL BASE
L
NOTE: SAME CAPABILITIES
ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF PANEL
Base Power Adapter, 4 Circuit
A1354. Side Covers
A1355. No Side Covers
Description
This power adapter converts a
nonpowered panel to a powered panel. It
has an electrical harness that distributes
up to four 20-amp circuits. The power
adapter is UL listed and CSA certified.
The power adapter with side covers
includes receptacle fillers.
6"- to 18"-wide power adapters have no
receptacle locations; 24"- to 60"-wide
power adapters have two receptacle
locations per side.
Dimensions
Available in 6", 12", 18", 24", 30", 36",
42", 48", and 60" widths to match
standard panel sizes.
L
This product is available with or without
side covers, depending on whether the
panel to be converted already has side
covers with receptacle locations in place.
(If so, the power adapter without side
covers is the appropriate choice.)
The 6"-wide base power adapter allows
power to pass through a nonpowered
cable management panel at the
baseline, but it does not provide it with
the capability of delivering power to the
work surface.
The power adapter is available with or
without a metal barrier for separation of
electrical and voice/data cables. (The
barrier is not available on the 6"-wide
base power adapter.)
The power adapter does not include
receptacles.
WITH SIDE COVERS
DISTRIBUTION
ASSEMBLY
SIDE
COVERS
FOR USE WITH 24"-, 30"-,
36"-, 42"-, 48"-, AND 60"WIDE PANELS
WITHOUT SIDE COVERS
DISTRIBUTION
ASSEMBLY
The power adapter must be field installed.
Options
Order the Receptacle, 4 Circuit, 15 Amp
(A1311.), or Receptacle, 4 Circuit, 20
Amp (X1311.), separately.
Limitations
The base power adapter with side
covers is not available for the 6"-wide
cable management panel or 12"- or 18"wide panels.
L
FOR USE WITH 6"-, 12"-, 18"-,
24"-, 30"-, 36"-, 42"-, 48"-,
AND 60"-WIDE PANELS
NOTE: FOR PANELS 6", 12", AND
18" WIDE, NO RECEPTACLE
LOCATIONS AND NO
Panel Pass-Through Power Jumper
A1342.
Description
This harness extends power from a
powered panel through a nonpowered
panel to an adjacent powered panel. It
does not provide receptacle access. The
power jumper is UL listed and CSA
certified.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and
60" widths to match standard panel
sizes.
Power jumpers are not available for 6"-,
12"-, or 18"-wide panels. To distribute
power through a nonpowered 6"-wide
cable management panel or a 12"- or
18"-wide panel completing a panel run,
the panel can be retrofit with a base
power adapter.
PROVIDES DISTRIBUTION
OF POWER—NO ACCESS
FOR USE WITH 24"-,
30"-, 36"-, 42"-, 48",
AND 60"-WIDE PANELS
There is no limit to the number of passthrough power jumpers that can be
attached together.
The power jumper must be field
installed.
Limitations
The power jumper does not provide
receptacle access.
The power jumper is not available to fit
the 6"-wide cable management panel
frame or 12"- and 18"-wide panels.
L
Harness End Cap
B1358.
Description
This cap covers the unused end port or
side port of an electrical harness. It also
serves as a visual indicator for the last
harness in a series of powered products.
Cap is red. Package contains 10.
Dimensions
Height is 2".
Width is 3/4".
Depth is 1/2".
The harness end cap helps ensure
against accidentally connecting
harnesses from more than one power
entry, especially during reconfigurations.
The harness end cap can be removed
later if the electrical distribution is to
continue to an adjacent harness.
The city of Los Angeles requires end
caps on all unused harness ends.
L
Electrical Bridge
A1370.
Description
This bridge connects an electrical
harness with the E power option to an
electrical harness with the D power
option. It is UL listed and CSA certified.
Package contains five.
Dimensions
Width is 10 3/4".
This bridge connects an earlier version
(D) of the four-circuit energy system to a
newer version (E) of the four-circuit
system for uninterrupted energy
distribution through the system. (Once
the flexible electrical connector is
removed from the old system, the
electrical bridge is snapped into the
power block of the old system and the
end of the power harness of the new
system.)
L
Vertical Distribution
Baseline power is distributed vertically through the cable management panel to
predetermined access locations just above the work surface. (The cable management
panel, if desired, can also distribute voice/data cables—physically separated from
power transmissions by a metal septum.)
The wires (and cables) are concealed between segmented panel faces that fit over
both sides of the panel frame and provide access to power from either side of the
cable management panel.
VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION
OF BASELINE POWER
THROUGH 6"-WIDE
ACCESS TO POWER
AT WORK SURFACE HEIGHT
NOTE: SAME CAPABILITIES
ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF PANEL
L
Electrical Access
The primary means of electrical access in this Herman Miller four-circuit energy
system is the receptacle; while most receptacles in the system are duplex, the
isolated ground with surge suppression is a simplex receptacle—whether for circuits b
or c or the dedicated circuit d.
When receptacles are installed, access to power is available from that side of the
panel through cutouts in either the base or the cable management panel. When
receptacles are installed on both sides, power access is available from one or both
sides of the panel.
Receptacles can also be provided at the work surface, either mounted to its
underside, fitted in a trough, or placed in a bracket on top of the surface. With the
power center and the multi-outlet electrical distributor, up to six receptacles can be
grouped in a single unit; and with the power center, receptacles and communication
ports can be combined in the same unit.
Receptacles are available at 15- or 20-ampere ratings (although not every component
offers both). They are marked to signify which circuit they access, as well as to show
isolated ground capability.
For a detailed discussion of receptacle capacities and planning considerations, see
“Circuit Capacity and Configurations,” “Key Regulations,” and “Planning Process
Overview” in this “Energy Distribution” section.
L
Receptacle, 4 Circuit, 15 Amp
A1311.
Description
This receptacle locks into the baseline
harness of an Action Office Series 2
panel, the stretcher of an Arrio work
surface, or a Liaison cabinet in a backto-back configuration. It is UL listed and
CSA certified.
A duplex receptacle package contains
six receptacles; a simplex receptacle
package contains one.
Dimensions
Height is 2".
Overall width is 4 5/8".
Depth is 1 1/2".
Receptacles for this four-circuit, eightwire system are designed to access
circuit a, b, c, or d. Optional isolated
ground and isolated ground with surge
suppression versions are also available
for the b, c, and d circuits; each of these
has orange circuit letters as well as an
orange triangle to facilitate user
identification.
The types of receptacles available,
along with the circuits they access, are
shown on the chart below:
Circuit Type
Description
A
B
C
D
BI
CI
BIS
CIS
DIS
Duplex, circuit a
Duplex, circuit b
Duplex, circuit c
Duplex, circuit d, isolated ground
Duplex, circuit b, isolated ground
Duplex, circuit c, isolated ground
Simplex, surge suppression, circuit b, isolated ground
Simplex, surge suppression, circuit c, isolated ground
Simplex, surge suppression, circuit d, isolated ground
If any of the isolated ground receptacles
(BI, CI, etc.) are used, they access the
same neutral and ground as the d circuit
and consequently negate the dedicated
function of the d circuit.
L
A BI receptacle should never be used on
the same circuit with a b receptacle, and
vice versa; and a CI receptacle should
never be used on the same circuit with a
c receptacle, and vice versa.
The optional surge suppression is
designed to provide added protection
from the hazards of power surges; this is
especially critical for computers or other
sophisticated equipment. The receptacle
contains integrated components, which
provide the protection, as well as an
LED (Light-Emitting Diode) for visual
indication of proper operation; if the LED
fails to light, it means the surge
suppression capability has been
exhausted and the receptacle should be
replaced.
The advantage that surge-suppression
receptacles offer over a centrally
protected electrical system is that
electrical equipment is protected not
only from outside power surges but also
from power surges that occur inside the
building. They also protect equipment
using the same circuits from affecting
each other.
Surge suppression is provided by three
metal oxide varistors (MOVs) mounted
on a small circuit board. The
specifications for the surge-suppression
capability are these:
• Transient energy—70 joules maximum
• Transient peak current—6500 amps
maximum
• Clamping voltage—340 volts
maximum at 50 amps
Note: The surge-suppression receptacle
is UL listed, based on UL 1449 standard
for transient voltage suppressors.
All receptacles are duplex (two plugs),
except for the isolated ground with surge
suppression, which is simplex (one
plug)—whether for circuits b or c or the
dedicated circuit d.
L
X1311.
Description
This receptacle locks into a four-circuit
electrical harness to provide power to
equipment with a 20-amp standard plug
head. It also accepts 15-amp standard
plug heads. The receptacle is UL listed
and CSA certified.
Dimensions
Height is 2".
Depth is 1 1/2".
This receptacle is designed for
components that require more power
than 15-amp receptacles can provide.
The total connected load for this
receptacle should not exceed 16 amps.
(If one piece of equipment requires all
available power, the receptacle’s second
outlet should not be used; additional
receptacles can be installed on that
circuit. In many cases, equipment
requiring this receptacle will use all
available power.)
ground versions are also available for
the b, c, and d circuits; each of these
identification.
Circuit
Type
Description
AT
BT
CT
DT
BIT
CIT
Circuit a
Circuit b
Circuit c
Circuit d, isolated ground
Circuit b, isolated ground
Circuit c, isolated ground
L
a CI receptacle should never be used on
the same circuit with a c receptacle.
All receptacles are duplex (two plugs)—
whether for circuits b or c or the
Limitations
When the receptacle is locked into the
baseline harness of an Action Office
Series 3 powered panel, the receptacle
extends 5/8" from the trim cover.
L
K1311.
Description
This receptacle locks into the electrical
harness of an Action Office Series 3
powered panel, a Liaison powered
cabinet, an Arrio powered work surface,
or an Action Office Series 2 or 3
powered cable management panel
frame to provide power to equipment
with a 15-amp standard plug head. The
receptacle is UL listed and CSA
certified.
A duplex receptacle package contains
six receptacles; a simplex receptacle
package contains one.
Dimensions
Height is 2".
Depth is 7/8".
ground and isolated ground with surge
suppression versions are also available
for the b, c, and d circuits; each of these
identification.
Circuit Type
Description
A
B
C
D
BI
CI
BIS
CIS
DIS
Duplex, circuit a
Duplex, circuit b
Duplex, circuit c
Duplex, circuit d, isolated ground
Duplex, circuit b, isolated ground
Duplex, circuit c, isolated ground
Simplex, surge suppression, circuit b, isolated ground
Simplex, surge suppression, circuit c, isolated ground
Simplex, surge suppression, circuit d, isolated ground
L
vice versa; and a CI receptacle should
never be used on the same circuit with a
c receptacle, and vice versa.
The optional surge suppression is
designed to provide added protection
from the hazards of power surges; this is
especially critical for computers or other
sophisticated equipment. The receptacle
contains integrated components, which
provide the protection, as well as an
LED (Light-Emitting Diode) for visual
indication of proper operation; if the LED
fails to light, it means the surge
suppression capability has been
exhausted and the receptacle should be
replaced.
The advantage that surge-suppression
receptacles offer over a centrally
protected electrical system is that
electrical equipment is protected not
only from outside power surges but also
from power surges that occur inside the
building. They also protect equipment
using the same circuits from affecting
each other.
Surge suppression is provided by three
metal oxide varistors (MOVs) mounted
on a small circuit board. The
specifications for the surge-suppression
capability are these:
• Transient energy—70 joules maximum
• Transient peak current—6500 amps
maximum
• Clamping voltage—340 volts
maximum at 50 amps
Note: The surge-suppression receptacle
is UL listed, based on UL 1449 standard
for transient voltage suppressors.
L
All receptacles are duplex (two plugs),
except for the isolated ground with surge
suppression, which is simplex (one
plug)—whether for circuits b or c or the
Liaison cabinets placed back to back
require the A1311. four-circuit receptacle
rather than the K1311. receptacle.
For Action Office Series 2 panels: When
specifying receptacles for the Action
Office Series 2 cable management
panel frame, order the four-circuit
receptacle (K1311.); when specifying
them for all other Series 2 panels, order
the four-circuit receptacle (A1311.) or
the 20-amp four-circuit receptacle
(X1311.).
L
Electrical Distributor, 3 Outlet
G1313.
Description
This electrical distributor attaches to an
Action Office panel-suspended cable
management trough or Ethospace cable
management trough or fits in a
Newhouse Group cable management
channel, an Arrio electrical distributor
bracket, or the stretcher on an Arrio
work surface. It provides additional
receptacles at work surface height and
has three standard, three-prong
receptacles with a 15-amp circuit
breaker. The electrical distributor is UL
7 1/2"
2 3/8"
2"
Dimensions
Width is 7 1/2"; depth is 2 3/8".
Placing the multi-outlet electrical
distributor at work surface height allows
easy access for users; this is especially
helpful to workers with reach limitations.
Placing the electrical distributor below
the work surface makes the receptacles
slightly less accessible, but hides them
from view.
To use the electrical distributor above an
Arrio work surface, order an Arrio
electrical distributor bracket. Ethospace
work surfaces, Arrio table desks, and
Newhouse Group table desks have
integral channels that will hold the
electrical distributor; they require no
additional components. To use the
electrical distributor below the work
surface height, use an Action Office
cable management trough.
3-OUTLET
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTOR
BENEATH WORK SURFACE
CABLE
MANAGEMENT
TROUGH
The distributor is available in a version
with surge suppression that has an LED
indicator and noise-filtration
components.
L
Options
To hold the electrical distributor at work
surface height on an Arrio table desk,
order the Bracket, Multi-Outlet Electrical
Distributor (XR130.), separately.
For use with Action Office products,
order the Cable Management Trough,
Panel Suspended (AO381.), or the
Cable Management Trough, Work
Surface Suspended (AO382.),
separately.
Limitations
Check the local electrical codes for
acceptable applications; some do not
permit the use of this electrical
distributor.
L
Electrical Distributor, Multi-Outlet
NP289.
Description
This electrical distributor attaches to an
Action Office panel-suspended cable
management trough or Ethospace cable
management trough or fits in a
Newhouse Group cable management
channel, an Arrio electrical distributor
bracket, or the stretcher on an Arrio
work surface. It provides additional
receptacles at work surface height and
has six standard, three-prong
receptacles with a 15-amp circuit
breaker. The electrical distributor is UL
MULTI-OUTLET
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTOR
Dimensions
Width is 12"; depth is 2 3/8".
The distributor is available in a version
with surge suppression that has an LED
indicator and noise-filtration components.
Placing the multi-outlet electrical
distributor at work surface height allows
easy access for users; this is especially
helpful to workers with reach limitations.
Placing the electrical distributor below
the work surface makes the receptacles
slightly less accessible, but hides them
from view.
CABLE
MANAGEMENT
TROUGH
Ethospace work surfaces, Arrio table
desks, and Newhouse Group table
desks have integral channels that will
hold the electrical distributor; they
require no additional components. To
use the electrical distributor below the
work surface height, use an Action
Office cable management trough.
Options
For use with Action Office products,
order the Cable Management Trough,
Panel Suspended (AO381.), or the
Surface Suspended (AO382.),
separately.
Limitations
This electrical distributor is not permitted
under some local codes. Check the local
electrical codes for acceptable
applications.
L
Power Center
NP359.
Description
This power center mounts under a work
surface with cable ports; it can also be
field mounted under an existing Action
Office work surface for high-density
cable management. The power center
has a hinged door for access to
duplexes and cables and a 6' power
cord that plugs into an Action Office or
standard duplex receptacle. Electrical
and voice/data cables are separate and
exit the raceway from opposite sides.
The voice/data locations are designed
for Epitome connectors.
The 21"-wide power center cannot
mount under a work surface less than
24" wide; the 42"-wide power center
cannot mount under a work surface less
than 48" wide.
POWER
CENTER
HINGED
DOOR
Dimensions
Widths are 21" and 42".
Height is 8".
Depth is 6".
The power center is an alternative
to a multi-outlet distributor when
communication ports are required in
addition to 15-amp duplex receptacles.
The various sizes and configurations of
power centers offer combinations of up
to four 15-amp duplexes and six
Epitome communication ports.
Although its location beneath the work
surface makes the receptacles and
cable communication modules slightly
less accessible, the power center is
hidden from view when installed.
Voice/data connections must be field
wired.
Faceplates for Epitome cable
communication modules are not
provided and must be purchased
separately from the manufacturer.
L
Outlet Strip
AO371.
Description
This multi-outlet strip attaches to a panel
or wall strip to provide additional outlets
at the panel baseline. It has four
grounded receptacles and is UL listed
and CSA certified.
Dimensions
Width is 1 1/4"; height is 12".
A licensed electrician must field wire the
outlet strip to meet local electrical
codes.
Options
To attach the outlet strip to a panel or
wall strip, order the Mounting Kit
L
Cable Port Outlet Strip
NP358.
Description
This putty-colored multi-outlet strip
mounts under a work surface with cable
ports. It provides additional outlets and
manages cables beneath the work
surface. It has a 6' power cord.
Dimensions
Widths are 12" and 15".
Depth is 2".
Specify the four-outlet strip for the
13 1/2"- or 19 1/2"-wide cable port in the
work surface; specify the six-outlet strip
for the 19 1/2"-wide cable port.
The outlets pop up when the cable port
lid is raised, making them accessible
from the top of the work surface.
A licensed electrician must field wire the
outlet strip to meet local electrical
codes.
Options
Order the optional Cable Management
Trough, Panel Suspended (AO381.),
separately.
To access the cable port outlet strip from
the top of a work surface, order the
Cable Port (NP360.) separately.
L
Mounting Kit
AO372.
Description
This kit attaches an outlet strip to a
panel or wall strip.
This mounting kit attaches to the slots in
the panel hanger rails or wall strips.
L
Extension Cord
AO373.
Description
This black, 9' extension cord has three
grounding-type outlets.
Dimensions
Length of the extension cord is 9'.
Width of the outlet block is 5 1/2".
The extension cord provides additional
length when the equipment plug cannot
reach the receptacle.
Limitations
An extension cord may not be permitted
under some local codes. Check the local
codes for acceptable practices.
L
Faceplate with Cutouts
G1310.
Description
This faceplate allows voice/data cables
to exit from receptacle locations.
Package contains twelve.
Dimensions
Width is 3 1/4".
Height is 2".
This faceplate covers most of a baseline
receptacle location while providing exit
holes for two voice/data cables. It
replaces the solid-face receptacle
location cover and is used as an
alternative to having cables exit at their
normal location at the end of the panel
or frame.
Voice and data cables must be able to fit
through exit holes that are 1/2" high and
3/8" wide. (Larger cables must exit
through the end of the panel or frame.)
Limitations
The beltline faceplate can be used only
with Ethospace frames.
L
Walls Cable Management
Cable Management
In modern offices, with their increasing use of sophisticated, sensitive equipment,
there are masses of cables to be accommodated. The primary distribution of voice
and data cables usually parallels the building’s electrical system, but a separate
system of chases, conduits, and raceways is used.
Action Office Series 2 panels provide an attractive, easy-to-use solution for managing
cables. There are four means of cable management—the panel base raceway, the
vertical cable management panel, the panel-top voice/data cable channel (for equalheight panel runs only), and the external cable management troughs. Used together,
they form an integrated system to meet the full range of cable management needs.
OPTIONAL
VOICE/DATA
CABLE CHANNEL
AT TOP OF PANEL
CABLE
MANAGEMENT
TROUGH
(EXTERNAL)
CABLE
MANAGEMENT
PANEL
PANEL BASE
RACEWAY
OPTIONAL METAL BARRIER
TO SEPARATE SENSITIVE DATA
TRANSMISSION CABLES FROM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CABLES ROUTED
BENEATH
CABLE/ENERGY
BARRIER
FLEXIBLE TRIM EDGE
FOR EASY ENTRY AND
EXIT OF DATA LINES
OPTIONAL DATA PORT
LOCATION (1 PER SIDE)
L
HINGED COVER
Cable Management Overview
Action Office Series 2 panels offer these specific features for managing cables:
• A horizontal cable distribution channel, with hinged side covers for easy access, at
the panel base (channel conceals cables and Local Area Network [LAN] cables)
• A vertical distribution channel, separated from the electrical system by a barrier, in
the cable management panel; snap-on panel faces offer lay-in capability, conceal
the cabling, and provide access without removing the work surfaces
• An optional panel-top channel to distribute cables horizontally, while separating
them from the panel base distribution channel
• Access options at the baseline and work surface height on the cable management
panel
• An optional cable/energy barrier to separate cables from the electrical harness in
the panel base
L
Cable Access and Cable Management Products (Four Circuit)
Product
Capacity
Characteristics
Panel Base Raceway
• 60 4-pair Category 5 capacity
(powered)
(nonpowered)
• 6" bend radius at corners
Provides horizontal channel at base of
panel to carry voice/data cables, as well
as electrical harness; has cable access
openings at ends
Cable/Energy Barrier,
Panel and Connector
• Reduces cable management
capacity to 18 4-pair Category 5
Provides barrier to separate data cables
and electrical wires
Voice/Data Cable Channel, and
Connector and End Cap
• 1" – 2" bend radius
Provides horizontal channel at top of
panel to carry voice/data cables
(powered)
(nonpowered)
Provides vertical chase for cabling or
access to power and data/
telecommunications at work surface
height; septum provides separation for
power and communications
Ceiling Power Entry and Extender
for Cable Management Panel
from ceiling to top of panel
(within extender)
from panel top to base (when
panel is powered)
from panel top to base (when
panel is nonpowered)
Carries communication cabling
vertically from ceiling to top of cable
management panel; provides chase
for ceiling supply
Ceiling Power Entry
(powered)
(nonpowered)
Carries cabling (as well as electrical
wires) vertically from ceiling to base of
powered panel
Cable Management Troughs
(AO381. and AO382.)
• Not applicable
Suspend from panel or work surface to
manage, store, and conceal excess cord
lengths
Cable Management Trough
(AO383.)
• Not applicable
Chase, attached with adhesive backing
horizontally or vertically to panel or wall
to manage and conceal cables
Cable Port
• 38 4-pair Category 5 capacity (12"
width)
• 80 4-pair Category 5 capacity (18"
width)
Provides hinged, covered opening on
field-modified work surface for cable
pass-through
Panel
L
Cable management involves a number of issues:
Supply: How will the voice/data cables get from the building to the distribution
points?
Cable Types: Which type of cable is being used or is needed, and what are its
requirements for bending and for turning corners?
Capacity: How much physical room is there for the cables themselves, and what
kind of and how much data can different types of cabling carry?
Distribution: How will voice/data cables be distributed—and over what distances
and in what directions?
Separation: How can more sensitive data cables be separated from interference
from higher-voltage power? How much separation and what kind is necessary—
and how can it best be achieved?
Reconfiguration: How do the cabling needs change—frequency, kind, and
extent?
Access: How should the cables be terminated—at the equipment itself or to a
modular jack?
A discussion of these issues in greater detail follows.
OPTIONAL PANEL-TOP CHANNEL—CARRIES
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTALLY BETWEEN
ADJACENT EQUAL-HEIGHT PANELS
VERTICAL CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL—
CARRIES COMMUNICATIONS
VERTICALLY TO
WORK SURFACE, PANEL
BASE, AND OTHER
CUSTOM LOCATIONS
CARRIES POWER VERTICALLY
TO WORK SURFACE HEIGHT
(SEPARATED FROM DATA CABLES)
CABLE MANAGEMENT TROUGH—
CARRIES CABLES (AND WIRES)
HORIZONTALLY BENEATH WORK
SURFACE (EXTERNAL)
PANEL BASE—CARRIES BOTH
POWER AND VOICE/DATA CABLES
L
Supply
A fundamental issue with cabling in the office is understanding where within the
building it is possible to gain access to the data and telecommunications network.
There are several different building supply methods, some conventional and in
widespread use (networks through walls, columns, and ceilings), others newer and
more flexible (underfloor and flat-wire methods).
It is important to know which method(s) are used in the building structure, because
this will affect how much of the cable distribution must be carried by the furniture
system. It is this interface between building distribution and distribution by the interior
furnishings that determines how much flexibility in layout is allowed. For example, an
underfloor system can minimize the need for horizontal cable management via
systems furniture, since cables can be brought, through the floor, directly to where
they are needed in a workstation. This can be an important consideration when
dealing with types of transmission in which quality is affected by distance from the
building supply.
L
Cable Types
The amount of cable any furniture system can accommodate is a function of both the
overall space available and the type of cable used. This is because some cables and
wires bend more easily than others; consequently, corner connections frequently
become the limiting factor. Action Office Series 2 panels not only provide sufficient
space, but the wide arc formed at corner connections can also accommodate virtually
any type of cable, up to and including fiber optics. Cables and wires can enter and exit
the cable management base at each end of the side cover through flexible gaskets.
Cable type is therefore critical for determining actual capacity. Most communication
networks use one of the following cable types:
Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) Cable
This cable consists of pairs of insulated wires twisted around each other and covered
by a protective coating. These wires are usually combined in multiples of pairs (e.g.,
4-pair, 25-pair, 100-pair). Most telephone lines are twisted-pair cables, but this type is
increasingly being used to transmit data as well as voice communications. Both IBM
and AT&T use twisted-pair cables in their systems. This cable is unshielded and
bends freely, which means that this Herman Miller furniture system easily
accommodates it.
OUTER JACKET
4-PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
Unshielded twisted-pair cables are categorized according to the speed of
transmission and, ultimately, their use. The following chart shows performance
characteristics of different UTP cables:
Performance Characteristics of Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) Cable
Cable Category*
1 or 2
3
4
5**
Applications
Voice and lowspeed data
Voice and lowspeed data
Data
Data
Frequency Limit
Up to 4 MHz
16 MHz
20 MHz
100 MHz
Construction
4-pair to 100-pair
4-pair
4-pair
4-pair
Bend Radius
2" or less
2" or less
2" or less
2" or less
Connector—Voice
RJ11
RJ11
—
—
Connector—Data
8-position
(RJ45)
8-position
(RJ45)
8-position 8-position
(RJ45)
(RJ45)
UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR
(UTP) CABLE
*UTP cables in Categories 3, 4, and 5 provide enhanced performance in the ability to
distribute more data at increased speeds. This is due to the use of performanceenhanced cabling and connectors.
**Because Category 5 cables provide a much higher transmission speed, they’re
being used more frequently—particularly by customers who have multiple computer
networks or those who plan to change to higher-speed data communication
equipment in the future.
L
Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) Cable
Shielded twisted-pair cable is like the unshielded version in composition, except that
the shielded twisted-pair cable has an additional light foil layer around the wire and
below the outer protective vinyl coating. This foil acts as a shield to buffer the internal
signal from interference.
Performance Characteristics of
Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) Cable
Applications
Construction
Bend Radius
Connector
Data, LAN
2-pair
3"
IBM
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR
(STP) CABLE
OUTER JACKET
CENTER
CONDUCTOR
Coaxial Cable
This type of cable consists of a metal core conductor covered by insulation and a
metal sheath, which is covered by an insulated coating. The metal sheath serves as
both a second conductor and a shield. Another variation, called twin axial, is similar to
coaxial but has two insulated conductors inside a cable. This Herman Miller furniture
system, with its wide corner connections, can handle most coaxial cables despite their
limited ability to bend.
COAXIAL CABLE
BRAIDED
SHIELD
Fiber-Optic Cable
The most advanced form of cable to date, fiber-optic cables use light rather than
electrical impulses to transmit information; they have a core of glass or plastic,
covered by an insulating coating. Because fiber-optic cables use light transmission,
they are immune to electromagnetic interference or noise caused by power wires,
making separation unnecessary. Fiber-optic cables also have the advantages of
greater capacity and a smaller diameter compared to other cable types.
Bend Radius by Cable Diameter
Cable
Diameter
Bend
Radius
1⁄ 8 "
1" to 2"
1" to 2"
1⁄ 4 "
(single fiber)
(duplex fiber)
FIBER
FIBER-OPTIC CABLE
Action Office Series 2, because of its wide corner connections, can handle the bend
radius requirements of a number of fiber-optic cables, especially those with one to
four fiber strands. In addition, the cavity between the panel faces on the cable
management panel and the channel at the panel base are large enough to
accommodate bundling and to allow most in-line equipment and termination boxes to
be placed inside the panel base or cable management panel rather than be exposed
on the outside of the panel. This provides protection for these sensitive pieces of
equipment, which are usually large and require space to accommodate spool/strain
relief. (In-line equipment and termination boxes should be measured to assure their fit.)
L
Capacity
Cable capacity in any furniture system depends on the amount of space available for
cables, the type of cables used, and the number and degree of bends in the layout.
For the Action Office Series 2 system, cable capacity is also dependent on whether
the cabling is carried only at the baseline or whether cables are also carried vertically
through the cable management panel. (Note the cable capacity charts that follow.)
Horizontal Capacity
While cable type is critical for determining actual capacity, corner connections
frequently become the limiting factor, since some cables and wires bend more easily
than others and since bundled cables have different bend radii. Likewise, frequent
sharp bends can reduce the transmission quality of some cables. Since bundled
cables have different bend radii, the largest radius in the range should be used.
While the bends required by corner connections may ultimately determine capacity,
corner connectors also offer a number of options that can affect capacity.
• With a hard-surfaced or fabric-covered two-way 90° connector, cables can be
routed along both the inside and the outside corners; the inside corner provides a
1" radius, while the outside corner offers a greater 4 1/2" to 6" radius, depending on
the cable thickness.
4⁄«™" TO 6"
BEND RADIUS
1" BEND
RADIUS
HARD-SURFACED OR FABRICCOVERED CONNECTOR—
CABLES ALONG BOTH INSIDE
AND OUTSIDE CORNERS
2-WAY CONNECTOR
L
• With the three-way 90° connector, cables and wires can be routed along both of the
inside corners and across the back side of the connector. The 1" radius of this
inside corner is identical to that of the two-way 90° connector. If a wider arc is
needed, cables can be routed from the outside back to an inside corner of the
connector. This provides a 4 1/2" radius for thick cables, a 6" radius for smaller
cables like fiber optics.
ACROSS BACK
(NO BEND REQUIRED)
INSIDE CORNER
(1" BEND RADIUS)
INSIDE CORNER
TO OUTSIDE BACK
(4⁄«™" TO 6"
BEND RADIUS)
3-WAY CONNECTORS
• With a four-way 90° connector, cables and wires can be routed along all inside
corners or straight across the connector in either direction. The 1" radius of the
inside corners is identical to that of the two-way and three-way connectors. If a
wider arc is needed, cables can be routed between opposite corners of the
connector. This provides a 4 1/2" radius for thick cables, a 6" radius for smaller
cables like fiber optics.
ACROSS CONNECTOR
(NO BEND REQUIRED)
INSIDE CORNER
(1" BEND RADIUS)
BETWEEN
OPPOSITE CORNERS
(4⁄«™" TO 6"
BEND RADIUS)
4-WAY CONNECTORS
L
Vertical Capacity
Because the cable management panel is available in two versions—powered and
nonpowered—the vertical cable capacity is dependent on which is selected. The
capacity from the panel top to the base is 59 4-pair UTP Category 5 cables when the
panel is nonpowered, 50 4-pair UTP Category 5 cables when the panel is powered.
Summary of Cable Capacities
The “Cable Capacity” charts show the cable capacities of Action Office Series 2
panels for the most common types of cable found in the office. The figures reflect
power in the panel base and the cable management panel frame.
Note: These figures are planning guidelines only; actual cable capacity can vary due
to cable insulation thickness, wire gauge, manufacturer, cable stiffness, and nesting
characteristics.
L
Horizontal Cable Capacity (4-Circuit)
1, 2, 3
Cable Type
Spine
Capacity
2-Way
Capacity
3-Way
Capacity
4-Way
Capacity
At Baseline (with Power Option)
Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP)—
25-Pair Twisted-Pair
4-Pair Category 5
Shielded Twisted-Pair—IBM Type 1A
Coaxial
Fiber-Optic—Duplex
24 Cables
60 Cables
24 Cables
60 Cables
100 Cables
8 – 20 Cables
25 – 55 Cables
8 – 20 Cables
25 – 55 Cables
40 – 100 Cables
16 – 24 Cables
50 – 60 Cables
16 – 24 Cables
50 – 60 Cables
80 – 100 Cables
16 – 24 Cables
50 – 60 Cables
16 – 24 Cables
50 – 60 Cables
80 – 100 Cables
At Optional Top Channel
4-Pair Category 5
Coaxial
10 Cables
24 Cables
10 Cables
24 Cables
40 Cables
8 – 10 Cables
16 Cables
8 – 10 Cables
16 Cables
25 Cables
10 Cables
24 Cables
10 Cables
24 Cables
40 Cables
10 Cables
24 Cables
10 Cables
24 Cables
40 Cables
Vertical Cable Capacity
2
Cable Type
4-Pair Category 5
Coaxial
Ceiling Power Entry
Powered
Nonpowered
Cable Management Panel (Powered)
Side 1
Side 2
36 Cables
90 Cables
36 Cables
90 Cables
120 Cables
10 Cables
30 Cables
10 Cables
30 Cables
50 Cables
48 Cables
120 Cables
48 Cables
120 Cables
160 Cables
7 Cables
20 Cables
7 Cables
20 Cables
35 Cables
1
When a range is given, the lower number indicates complete lay-in capacity, and the
higher number requires installing cables between support posts.
2
Cable capacity can vary due to cable insulation thickness, wire gauge selected,
manufacturer, cable stiffness, and nesting characteristics.
3
Top channel interior dimensions are 3/4 inches wide by 1 1/2 inches high, or 1 1/8
square inches.
Fiber-Optic Cable Bend Radius
Product
Bend Radius
90° Corner (at Panel Base)
Up to 6"
90° Corner (at Optional Panel Top Channel)
2"
Vertical Bend from Panel Base to
Up to 6"
L
Effect of Bends on Cable Capacity
The illustrations that follow show how capacity figures can be used to plan a cabling
layout. The illustrations show the potential effect of bends on cable capacity; they also
show how the sequence of those turns can affect cable capacity along the route.
While the charts of cable capacity for Series 2 panels and connectors are useful for
planning purposes, the systems furniture layout can have a dramatic impact on the
portion of that capacity that can actually be utilized. For example, although a Series 2
panel can carry up to 60 Category 5 cables in its baseline raceway, once the cables
go through a 2-way 90° connector (with a maximum capacity of 55 cables), the samedimension raceway beyond that 90° connector can be fed only the maximum of 55
cables. Just that one turn shows the effect of bends on cable capacity: Once a turn
has decreased the cable capacity, the run that follows can carry only the reduced
number of cables, even if it has a greater capacity to do so. The effect of decreased
capacity is somewhat lessened by the fact that some cables will naturally be dropping
off to supply power to equipment in the workstations.
NO BENDS—NO LOSS
OF CABLE CAPACITY
60 CABLES
60 CABLES
60 CABLES
4-WAY
CONNECTOR
(MAXIMUM OF 60
CABLES)—NO
LOSS OF CABLE
CAPACITY
60 CABLES
2-WAY
CONNECTOR
(MAXIMUM OF
55 CABLES)
55 CABLES
CAPACITY REDUCED TO
55 CABLES DUE TO
LOWER CAPACITY OF
2-WAY CONNECTOR
NOTE: EXAMPLES REFLECT
CATEGORY 5 CABLES
L
55 CABLES
60 CABLES
NO
DECREASE
IN CABLE
CAPACITY
WITH THIS
BEND
60 CABLES
2-WAY
CONNECTOR
(MAXIMUM OF
55 CABLES)—
DECREASE IN
CAPACITY TO
55 CABLES
55 CABLES
4-WAY CONNECTOR
(MAXIMUM OF 60 CABLES)—
CAPACITY REDUCED DUE
TO LOWER CAPACITY OF
CORNER CONNECTOR
PRECEDING IT
Cable Distribution
Voice and data communication cables can be distributed both horizontally and
vertically in Action Office Series 2 panels.
Cable Entry
Regardless of the type of distribution system in the building (conventional, overhead,
underfloor duct, relocatable, flat conductor, or raised floor), the conditions are the
same for connecting the cabling source to the cable management system in Action
Office Series 2 panels.
In most cases, the terminus point of the building system will be either a junction box
or a monument. Depending upon the dictates of local codes, owner’s preferences, and
building conditions, one or more of the following methods of entry can be used:
• Cables can enter the base of the panel from a floor monument through the flexible
gaskets at the ends of each base cover.
• Cables can enter the workstation through communication port outlets—usually in
the panel base, but possibly in a cable management panel.
THROUGH FLEXIBLE BASE
COVER GASKETS FROM FLOOR
MONUMENT OR JUNCTION BOX
THROUGH COMMUNICATION
PORT OUTLET FROM FLOOR
MONUMENT OR JUNCTION BOX
L
THROUGH COMMUNICATION
PORT LOCATION IN PANEL
BASE FROM BUILDING WALL
• Cables can enter the panel from the ceiling through a ceiling power entry to the
base or the top of a panel. Entry can be directly into the end of the panel or into a
spacer or a two-, three-, or four-way 90° connector.
• Cables can also enter the panel through a ceiling power entry for a cable
management panel. Entry can be directed to the optional panel-top voice/data cable
channel or to the panel base at any point within the panel run.
FROM CEILING POWER ENTRY
INTO PANEL BASE OR CONNECTOR
(AT END OF PANEL RUN ONLY)
FROM CEILING POWER ENTRY
INTO CABLE MANAGEMENT PANEL
(WITHIN PANEL RUN ITSELF)
Be sure to check local codes for any other specific requirements that may affect
product selection.
Overview of Distribution and Separation
Cables can be carried in the panel base—in the entire cavity if the panel is
nonpowered and beneath the power harness if powered. Because of the hinged
cover, cables can be laid in—making the installation process faster and easier. In
addition to the base, an optional voice/data cable channel at the top of the panel
provides a horizontal channel for cable distribution and separation of cables from
those in the panel base. Between the panel base and top, the cable management
panel carries voice/data cables vertically. Two-piece segmented panel faces on the
cable management panel allow easy initial lay-in installation and easy access to
cables during reconfiguration without removing hanging components.
L
Baseline Distribution
The panel base cable management channel is 5" high by 3 1/4" wide and carries both
electrical wiring and voice/data cables, concealed behind the base cover assembly.
(Capacity varies with cable type.) This hinged assembly allows easy access to wiring
and cabling areas. Where desired, an optional cable/energy barrier can be installed to
separate sensitive voice/data lines from electrical interference.
Besides electrical wires, this space accommodates certain Local Area Network (LAN)
components and takes into account hard-to-bend and large-bend-radius cables.
Corners provide up to a 6" bend radius with a two-way 90° connector. (Glide
adjustment capability on the panels does not affect cable capacity.)
Flexible edge trim at each end permits easy entry and exit of cables to work surfaces
or equipment.
ADJUSTABLE GLIDE—
DOES NOT AFFECT
CABLE CAPACITY
UPPER CHANNEL
FOR POWER
LOWER CHANNEL FOR
VOICE/DATA CABLING
6" BEND RADIUS
HINGED BASE COVER ASSEMBLY
(FLIPS UP FOR CONCEALMENT—
DOWN FOR EASY ACCESS)
PLAN VIEW:
PANEL BASE RACEWAY
AT 90Å CORNER CONNECTION
MAXIMUM BEND RADIUS AT
OUTSIDE OF CORNER—6"
BEND RADIUS AT
INNER CORNER
AND CENTER OF
CORNER—2" TO 4"
L
Panel Top Channel Distribution
An alternative raceway for data cables is available with the optional voice/data cable
channel that can be installed at the top of all panels. This top channel provides an
additional 40 4-pair UTP Category 5 cable capacity with a 1" to 2" bend radius. It also
offers physical separation from energy carried in the panel base and provides
convenient installation and access. (Horizontal cable distribution at the panel top is
only possible, however, between adjacent panels of equal height.)
Cables in the optional channel pass freely, horizontally, over all connectors; the panel
top caps have cutouts that allow several cables to exit at a straight-line connection
between two panels. (Vertical routing within the panel run is accomplished by using a
cable management panel, ceiling power entry [or extender] for the cable management
panel, or horizontal/vertical cable management trough. Vertical routing at the end of a
panel run is accomplished by using a ceiling power entry.)
OPTIONAL VOICE/
DATA CHANNEL
VOICE/DATA
CABLE CHANNEL
CONNECTOR
CHANNEL
(CAPACITY—MAXIMUM
OF 40 4-PAIR
CATEGORY 5 CABLES)
WIRE ACCESS
LOCATION
VOICE/DATA CABLE
PLAN VIEW:
OPTIONAL PANEL-TOP
VOICE/DATA CABLE CHANNEL
1" TO 2"
BEND RADIUS
CAPACITY OF 40 4-PAIR
CATEGORY 5 CABLES
L
Vertical Distribution
The primary means of vertical wire and cable management for Series 2 panels is the
6"-wide cable management panel, made up of the cable management panel frame,
cable management panel faces for each side, extenders, reducers, and related
accessories. (The panel faces are in two segments—a top and a bottom portion—for
powered versions of the cable management panel.) By locating the panel where
needed on the panel run, the cable management panel provides convenient access to
power at standard work surface height, and to voice/data cables above and below the
work surface. It is important to plan placement of the cable management panel so that
hanging components do not interfere with access to power or data.
Each panel face offers three standard options: no access to power or voice/data
cables, electrical access only, or access to both power and voice/data cables. The
panel is two-sided, allowing the face for each side to be specified separately. In
addition, panel faces that provide access to voice/data cables come in segmented,
two-piece covers that allow separate access to cabling above and below the work
surface. Cable distribution can also be extended to the ceiling with the cable
management panel extender; or it can be carried on the cable management side of
the cable management panel ceiling power entry, or within the entire interior cavity if
the ceiling power entry is without the electrical assembly.
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FACE (SIDE 2)
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FACE (SIDE 1)
PANEL FACES FOR POWERED
CABLE MANAGEMENT PANELS
SEGMENTED INTO TOP AND
BOTTOM PIECES FOR EASY
ACCESS TO CABLES WITHOUT
REMOVING WORK SURFACE
POTENTIAL
INTERFERENCE
BETWEEN WORK
SURFACE AND
ACCESS TO POWER
AND ENERGY
KEEP IN MIND HEIGHT OF WORK
SURFACE AND LOCATION OF
SUPPORT ARMS WHEN PLANNING
FOR PORT ACCESS HOLES OR FOR
POWER AT WORK SURFACE HEIGHT
POWER ACCESS
ON THIS HALF
ACCESS TO
VOICE/DATA CABLES
ON THIS HALF
L
The cable management panel frame has an aluminum septum dividing the chase
vertically down the center, physically separating electrical wiring from the voice/data
cables. Like the horizontal barrier in the cable management chase in the panel base,
this vertical septum serves to separate data lines from power lines and provide
access to both power and voice/data cables at convenient points along the height of
the panel. Because the frame is shipped without its removable covers in place,
installation is fast and easy.
When the panel face is installed on each side, the panel provides access holes for
duplex receptacles on the right-hand portion (side 1) and preconfigured cable
interface connectors (communication ports) on the left half (side 1); the opposite side
(side 2) reverses the order—access holes for electrical receptacles on the left,
communication ports on the right. A planning worksheet for electrical receptacles and
communication ports is available in the Action Office Series 2 Panels Documentation
Tools.
PANEL
FACE
FRAME
PANEL
FACE
SIDE 2
ALUMINUM SEPTUM
(FOR PHYSICAL SEPARATION
OF POWER AND
VOICE/DATA CABLES)
SIDE 1
FOR POWER
DISTRIBUTION
FOR VOICE/DATA
CABLE DISTRIBUTION
L
While the receptacles are standard and are available from Herman Miller, the
communication ports are purchased from the particular manufacturer.
Special reducers and extenders allow the most commonly used manufacturers’
equipment to be accommodated; the most critical limiting factor is generally the inside
clearance (front to back) required to house the module once it is snapped into place.
(See the cable management panel frame for dimensions of the actual housing and the
clearances to see whether the communications port under consideration fits.)
When attaching a cable management panel frame to another panel or to a connector
or spacer, it is critical to position the cable management panel to allow for energy
distribution pass-through in the base:
• When connecting the cable management panel to another panel, position the
energy side of the cable management panel on the right (when facing side 1).
• When connecting the cable management panel to a spacer, position the energy
side of the panel next to the connector (when facing side 1).
• When connecting the cable management panel to a two-, three-, or four-way 90°
connector, position the energy side of the panel away from the connector (when
facing side 1).
CABLE
MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME
2-WAY 90Å
CONNECTOR
ENERGY
DISTRIBUTION SIDE
AWAY FROM CONNECTOR
VOICE/DATA
DISTRIBUTION SIDE
NEXT TO CONNECTOR
Ceiling Power Entries
If vertical cable distribution is desired at the end of a panel run or at a three- or fourway panel connection, a ceiling power entry can be used (four circuit or four circuit top
mounted). In each one, the ceiling power entry can carry cabling vertically within its
entire interior, or it can carry cabling in the side opposite the internal electrical
harness; the electrical wires are enclosed by rigid conduit to provide metal separation
between the electrical harness and the voice/data cables.
L
Separation
Many cables used in the workplace have a sheath to protect them from outside
interference and require no additional buffering when placed near electrical wiring.
Where it is important to separate electrical wiring and sensitive communications
cables in the base of the panel, however, an optional metal barrier can be added to
powered panels and to corner connectors. The barrier consists of a plate that
divides the raceway into two separate channels, separating data lines from power
lines.
Note: Actual separation may not be necessary when shielded cables are used.
Separation can also be achieved by using an optional horizontal channel in the top
of the panels, which provides a completely separate location for cables. (The
limiting factor, however, is the need for the panels to be of equal height.)
PHYSICAL SEPARATION FOR CABLES
USING OPTIONAL PANEL-TOP
VOICE/DATA CABLE CHANNEL
VERTICAL SEPARATION OF POWER
AND VOICE/DATA CABLES WITHIN
SEPARATION OF POWER
AND VOICE/DATA CABLES
WITHIN BASE WITH OPTIONAL
CABLE/ENERGY BARRIER
L
Cable Access
The Action Office Series 2 system provides a number of options for access to voice
and data networks. Flexible interconnect modules (communication ports)—made by a
number of different manufacturers—can be installed in the base cover option that
includes a pre-punched communication port location at the lower left on each side.
They can also be installed in a communication port location in the cable management
panel. The Series 2 system provides the capability of moving the cable management
panel or relocating the flexible module within the cable management panel to provide
a different access point for electronic equipment.
The cavity of the cable management panel was designed to accommodate most
interconnect devices; however, since manufacturers’ specifications are subject to
change, exact dimensions of the communication port being considered should be
checked. Reducers and extenders are available with the Series 2 system to
accommodate interconnect devices whose dimensions or clearances are somewhat
smaller or deeper than the port locations in the panel or panel base.
Where equipment is less likely to be moved or changed, the cables from the
equipment can be routed directly; they can go from the equipment through the gap at
the rear of the work surface into the base of the panel (through the flexible end of the
panel base cover).
The ability to provide access at a number of heights on the cable management panel
is an important consideration in meeting safety requirements and the access needs of
workers with disabilities.
INSTALLATION LOCATIONS FOR
COMMUNICATION PORTS
ANY COMMUNICATION
PORT LOCATION IN
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL
ANY UNUSED
RECEPTACLE
LOCATION
BASE OPTION WITH PRE-PUNCHED
COMMUNICATION PORT LOCATION
NOTE: NOMINAL 3" X 1 ‡«•" SIZE OF COMMUNICATION PORT
LOCATION AND RECEPTACLE LOCATION HOLDS ANY STANDARD
COMMUNICATION FACEPLATE USING 3.281" O.C. MOUNTING HOLES
L
Reconfiguration
The Action Office Series 2 system provides easy access to voice/data cables with the
two-part removable faceplates on the cable management panel and the hinged covers
on the panel base. This easy access makes repairs and changes to communication
networks quicker and less disruptive to workstation occupants. In addition, the
capacity of these distribution components provides greater freedom for routing and
storing cables, since cables do not have to be threaded through small openings.
The removable faceplates and the capability for custom-cutting openings in them also
offer greater flexibility for using communication connectors or jacks. These connectors
can be located virtually anywhere on a cable management panel, as long as the
openings are at least 1 1/2" apart; likewise, the panel frame itself can be moved to a
different location if needs should change, since it is as independent and modular as
any other panel. The openings can also be adapted to accommodate connectors from
practically any supplier. Thus, changes in suppliers cause few problems.
L
Cable Management Trough, Panel
Suspended
AO381.
Description
This trough attaches to a panel to hold a
3-outlet or multi-outlet electrical
distributor and to manage cables. It can
be field modified for use with any size
panel. Attachment hardware is included.
Dimensions
widths.
Height is 6".
Select the trough width to be equal to or
greater than the panel width. The trough
can be field cut for use with any panel
size.
The cable management trough can be
placed anywhere on the panel for easier
access by people with reach limitations.
L
HOLDS CABLES/WIRES
BENEATH WORK
SURFACE FOR A
NEAT, ORGANIZED
APPEARANCE
WIRE TUCKS INTO
PANEL-TO-PANEL
CONNECTION
Surface Suspended
AO382.
Description
This trough attaches under an Action
Office suspended work surface or Arrio
two-legged corner table desk to manage
cables. Attachment hardware is
included.
Dimensions
Available in 30" and 40" widths.
Height is 4".
The trough can be field cut for use with
any size work surface.
On Arrio work surfaces with the smaller
stretcher for local cables, the trough can
be attached toward the rear of the work
surface, parallel to its back edge; on a
two-legged corner work surface, it can
be attached diagonally.
CORDS/CABLES
STORE HERE
Limitations
The trough provides distribution of
power, but no access to it.
L
Cable Management Trough,
Horizontal/Vertical
AO383.
Description
This trough is backed with pressuresensitive tape and attaches horizontally
or vertically to an Action Office Series 1
or 2 panel or wall to manage cables.
Package contains two 10"-, three 22"-,
and eight 46"-long troughs.
Dimensions
Available in 10", 22", and 46" lengths.
Width is 1 7/8".
This cable management trough can be
placed at any point on a panel or wall to
manage cables; while positioning the
trough to follow a hanger rail or
component edge makes cables less
visible, the trough is not dependent on
mechanical attachment for placement.
L
PLACING TROUGH
IN HANGER RAIL
MAKES CABLES
LESS VISIBLE
Voice/Data Cable Channel
NP227., NP228., NP229., NP230.,
NP231., NP232., NP233., NP271.
Description
This non-ferrous, top-mounted channel
provides shielding of voice/data cables
from electrical cables on an Action
Office Series 1 or 2 panel. It holds up to
40 4-pair Category 5 cables. The
channel cannot be used for energy
distribution.
Dimensions
Widths are 12", 18", 24", 30", 36", 42",
48", and 60".
TOP PART OF
CABLE CHANNEL
2-WAY
CHANNEL
CONNECTOR
Height is 2 3/4".
Depth is 2 1/8".
Specify the cable channel width to
match that of the panel to which it will be
attached. Since there is no 6"-wide cable
channel, when cable management
panels are used, the voice/data cable
channel must be specified in a width that
spans the tops of both the cable
management panel and an adjacent
panel.
VOICE/DATA
CABLE
CHANNEL
CABLE ACCESS
LOCATION
VOICE/DATA
CABLE
Cable distribution within the cable
channel is horizontal only and does not
allow for vertical distribution to or from
the cable management panel.
Panel-top cable distribution requires all
panels, panel frames, and connectors to
be of equal height.
The portion of the cable channel that
extends above the panel is a nominal
1 7/8".
L
Voice/Data Cable Channel Connector
NP234., NP235., NP236., NP237.,
NP251.
Description
This connector joins two voice/data
cable channels and provides a
continuous cableway between equalheight Action Office Series 1 or 2
panels. Package contains four.
Dimensions
For use with 2-way 90° connector:
Width is nominal 3 1/2".
3-WAY CHANNEL
CONNECTOR
Depth is nominal 3 1/2".
For use with spacer:
Width is nominal 5".
Depth is nominal 2".
CABLE
ACCESS
LOCATION
Depth is nominal 3 1/2".
VOICE/DATA
CABLE
For use with draw rod:
Width is nominal 1 1/2".
Specify the voice/data cable connector
to match the type of connector (two-way,
three-way, or four-way) with which it will
be used.
The portion of the cable channel
connector that extends above the panel
is a nominal 1 7/8".
L
Voice/Data Cable Channel End Cap
NP238.
Description
This end cap finishes the exposed end
of a voice/data cable channel. Package
contains four.
Dimensions
Width is 2 1/8".
Height is 1 7/8".
Depth is 1 1/4", including insert clip.
This cable channel end cap is to be
used at the end of a panel run.
The end cap has a very thin profile that
aligns with the edge of the panel rather
than with the panel finished end.
L
CHANNEL
END CAP
Cable Port
NP360.
Description
This cable port is for field-modified
Action Office work surfaces. It provides a
hinged access cover for cable passthrough. Finish is black umber.
Dimensions
Available in 12" and 18" nominal widths.
Actual widths are 13 1/2" and 19 1/2",
respectively.
Depth is 4 1/2".
Height is 1 1/8".
In addition to providing an opening for
cable pass-through, the cable port can
also, with the installation of a cable port
outlet strip, provide receptacle access.
For the 13 1/2"-wide cable port, order
the four-outlet cable port outlet strip; for
the 19 1/2"-wide cable port, order either
a four- or a six-outlet cable port outlet
strip.
The hole for the cable port must be fieldcut.
Options
Order the Cable Port Outlet Strip
(NP358.) separately.
L
Cable/Energy Barrier, Panel
A1380.
Description
This cable/energy barrier provides a
continuous, grounded metal barrier
within a powered panel to separate
voice/data cables from the baseline
electrical harness. Package contains six.
Dimensions
Available in 12", 18", 24", 30", 36", 42",
Height is 2 1/2".
Select the barrier to match the width of
the panel to which it will be fitted.
The barrier must be field installed.
The field-installed barrier is not required
if the powered panel is specified with the
cable/energy barrier option or if the
cables are already shielded.
UPPER CHANNEL
FOR POWER
CABLE/ENERGY
BARRIER OPTION
LOWER CHANNEL FOR
VOICE/DATA CABLING
L
Cable/Energy Barrier, Connector
A1381.
Description
This cable/energy barrier provides a
continuous, grounded metal barrier at
the base of a connector to separate
voice/data cables from the baseline
electrical harness. Package contains six.
Dimensions
Available to fit the spacer and the two-,
three-, and four-way 90° connectors.
Select the barrier to match the type of
connector to which it will be fitted.
barriers require a cable/energy barrier
for the connector as well.
The cable/energy barrier is not required
if cables are already shielded.
The barrier must be field installed.
UPPER CHANNEL
FOR POWER
CABLE/ENERGY
BARRIER OPTION
LOWER CHANNEL FOR
VOICE/DATA CABLING
L
Cable Management Panel Extender
A1333.
Description
This 6"-wide panel extender attaches to
a cable management panel frame to
carry voice/data cables from a building’s
ceiling to the panel frame. It has ceiling
trim and connecting hardware.
Dimensions
Available in heights to fit 39", 47", 53",
62", 67", and 85" cable management
panel frames.
CEILING
BEZEL
Width is 6".
Interior cavity width is approximately
5 3/8"; depth is 1 5/8".
The extender attaches to an existing
cable management panel frame.
SUPPORT BRACKET FOR
ATTACHMENT TO
CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME
CEILING
EXTENSION
INTERIOR
DIMENSIONS
5 ‹/•" x 1 fi/•"
To order the correct size, select the
height of the cable management panel
to which it is to be attached. The
extender specified for that panel height
will reach a 10'-6" ceiling. (For lower
ceilings, the extender can be cut to size
on site.)
While the extender serves as a cable
distribution component only, it does not
interfere with the normal access to
power and voice/data cables in the cable
management panel frame to which it is
attached.
The cable capacity of the extender is 50
4-pair UTP Category 5 cables (powered)
and 59 4-pair UTP Category 5 cables
(nonpowered).
ATTACHES TO TOP OF
EXISTING CABLE
MANAGEMENT PANEL
FRAME, EXTENDS TO
10'-6" CEILING
Limitations
This extender can be used to distribute
voice/data cables only; it cannot be used
to distribute electrical power through the
cable management panel below it.
MAXIMUM CAPACITY OF CABLE MANAGEMENT
PANEL FRAME AND EXTENDER—
POWERED: 50 4-PAIR CATEGORY 5 CABLES
NONPOWERED: 59 4-PAIR CATEGORY 5 CABLES
L
Communication Port Faceplate
G1189.
Description
This faceplate fits into the
communication port cutout of an Action
Office Series 2 or 3 or Ethospace cable
management side cover, Action Office
Series 2 or 3 cable management panel
face, Liaison communications port trim,
or Arrio voice/data port housing.
Package contains six.
The reducer faceplate reduces the size
of the cutout to fit specific cable
communication modules; finish is black.
The extender faceplate allows
installation of specific cable
communication modules without
interfering with cable distribution
capacity; attachment hardware is
included.
Dimensions
Extender:
• Height is 4 1/2".
• Width is 2 3/4".
• Opening is 2.920" high and 1.770"
wide, with 3.281" between screw
holes.
REDUCER:
EXTENDS ⁄/•" (.125")
FROM PANEL FACE
EXTENDER:
EXTENDS ‡/•"
(.875") BEYOND
PANEL FACE
NO EXTENDER REQUIRED—
MODULE EXTENDS THROUGH
ALUMINUM SEPTUM INTO
OPPOSITE CAVITY
Reducer:
• Width is 2 1/4".
• Opening is 2.700" high and 1.370"
wide.
The faceplate extender provides up to
7/8" (.875") of additional depth for a
cable communication module.
PANEL FACE
NO EXTENDER REQUIRED—
EACH MODULE FITS WITHIN
CAVITY
TIMMERMAN
CLIP (ATTACHED
TO BACK OF
PANEL FACE)
The faceplate reducer extends a
nominal 1/8" from the panel face,
allowing smaller cable communication
modules to fit within a larger opening.
SCREW
(SUPPLIED
WITH
EXTENDER)
Preconfigured cable communication
modules are purchased directly from the
manufacturer.
The faceplate is shipped separately and
field installed.
L
EXTENDER REQUIRED—
NEITHER MODULE FITS
COMPLETELY WITHIN CAVITY
PANEL FACE
ALLOWS UP TO ‡/•" ADDITIONAL
ROOM FOR MODULE
Faceplates can be used on an Action
Office Series 2 or 3 panel or an
Ethospace frame with the “J” or “G”
option (for communication port
locations).
Using a faceplate on a Liaison cabinet
requires a communications port trim.
Using a faceplate on an Arrio work
surface requires a voice/data port
housing.
Options
Order the following components
separately:
• For use with Liaison cabinets:
Communications Port Trim (B1390.)
• For use with Arrio work surfaces:
Voice/Data Port Housing (XR410.)
Limitations
The faceplate cannot be used with the
Ethospace Cable Access Tile
(E1432.08) or the Cable Access Tile
Package (E1432.16).
L
Work Surfaces Introduction
Work Surfaces
Introduction
A variety of work surfaces to support paperwork, computer equipment, display, and
conferences includes wall-attached work surfaces and peninsulas, transaction
surfaces, and freestanding tables. Arrio freestanding work surfaces also blend with
Action Office Series 2 work surfaces, providing freestanding work surfaces used
independently or table desks used parallel or perpendicular to wall-attached work
surfaces.
Action Office Series 2 panels accept three styles of wall-attached work surfaces:
squared-edge, radiused-edge, and Flex-Edge™ work surfaces. All Series 2
rectangular and corner work surfaces are available with manual adjustability in 1"
increments.
The squared-edge work surfaces have the widest range of types and sizes to
accommodate the widest range of user needs. These work surfaces have a 1 1/4"thick squared edge and a 7/8" gap at the rear of the work surface that allows plugs
and cables to drop behind the work surface.
The radiused-edge work surfaces (available in fewer shapes and sizes) include
general-purpose rectangular and corner work surfaces. Radiused-edge work surfaces
are 1" thick and have a rounded vinyl edging on the front and sides and a 3/8" gap at
the back of the work surfaces.
Two Flex-Edge corner work surfaces accommodate computer use by providing a
resilient front edge and cutouts for monitor lifts and input platforms.
Both squared-edge and radiused-edge work surfaces can be attached to Action Office
Series 1 or Series 2 panels. Also, the squared-edge work surfaces with grommets
(designed originally for Series 3 panels) can be attached to Series 2 panels if their
undersides are field-modified to reposition the attachment hardware. Likewise, the
squared-edge work surfaces without grommets, designed for Series 2 panels, can be
attached to Action Office Series 3 panels. (They also require some field installation
modification to reposition the attachment hardware on the underside of the work
surfaces.)
Transaction surfaces provide a counter or display surface.
Action Office freestanding tables include a squared-edge and a radiused-edge
freestanding table, a radiused-edge printer support table, and a mobile table with a
radiused edge. The Arrio Freestanding Systems Furniture Planning Guide covers the
planning considerations for using Arrio work surfaces with Series 2 work surfaces.
L
Work Surfaces Introduction
Ergonomic Considerations for Work Surfaces
The variety of sizes, styles, and accessories makes Herman Miller systems work
surfaces very responsive to workers’ ergonomic needs. This system has rectangular,
corner, and peninsula work surfaces, so the user can form a work arena with a wide
expanse that supports concentration as well as interaction with others. The various
lengths and depths allow the work area to be tailored to the work process and to the
worker. The 24"-deep work surface, in particular, allows companies to meet ADA
guidelines for maximum forward reach for workers in wheelchairs. For workers with
reach impairments, the 24"-deep work surface is more accommodating than the
30"-deep one. In addition, wider work surfaces provide greater expanses of work area
without obstruction.
All Herman Miller hanging work surfaces are vertically adjustable, making it easier for
workers to change work positions easily and frequently during the day or to
accommodate multi-shift operations or shared workstations. This vertical adjustability
creates work environments that accommodate the preferences of workers of all
heights as well as the needs of workers with disabilities.
Specialized work surfaces that handle monitors and keyboards can be integrated right
into the work area, with an expanse of work surface to each side for reference
documentation. The flexible front edge option allows a choice of comfortable work
surface edges, especially where workers rest their hands or arms on the work surface
edge for long periods of time.
In addition, the choice of hanging work surfaces instead of freestanding work surfaces
allows unobstructed leg movement from one end of the work area to another. This is
not only a convenience for all workers, but also an important accommodation for
workers with limited mobility.
L
Work Surfaces Wall-Attached Work Surfaces
Wall-Attached Work
Surfaces
RECTANGULAR
WORK SURFACE
CORNER
WORK SURFACE
PENINSULA
WORK SURFACE
(SQUARED-EDGE
STYLE ONLY)
WORK SURFACE
WITH CUTOUT
Work Surface Types
Hanging work surfaces provide general-purpose surfaces for a variety of tasks. The
panels or walls on which they hang provide the load-bearing capability.
Rectangular and corner work surfaces are the most commonly used work surfaces for
general-purpose office work. They are often used adjacent to one another in an
expansive, effective work arena. They are available in squared-edge and radiusededge styles.
Peninsula work surfaces, which can be placed perpendicular to panels, walls, or other
work surfaces, form work surface extensions that can be used from both sides. They
provide primary work space as well as a conference area. They are available only in
the squared-edge style.
The work surface with cutout has a cutout at either the left or the right to give users
easier access to the work surface corner or to an adjacent Liaison work cabinet.
Several other Herman Miller systems work surfaces have specialized cutouts to hold
input platforms or monitor lifts.
Note: Even though squared-edge and radiused-edge work surfaces serve the same
functions and can fit on the same panels, using both types of work surfaces in the
same office is not recommended. Their appearance differs significantly.
L
Means of Adjustment
Hanging work surfaces eliminate the need for furniture legs (allowing uninhibited leg
movement) and can be adjusted vertically at 1" increments on the panel to allow work
to be done while seated or standing. They accept a full complement of storage
components—from pencil drawers to file drawers—hung from their underside. (Actual
clearances between supports should always be checked for each product before
planning for hanging or freestanding storage beneath the work surface.)
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
IN 1" INCREMENTS
HANGING WORK SURFACE
L
Retrofitting
It is possible to retrofit existing squared-edge work surfaces with grommets, designed
for Action Office Series 3 panels, to hang on Series 2 panels. This retrofitting is done
by repositioning the holes and moving the mounting brackets back on the underside
of the work surfaces. Redrilling will position the work surface at the same distance
from the panel as the work surfaces without grommets.
Redrilling is not required, however:
• if there are no corner work surfaces involved
• if there are no L-shaped configurations of rectangular work surfaces (a 90-degree
turn)
• if there is no concern about the distance between the work surface and the panel in
a straight panel/work surface run
This illustration shows the current and redrilled hole locations for a squared-edge
work surface with grommets (designed for use with Series 3 panels) to be hung in
position on an Action Office Series 2 panel.
New holes must be drilled on the underside of the work surface, positioned closer to
the rear of the work surface. All holes must be redrilled to be a nominal 7/16" behind
the existing holes. On the corner work surface, all holes must move back 7/16", but
the hole at the back corner must also drop back toward the corner of the work surface
by the appropriate distance.
Refer to the Action Office Series 3 Planning Guide for information about the squarededge work surfaces with grommets.
‡«•"
‡«•"
‡«¡§"
‡«¡§"
FOR CORNER WORK SURFACES,
REDRILL HOLES FOR CORNER
BRACKET AS SHOWN
FOR RECTANGULAR WORK SURFACES,
REDRILL ALL HOLES FOR SUPPORT ‡«¡§"
CLOSER TO REAR EDGE OF WORK SURFACE
Legend:
= Existing holes
‡«¡§"
L
= New location, 7/16" from
existing hole location
Squared-Edge Work Surfaces
OPTIONAL
PENCIL
DRAWER
L-SHAPED
SUPPORT
‡«•" GAP
FOR CORDS
AND PLUGS
8 ‡«•"-HEIGHT WITH SUPPORT
FOR 24"-DEEP WORK SURFACE;
11 ‹«¢"-HEIGHT WITH SUPPORT
FOR 30"-DEEP WORK SURFACE
16 ‹«•"-DEEP SUPPORT FOR
24"-DEEP WORK SURFACE;
22 fi«•"-DEEP SUPPORT FOR
All squared-edge work surfaces for Action Office Series 2 panels hang from L-shaped
supports on compatibly sized panels, combinations of panels, or wall strips. Overall
height of the work surfaces (with supports) is 8 7/8" on 24"-deep hanging work
surfaces, 11 3/4" on 30"-deep work surfaces.
Squared-edge work surfaces are available as rectangular or corner work surfaces or
as peninsulas. Peninsulas are available with a round end or a rectangular end.
L
Features
• Squared-edge hanging work surfaces are 1 1/4" thick.
• Squared-edge work surfaces have straight edges, finished either in the same wood
as the top or in a vinyl that is the same color as the laminate top. (A frostedlaminate top has a solid-color edge.)
• Squared-edge hanging work surfaces are available in 18", 21 1/2", 24", 27 1/2", 30",
33 1/2", 36", 39 1/2", 42", 45 1/2", 48", 51 1/2", 54", 57 1/2", 60", 63 1/2", 66",
69 1/2", 72", 75 1/2", 78", 81 1/2", 84", 87 1/2", 90", 93 1/2", and 96" widths.
• Squared-edge hanging work surfaces designed for Series 2 panels have a 7/8" gap
at the rear of the work surface that allows larger cables and plugs to drop behind
the work surface.
Because of their straight edge, squared-edge work surfaces are very versatile. For
example, squared-edge work surfaces fit tightly when used next to one another and
can be used at right angles to one another in a corner. A peninsula work surface can
hang off the front edge of a squared-edge rectangular work surface running
perpendicular to the peninsula. Squared-edge work surfaces can also accept a full
complement of hanging storage components beneath the surface.
Actual clearances between supports should always be checked for each product in
planning for hanging or freestanding storage beneath the work surface.
CABLE FITS IN ‡«•" GAP
BETWEEN WORK SURFACE
AND PANEL
NO GAP BETWEEN
ADJACENT WORK SURFACES
L
Squared-Edge Rectangular Work
Surface
A2310.
Description
This work surface hangs from a panel or
wall strips and has predrilled holes for
drawers and suspended pedestals. It is
available in two depths and 27 widths.
The work surface has a laminate top
and vinyl edge or a veneer top and
edge. Attachment hardware is included.
The 27 1/2"-, 33 1/2"-, 39 1/2"-, 45 1/2"-,
51 1/2"-, 57 1/2"-, 63 1/2"-, 69 1/2"-, and
75 1/2"-wide work surfaces hang from
panels connected by a spacer or the flat
side of a three-way 90° connector; the
extended length fills the space made by
the connector and provides a continuous
work surface. The 66"-, 69 1/2"-, 72"-,
and 75 1/2"-wide surfaces include one
additional center bracket; 78"-, 84"-, 90", and 96"-wide surfaces include two
additional center brackets.
‡«•" GAP
FOR
CORDS
24"-DEEP
WORK
SURFACE
1 ⁄«¢"
‡«•" GAP
FOR
CORDS
30"-DEEP
WORK
SURFACE
1 ⁄«¢"
8 ‡«•"
4 ‹«¢"
11 fi«•"
11 ‹«¢"
5 ‹«•"
17 ⁄«¢"
Dimensions
Available in 24" and 30" depths and18",
21 1/2", 24", 27 1/2", 30", 33 1/2", 36",
39 1/2", 42", 45 1/2", 48", 51 1/2", 54",
57 1/2", 60", 63 1/2", 66", 69 1/2", 72",
75 1/2", 78", 81 1/2", 84", 87 1/2", 90",
93 1/2", and 96" widths.
Overall height, with supports, is 8 7/8"
on the 24"-deep work surface and
11 3/4" on the 30"-deep work surface.
Rectangular work surfaces can be used
alone, at right angles to one another to
form a corner, or as extensions to corner
surfaces.
STRAIGHT FRONT EDGE
ALLOWS 2 SURFACES
AT RIGHT ANGLES TO
ABUT ONE ANOTHER
The work surface has a 7/8" gap at the
back of the surface to feed plugs,
cables, and wires between the work
surface and an Action Office
Series 1 or Series 2 panel. If the work
surface attachment hardware is
repositioned, the work surface can also
hang on a Series 3 panel.
L
All rectangular work surfaces include
standard support arms; larger sizes
have additional supports, which should
be located at the panel connection
closest to the center or equidistant from
one another.
Attachment hardware comes installed
on the underside of the work surface,
ready to accept support arms.
Each work surface includes a ganging
plate to properly align adjacent surfaces.
To provide additional support at the front
corner for particularly heavy equipment,
order a work surface bracket (usable
only if the width of the perpendicular
panel matches the work surface depth).
GANGING PLATE TO ALIGN
ADJACENT SURFACES
(INCLUDED)
24"-DEEP
WORK
SURFACE
24 "
REQUIRES
PANEL TO
MATCH WORK
SURFACE DEPTH
L
OPTIONAL
WORK SURFACE
BRACKET FOR
ADDITIONAL SUPPORT
Using freestanding files or pedestals
under a squared-edge rectangular work
surface requires attention to the following
clearance dimensions between support
arms. (The clearance is generally 3" less
than the work surface width.) For work
surfaces 66" to 96" wide, the clearance is
the distance between any additional
support arms or from the center support
arm to each end support arm. (That
clearance varies, depending on the
widths of the panels supporting the work
surface, but the clearance is
approximately 3" less per span.)
Surface
Width
Clearance
(Width Between
Support Arms)
18"
21 1/2"
24"
27 1/2"
30"
33 1/2"
36"
39 1/2"
42"
45 1/2"
48"
51 1/2"
54"
57 1/2"
60"
63 1/2"
66"
69 1/2"
72"
75 1/2"
78"
81 1/2"
84"
87 1/2"
90"
93 1/2"
96"
15"
15"
21"
21"
27"
27"
33"
33"
39"
39"
45"
48 1/2"
51"
51"
57"
60 1/2"
27"*
27"*
34 1/4"*
34 1/4"*
34 1/4"*
34 1/4"*
39 1/4"*
39 1/4"*
42"*
42"*
45"*
ADDITIONAL CENTER SUPPORT ARM
FOR WORK SURFACES 66", 69 ⁄«™",
72", AND 75 ⁄«™" WIDE
(2 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS FOR
WORK SURFACES 78" AND WIDER)
OPTIONAL WORK SURFACE BRACKETS
RECOMMENDED FOR FRONT-EDGE
SUPPORT OF WORK SURFACES 72"
AND WIDER OR FOR SUPPORT OF
HEAVY EQUIPMENT
CLEARANCE—DISTANCE
BETWEEN SUPPORT ARMS
(3" LESS THAN WORK
SURFACE WIDTH)
CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTER SUPPORT
ARM AND EACH OUTER BRACKET
(APPROXIMATELY 3" LESS PER SPAN)
SUPPORT(S) CAN BE LOCATED
AT INTERMEDIATE PANEL
CONNECTION(S) CLOSEST TO
CENTER OR EQUIDISTANT
FROM ONE ANOTHER
*Clearance varies due to the combination
of panels used. To determine clearances,
use the distance from the inner edge of
each outer support arm to the inside of
the mid-run work surface support, which
should be positioned at the panel
connection closest to the center of the
work surface. For work surfaces with
more than one mid-run support, the
additional clearance in the center is the
inside distance between the two mid-run
work surface supports.
L
Holes are predrilled on the left and right
sides for attaching suspended storage;
holes can also be field drilled to hang
drawers in any position.
Optional keyboard support products can
be mounted under most squared-edge
rectangular work surfaces.
• All adjustable keyboard trays and
keyboard holders will fit under all work
surface widths except 24".
• Extended-length-arm keyboard
support products specified with the
shorter 17 3/4" track can fit under 24"and 30"-deep work surfaces (although
the keyboard support product will not
be completely hidden under the 24"deep work surface when stored).
ADDITIONAL SUPPORT ARM(S)
ON WORK SURFACES 66"
AND WIDER
FILING WIDTH CLEARANCE
LIMITED TO WIDTH OF
CLEARANCE ON EACH SIDE OF
ADDITIONAL SUPPORT ARM(S)
The holes to mount keyboard support
products must be drilled on site.
Options
Order the optional Work Surface Bracket
(A2390.) separately.
Order optional storage products
separately:
• F-Front Pedestal, Suspended
(FAF12.)
• F-Front Pedestal, Support (FAF13.)
• H-Front Pedestal, Suspended
(FAH12.)
• H-Front Pedestal, Support (FAH13.)
• J-Front Pedestal, Suspended (FAJ12.)
• J-Front Pedestal, Support (FAJ13.)
• B-Front Pedestal, Suspended
(G5112.B.)
• B-Front Pedestal, Support (NP361.)
• C-Front Pedestal, Suspended
(G5112.C)
• E-Front Pedestal, Suspended
(G5112.E)
• Pencil Drawer (G5010.)
• Pencil Drawer, Metal (G5012.)
• A-Style Pencil Drawer (AO480.)
• Drawer with Lock (AO481.)
• A-Style Storage Unit with Lock
(AO483.)
L
Order optional machine support
• Keyboard Holder with Palm Rest,
Fully Adjustable (G7719.)
• Keyboard Platform, Extended DualSwivel, with Standard Tray (G7720.T)
• Keyboard Platform, Extended DualSwivel, with Clamp Tray (G7720.C)
• Keyboard Tray, Fully Adjustable
(G7715.)
• Keyboard Tray, Adjustable (G7716.)
• Mouse Tray, Keyboard Tray Attached,
Standard Tray (G7740.T)
Clamp Tray (G7740.C)
• Mouse Tray, Work Surface Attached
(G7741. or G7742.)
• A-Style Keyboard Drawer (AO479.)
• CPU Holder, Adjustable (G7810.)
• CPU Holder (NP280.)
Order optional work surface accessories
separately:
• Armature (G7510.)
• Document Stand (G7610.)
• Telephone Tray (G7630.)
Limitations
Work surfaces 24" wide cannot accept
adjustable and fully adjustable keyboard
support products.
While extended-length-arm keyboard
shorter 17 3/4"-long track can fit under
24"-deep work surfaces, they are not
hidden completely when stored.
L
Surface with Cutout
A2311. Left Cutout
A2312. Right Cutout
Description
This 36"-deep work surface hangs from
an Action Office Series 2 panel or wall
strips. It is supported by a return panel
or work surface end support panel. The
work surface has a cutout for easier
access to the work surface corner.
and edge or a veneer top and edge.
Dimensions
Depth is 36" at one end and 29 1/2" at
the other end.
The sculpted cutout allows the user to
take advantage of the 36" work surface
depth for computer or other uses while
allowing access to all areas of the work
surface or to the interior of an adjacent
perpendicular Liaison cabinet.
Choose the left- or right-handed cutout
to fit the preferences of the user or the
position of the work cabinet. The left
cutout places a work cabinet or another
work surface to the user’s left; the right
cutout places a cabinet or another work
surface to the user’s right. (With either
cutout position, the user can pull up to
the cutout area and work to the left or
right, or both.)
When the work surface hangs
perpendicular to a work cabinet,
extending the expanse of work surface
into the cabinet requires an adjoining
work surface shelf at the same height. A
30"-wide cabinet with work surface shelf
will allow the work surface to be
extended for its full depth; any other
width cabinet will produce a work
surface extension wider than the work
surface with cutout, forming an L shape
where the surfaces meet.
L
CUTOUT ALLOWS GREATER
ACCESS ACROSS DEEP WORK
SURFACE AND TO ADJACENT
WORK CABINET CORNER
36"
36"
29 1/2" DEEP AT END
ADJACENT TO CABINET
EXTENDS FULL WIDTH OF
CABINET WHEN USED WITH
30"-WIDE CABINET
FORMS “L”-SHAPED EXTENSION
WHEN WIDTH OF WORK
SURFACE SHELF AND DEPTH
OF WORK SURFACE WITH
CUTOUT DON'T MATCH
The 36"-deep end of the work surface is
always opposite a work cabinet and
must be supported by a return panel or
work surface support panel, ordered
separately. The narrower end is
supported by a work surface support,
which comes with the work surface.
Additional support for the front corner of
the 36"-deep end can be provided with
an optional work surface bracket,
ordered separately.
Because this work surface is normally
used with Liaison cabinets, which
provide workstation storage, this work
surface does not accept work surfaceattached storage.
Options
For support, order the Work Surface
Support Panel, End (A2380.), in the 30"
width, or the Work Surface Bracket
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
separately:
To extend the work surface into a
cabinet, order the Liaison Cabinet Work
Surface Shelf (B4920.) separately.
L
Limitations
This work surface cannot be used
perpendicular to work cabinets equipped
with two lateral file drawers or to 30"wide work surfaces with attaching
drawer or pedestal storage.
L
Surface with Cable Port
NP356.
Description
This work surface hangs from an Action
Office Series 1 or 2 panel or wall strips.
It has a black, 18" hinged cable port
centered at the rear of the work surface
for cable pass-through. The surface has
predrilled holes for a power center.
edge. The 72"-wide surface includes one
additional center bracket.
Dimensions
Widths are 30", 48", 60", and 72".
Depths are 24" and 30".
surfaces.
In addition to the cable port that is
centered toward the rear of the work
surface, the work surface also has a
7/8" gap along the back of the surface to
feed plugs, cables, and wires between
the work surface and an Action Office
Series 1 or Series 2 panel.
If the predrilled holes for the work
surface attachment hardware is
repositioned, the work surface can also
hang on a Series 3 panel.
All rectangular work surfaces include
standard support arms; the additional
support on the 72"-wide work surface is
to be located at the panel connection
closest to the center.
ready to accept support arms.
L
Each work surface includes a ganging
plate to properly align adjacent
surfaces.
To provide additional support at the
front corner for particularly heavy
equipment, order a work surface
bracket (usable only if the width of the
perpendicular panel matches the work
surface depth).
Using freestanding files or pedestals
under a squared-edge rectangular work
surface requires attention to the
following clearance dimensions
between support arms. (The clearance
is generally 3" less than the work
surface width.) For the 72"-wide work
surface, the clearance is the distance
between any additional support arms or
from the center support arm to each
end support arm. (That clearance
varies, depending on the widths of the
panels supporting the work surface, but
the clearance is approximately 3" less
per span.)
Surface
Width
Clearance
(Width Between
Support Arms)
30"
48"
60"
72"
27"
45"
57"
*
*Clearance varies due to the
combination of panels used. To
determine clearances, use the distance
from the inner edge of each outer
support arm to the inside of the mid-run
work surface support, which should be
positioned at the panel connection
closest to the center of the work
surface.
sides for attaching suspended storage;
L
be mounted under most squared-edge
keyboard holders will fit under all
widths except 24".
support products, when specified with
the shorter 17 3/4" track, can fit under
24"- and 30"-deep work surfaces
(although the keyboard support
product will not store completely
under the 24"-deep work surface).
Options
For high-density cable management on
the underside of the work surface, order
the optional Power Center (NP359.)
separately.
For electrical access on the underside of
the cable port, order the Cable Port
Outlet Strip (NP358.6) separately.
Limitations
24"-deep work surfaces, they do not
store completely.
L
Squared-Edge Corner Work Surface
A2332.
Description
This 90° corner work surface hangs
from panels or wall strips. It has a cable
access hole. Attachment hardware is
included.
edge.
Dimensions
Available in a 24" depth and 36", 42",
and 48" widths, or a 30" depth and 42"
and 48" widths.
Overall height with supports is 8 7/8" on
the 24"-deep work surface and 11 3/4"
on the 30"-deep work surface.
The corner work surface can be
extended on either side with squarededge rectangular work surfaces of the
same depth.
The corner work surface comes with one
wire access hole in the center and a 7/8"
gap between the panels and the rear
edges of the work surface, allowing
plugs, cables, and wires to feed from the
equipment to ports and receptacles
below work surface height. (When the
attachment hardware is repositioned,
this corner work surface can be hung on
Series 3 panels; because the gap
between the panel and the rear of the
work surface becomes smaller, however,
it can no longer be used to feed plugs,
cables, and wires.)
HOLE FOR
WIRE ACCESS
STANDARD WORK
SURFACE SUPPORT
CANTILEVERED
FROM PANELS (OR
WALL STRIPS)
‡«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
Corner work surfaces include support
arms and a corner work surface bracket
to provide support. Attachment
hardware comes installed on the
underside of the work surface, ready to
accept the support arms.
The corner support bracket can be
attached to either panel, situated next to
the perpendicular panel.
L
The following corner work surfaces are
predrilled to accommodate a pencil
drawer:
• 24"-deep, 42"-wide surface
1 ⁄«¢"
‡«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
8 ‡/• "
Optional keyboard support products and
pencil drawers can be mounted under
most squared-edge corner work
surfaces. (See “Limitations” for
exceptions.)
24"-DEEP CORNER
WORK SURFACE
Options
separately:
• Pencil Drawer, A-Style (AO480.)
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
1 ⁄«¢"
‡«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
11 ‹«¢"
30"-DEEP CORNER
WORK SURFACE
CORNER SUPPORT
BRACKET ATTACHES
TO EITHER PANEL
separately:
Limitations
Work surface-attached drawers and
drawer pedestals cannot be attached
beneath corner work surfaces.
EXTEND WITH
RECTANGULAR
WORK SURFACES
Pencil drawers and keyboard support
products cannot be attached to 24" x 36"
and 30" x 42" work surfaces.
L
When the fully adjustable keyboard tray
is used with a 36"-wide corner work
surface, vertical tray height adjustment
is limited unless the keyboard tray is
specified with the extended arm or the
extended arm with the short track.
L
Squared-Edge Corner Work Surface,
Curved
NP600.
Description
from panels or wall strips. It has a
laminate top and vinyl edge and a cable
access hole. Attachment hardware is
included.
Dimensions
and 48" widths.
The curved squared-edge corner work
surface can be extended on either side
with squared-edge rectangular work
surfaces of the same depth.
HOLE FOR
WIRE ACCESS
wire access hole in the center and a 7/8"
gap between the panels and the rear
edges of the work surface, allowing
plugs, cables, and wires to feed from the
equipment to ports and receptacles
below work surface height. (When the
attachment hardware is repositioned,
this corner work surface can be hung on
Series 3 panels; because the gap
between the panel and the rear of the
work surface becomes smaller, however,
it can no longer be used to feed plugs,
cables, and wires.)
STANDARD WORK
SURFACE SUPPORT
CANTILEVERED
FROM PANELS (OR
WALL STRIPS)
‡«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
L
Options
Order the CPU Holder, Adjustable
(G7810.), separately.
separately:
1 ⁄«¢"
‡«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
Limitations
Because of the curved front edge, work
surface-attached storage products and
machine support products cannot be
attached beneath this corner work
surface.
8 ‡/• "
24"-DEEP CORNER
WORK SURFACE
1 ⁄«¢"
‡«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
11 ‹«¢"
30"-DEEP CORNER
WORK SURFACE
CORNER SUPPORT
BRACKET ATTACHES
TO EITHER PANEL
EXTEND WITH
RECTANGULAR
WORK SURFACES
L
with Input Platform Cutout
A2336.
Description
panels or wall strips and abuts 24"-deep
squared-edge work surfaces. It has a
laminate top and vinyl edge, two cable
access holes, and a cutout for a useradjustable input platform. Attachment
hardware is included.
Dimensions
Available in 24" depth and 48" and 60"
widths.
This corner work surface accepts an
optional Flex-Edge input platform
(ordered separately) that provides
independent height adjustment for the
keyboard and the work surface itself.
The angled front allows the user to
extend the work area on one or both
sides of the computer.
MECHANISM FOR
TILT/HEIGHT ADJUSTABILITY
CUTOUT FOR
FLEX-EDGE
INPUT
PLATFORM
The mechanism that provides the tilt and
height adjustments for the input platform
is included with this corner work surface.
Options
Order the Flex-Edge Input Platform
(G7730.) separately.
separately:
CAN BE EXTENDED ON
BOTH SIDES BY 24"-DEEP
WORK SURFACES
Limitations
Storage products and keyboard support
products cannot be attached under this
work surface.
L
Flex-Edge Input Platform
G7730.
Description
This adjustable platform attaches to a
corner work surface with an input
platform cutout. The platform has a
laminate top. A flexible waterfall front
edge supports the user’s arms during
input and writing tasks, and flexible edges
at each side provide protection from
pinching between the platform and the
adjacent work surface when adjusting the
height. A curbed edge keeps items from
rolling off the back and side edges. The
height is adjusted with a release lever on
the underside of the platform. The
counterbalance mechanism permits the
user to raise or lower the platform from 4"
below the rear work surface to 11" above
it. The platform also tilts 9° forward and
15° backward. Attachment hardware is
included.
HOLES FOR
WIRE ACCESS
Dimensions
Width is 37 3/8".
Depth is 21".
INPUT
PLATFORM
Height is 1 5/8".
This input platform is used with a corner
work surface with input platform cutout.
This input platform can be raised,
lowered, and tilted independently of the
corner table desk, providing 15" of
height adjustment and 24° of tilt
adjustment. These adjustments allow for
both sit-down and stand-up working
positions and a wide range of hand and
body work positions.
The input platform is large enough to
accommodate a keyboard plus a mouse,
track ball, or digitizer pad.
11"
15Å
4"
9Å
MECHANISM OFFERS
TILT ADJUSTABILITY
MECHANISM OFFERS
HEIGHT ADJUSTABILITY
Cables and wires are routed off the input
platform through pockets in the platform
edge.
Limitations
Storage products, keyboard support
products, and accessories cannot be
attached to the platform.
L
with Cable Port
NP357.
Description
This 48"-wide 90° corner work surface
hangs from an Action Office Series 1 or
2 panel or wall strips. It has two cable
management access holes and a black,
18" hinged cable port centered on the
left side of the work surface for cable
pass-through. The surface has predrilled
holes for a power center. Attachment
edge.
Dimensions
Depth is 24" or 30".
HOLES FOR
WIRE ACCESS
Width is 48".
CANTILEVERED
FROM PANELS (OR
WALL STRIPS)
CABLE
PORT
extended on either side with squarededge rectangular work surfaces of the
same depth.
In addition to the cable port on the left
side, the corner work surface comes
with one wire access hole in the center
and a 7/8" gap between the panels and
the rear edges of the work surface,
allowing plugs, cables, and wires to feed
from the equipment to ports and
receptacles below work surface height.
(When the attachment hardware is
repositioned, this corner work surface
can be hung on Series 3 panels;
because the gap between the panel and
the rear of the work surface becomes
smaller, however, it can no longer be
used to feed plugs, cables, and wires.)
‡«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
accept support arms.
L
drawer:
most squared-edge corner work
exceptions.)
Options
For high-density cable management on
the underside of the work surface, order
the optional Power Center (NP359.)
separately.
For electrical access on the underside of
the cable port, order the Cable Port
Outlet Strip (NP358.6) separately.
separately:
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
L
separately:
Limitations
beneath corner work surfaces.
Pencil drawers and keyboard support
products cannot mount under the 24" x
36" and 30" x 42" work surfaces.
L
Squared-Edge Round-End Peninsula
A2350.
Description
This peninsula hangs from a panel, wall
strips, or another work surface and is
supported by 27 1/2"-high legs. It has
predrilled holes for a pencil drawer and
includes attachment hardware. Shipped
knocked down.
The peninsula has a laminate top and
vinyl edge or a veneer top and edge.
The 30"-deep peninsula fits an 18"- to
30"-wide panel; the 36"-deep peninsula
fits a 24"- to 36"-wide panel.
Dimensions
Available in 30" and 36" depths and 48",
Height is a nominal 29" to match
standard sit-down height of any
adjoining work surface.
ATTACHED TO WALL
FOR SUPPORT
ATTACHED TO PANEL
FOR SUPPORT
Leg depth is 17"; it is inset 15" from end
of peninsula.
The peninsula, positioned perpendicular
to a panel or wall or another work
surface, can function as a work space or
conference surface.
The 30"-deep peninsula can attach to an
18"-, 24"-, or 30"-wide panel. The 36"deep peninsula can attach to a 24"-,
30"-, or 36"-wide panel. The brackets
can accommodate a maximum 6" inset
on each end; see the accompanying
illustrations. (The same dimensions
apply when attaching a peninsula to wall
strips.)
The peninsula can also attach at any
point perpendicular to adjoining hanging
work surfaces. The peninsula fits flush
when attached perpendicular to
squared-edge hanging work surfaces,
so there is no 7/8" gap or grommet for
cords and plugs.
Glides provide an additional 1 1/2" of
leveling and alignment with adjacent
work surfaces.
L
30"-DEEP PENINSULA
ON 30"-WIDE PANEL
OR 36"-DEEP PENINSULA
ON 36"-WIDE PANEL
UP TO 6" INSET
ON EACH END
24"
36"
SUPPORT
BRACKETS
ATTACH HERE
30"
MAXIMUM 6"
INSET ON
ONE END
36"
SUPPORT
BRACKETS
ATTACH HERE
The underside of the work surface has
attachment hardware to accept the
support brackets. The hardware does
not interfere with a mid-run work surface
support panel.
When placing a peninsula perpendicular
to another work surface, allow enough
clearance to place a work chair between
the support leg and the return work
surface. A minimum of 27" is
recommended if the chair is to fit under
the peninsula, or less than 27" if the
chair is to be angled under the
peninsula and the perpendicular work
surface. When a round-end peninsula is
specified instead of a rectangular
peninsula, some clearance is lost due to
the inset support leg on the rounded
end. Although pencil drawers, drawer
pedestals, and keyboard support
products can be suspended under the
peninsula, this reduces the amount of
clearance (kneespace), inhibiting the
peninsula’s use as a conference area.
Options
separately:
(FAF12.)
(FAH12.)
(G5112.B)
(G5112.C)
(G5112.E)
(AO483.)
L
ATTACHED TO
CANTILEVERED
WORK SURFACE
FOR SUPPORT
ATTACHMENT DOES
NOT INTERFERE WITH
MID-RUN WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT PANEL
CAN BE ATTACHED AT
ANY POINT ALONG WORK
SURFACE FRONT EDGE
LESS PENINSULA CLEARANCE
NEEDED IF WORK CHAIR
STRADDLES PENINSULA AND
ADJACENT WORK SURFACE
27"
NEED MINIMUM 27" CLEARANCE
TO ACCOMMODATE WORK CHAIR
PULLED UP TO PENINSULA
SUPPORT LEG INSET
REDUCES CLEARANCE
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
Limitations
Because of the fixed height of the
attached support leg, the peninsula work
surface matches the height of adjoining
work surfaces only at the standard sitdown height (approximately 29" from the
floor).
Work surface support panels cannot be
used with the panel-attached peninsula.
Peninsula work surfaces cannot be used
as stabilizing returns. Improper use can
cause product failure and personal
injury.
L
Squared-Edge Rectangular Peninsula
A2352.
Description
knocked down.
The 30"-deep peninsula fits an 18"- to
30"-wide panel; the 36"-deep peninsula
fits a 24"- to 36"-wide panel.
Dimensions
conference surface.
The 30"-deep peninsula can attach to an
18"-, 24"-, or 30"-wide panel. The 36"deep peninsula can attach to a 24-",
30-", or 36"-wide panel. The brackets
can accommodate a maximum 6" inset
on each end. (The same dimensions
apply when attaching a peninsula to wall
strips.)
cords and plugs.
30"-DEEP PENINSULA
ON 30"-WIDE PANEL
OR 36"-DEEP PENINSULA
ON 36"-WIDE PANEL
UP TO 6" INSET
ON EACH END
L
24"
36"
SUPPORT
BRACKETS
ATTACH HERE
work surfaces.
support panel.
ATTACHED TO WALL
FOR SUPPORT
ATTACHED TO PANEL
FOR SUPPORT
30"
MAXIMUM 6"
INSET ON
ONE END
36"
SUPPORT
BRACKETS
ATTACH HERE
surface. Although pencil drawers, drawer
pedestals, and keyboard support
peninsula, this reduces significantly the
amount of clearance (kneespace),
inhibiting the peninsula’s use as a
conference area.
Options
separately:
(FAF12.)
(FAH12.)
(G5112.B)
(G5112.C)
(G5112.E)
(AO483.)
L
ATTACHMENT DOES
NOT INTERFERE WITH
SUPPORT PANEL
ATTACHED TO
CANTILEVERED
WORK SURFACE
FOR SUPPORT
CAN BE ATTACHED AT
SURFACE FRONT EDGE
27"
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
Limitations
floor).
injury.
L
Pass-Through Cover
A2399.
Description
This cover provides a continuous
surface for two back-to-back squarededge work surfaces hung on an open
panel frame. It is 48" wide but can be
field cut to fit a narrower opening.
Dimensions
Width is 48".
Depth is 4 3/8".
Height is 1 1/2", including positioning
prongs.
Using a pass-through cover creates a
continuous surface for face-to-face
conversations between adjacent offices
or for sharing resources or equipment
between offices.
This cover requires field cutting to fit
narrower openings.
L
FIELD CUT TO
WIDTH NEEDED
FILLS SPACE BETWEEN
WORK SURFACES ON
OPEN PANEL FRAME
Radiused-Edge Work Surfaces
L-SHAPED
SUPPORT
OPTIONAL
PENCIL
DRAWER
SEPARATE, ROUNDED
VINYL EDGING ALONG
FRONT AND SIDES
Radiused-edge work surfaces have a separate, rounded vinyl edging along the front
and side edges.
All radiused-edge work surfaces for Action Office Series 1 and Series 2 panels hang
from L-shaped supports on compatibly sized panels, combinations of panels, or wall
strips. Overall height of the work surfaces (with supports) is 8 7/8" on 24"-deep
hanging work surfaces, 11 3/4" on 30"-deep work surfaces.
Radiused-edge work surfaces are available in rectangular and corner shapes.
L
Features
• Radiused-edge hanging work surfaces are 1" thick.
• Radiused-edge work surfaces have rounded edges, finished in a separate strip of
vinyl that can be chosen to blend or contrast with the finish of the work surface top.
• Radiused-edge hanging work surfaces are available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 52",
60", 64", 72", and 76" widths.
• Radiused-edge work surfaces can accept a full complement of hanging storage
components beneath the surface.
Because of their rounded edge and rounded corners, radiused-edge work surfaces
are somewhat less versatile than squared-edge ones. Radiused-edge work surfaces
do not fit together as tightly as squared-edge work surfaces when positioned at right
angles to one another in a corner; the radiused edges and corners create small gaps
where the work surfaces meet. Because of their position in relation to the panel, these
work surfaces do not allow cables to drop behind the work surfaces. (To feed large
plugs and cables through the gap at the rear of a radiused work surface, it is
necessary to slide the work surface forward slightly from its support, feed the plug and
cord through, and then slip the work surface back in place. Panels constructed of
material with more “give”—like acoustical panels—are able to accommodate thicker
cables more easily.) In addition, peninsula work surfaces cannot hang off the front
edge of a radiused-edge rectangular work surface.
Actual clearances between supports should always be checked for each product in
planning for hanging or freestanding storage beneath the work surface.
WORK SURFACE MUST BE SLID
FORWARD TEMPORARILY TO
ALLOW LARGE PLUGS TO DROP
BEHIND WORK SURFACE
SMALL GAP WHERE
ADJACENT WORK
SURFACES MEET
L
Radiused-Edge Rectangular Work
Surface
AO417.
Description
This work surface hangs from a panel or
wall strips and has predrilled holes for
drawers and suspended pedestals.
The work surface has a laminate or
veneer top and vinyl edge. The 52"-,
64"-, or 76"-wide work surface hangs
from panels connected by a spacer or
the flat side of a three-way 90°
connector; the extended length fills the
space made by the connector and
provides a continuous work surface. The
72"- and 76"-wide surfaces include one
additional center bracket.
Dimensions
30", 36", 42", 48", 52", 60", 64", 72", and
76" widths; also available in 18" depth
and 48" width.
‹«•" GAP
FOR
CORDS
24"-DEEP
WORK
SURFACE
1 ⁄«¢"
‹«•" GAP
FOR
CORDS
30"-DEEP
WORK
SURFACE
1 ⁄«¢"
8 ‡«•"
4 ‹«¢"
11 fi«•"
11 ‹«¢"
5 ‹«•"
17 ⁄«¢"
surfaces. Because of the rounded edges
and corners, these work surfaces leave
a slight gap where adjacent work
surfaces meet.
When installed on Action Office Series 1
or Series 2 panels, radiused-edge work
surfaces have approximately a 3/8" gap
between the back of the work surface
and the panel.
SLIGHT GAP OCCURS AT
ROUNDED FRONT EDGES
WHEN 2 SURFACES ARE
USED AT RIGHT ANGLES
TO ONE ANOTHER
ready to accept a support arm.
The additional support on the 72"- and
the 76"-wide work surfaces is to be
located at the panel connection closest
to the center.
L
To provide additional support at the front
corner for particularly heavy equipment,
order a work surface bracket (usable
only when the width of the perpendicular
panel matches the work surface depth).
To place freestanding files or pedestals
under a radiused-edge rectangular work
surface, use the following clearance
dimensions between support arms. (For
work surfaces 72" and 76" wide, the
clearance is the distance from the center
support arm to each end support arm.
That clearance varies, depending on the
widths of the panels supporting the work
surface.)
Surface
Width
Clearance
(Width Between
Support Arms)
24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
52"
60"
64"
72"
76"
21"
27"
33"
39"
45"
49"
57"
61"
*
*
*Clearance varies due to the
combination of panels used. To
determine clearances, use the distance
from the inner edge of each outer
support arm to the inside of the mid-run
work surface support, which should be
positioned at the panel connection
closest to the center of the work surface.
sides for attaching suspended storage
(except the 18"-deep work surface);
ADDITIONAL CENTER SUPPORT ARM
FOR WORK SURFACES 72" AND 76" WIDE
OPTIONAL WORK SURFACE BRACKETS
RECOMMENDED FOR FRONT-EDGE
SUPPORT OF WORK SURFACES 72"
AND WIDER OR FOR SUPPORT OF
HEAVY EQUIPMENT
CLEARANCE—DISTANCE
BETWEEN SUPPORT ARMS
(3" LESS THAN WORK
SURFACE WIDTH)
CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTER SUPPORT
ARM AND EACH OUTER BRACKET
(APPROXIMATELY 3" LESS PER SPAN)
ADDITIONAL SUPPORT ARM
ON WORK SURFACES 72"
AND 76" WIDE
FILING WIDTH CLEARANCE
LIMITED TO WIDTH OF
CLEARANCE ON EACH SIDE OF
ADDITIONAL SUPPORT ARM
L
be attached under most radiused-edge
keyboard holders will fit under all work
surface widths except 24".
shorter 17 3/4" track can fit under 24"and 30"-deep work surfaces (although
the keyboard support product will not
be completely hidden under the 24"deep work surface when stored).
Options
separately:
(FAF12.)
(FAH12.)
(G5112.B)
(G5112.C)
(G5112.E)
(AO483.)
L
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
separately:
Limitations
Storage products cannot be attached
under the 18"-deep work surface.
Keyboard support products cannot be
attached under 24"-wide work surfaces
or the 18"-deep work surface.
24"-deep work surfaces, they are not
hidden completely when stored.
L
Radiused-Edge Corner Work Surface
AO421.
Description
from Action Office Series 1 or 2 panels
or wall strips. It has a cable access hole.
The work surface has a laminate or
veneer top and vinyl edge.
Dimensions
and 48" widths.
extended on either side with radiusededge rectangular work surfaces of the
same depth.
HOLE FOR
WIRE ACCESS
CANTILEVERED
FROM PANELS (OR
WALL STRIPS)
wire access hole in the center. When
installed on Action Office Series 1 or
Series 2 panels, radiused-edge work
surfaces have approximately a 3/8" gap
between the back of the work surface
and the panel.
Corner work surfaces included support
STANDARD WORK
SURFACE SUPPORT
‹«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
drawer:
L
most radiused-edge corner work
exceptions.)
Options
Order optional pencil drawers
separately:
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
1"
‹«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
8 ‡«•"
24"-DEEP CORNER
WORK SURFACE
1"
‹«•" GAP FOR
CORD DROP
11 ‹«¢"
30"-DEEP CORNER
WORK SURFACE
separately:
CORNER SUPPORT
BRACKET ATTACHES
TO EITHER PANEL
Limitations
under corner work surfaces.
Pencil drawers and the fully adjustable
keyboard tray with standard-length arm
cannot be attached under the 24"-deep,
36"-wide work surface.
L
EXTEND WITH
RECTANGULAR
WORK SURFACES
Radiused-Edge Corner Work Surface
with Input Platform Cutout
AO427.
Description
panels or wall strips and is used with
adjacent 24"-deep radiused-edge work
surfaces. It has a laminate top and vinyl
edge, two cable access holes, and a
cutout for a user-adjustable input
platform. Attachment hardware is
included.
Dimensions
Available in 24" depth and 48" and 60"
widths.
This corner work surface accepts an
optional Flex-Edge input platform that
provides independent height adjustment
for the keyboard and the work surface
itself. The angled front allows the user to
extend the work area on one or both
sides of the computer.
MECHANISM FOR
TILT/HEIGHT ADJUSTABILITY
CUTOUT FOR
FLEX-EDGE
INPUT
PLATFORM
The mechanism that provides the tilt and
height adjustments for the input platform
is included with this corner work surface.
Options
Order the Flex-Edge Input Platform
(G7730.) separately.
Order optional armature tools
separately:
Limitations
Storage products and keyboard support
products cannot be attached under this
work surface.
L
CAN BE EXTENDED ON
BOTH SIDES BY 24"-DEEP
WORK SURFACES
Radiused-Edge Round-End Peninsula
AO452.
Description
knocked down.
The 24"- or 30"-deep peninsula fits an
18"- to 30"-wide panel; the 36"-deep
peninsula fits a 24"- to 36"-wide panel.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", and 36" depths.
Available in 48", 60", and 72" widths.
ATTACHED TO WALL
FOR SUPPORT
ATTACHED TO PANEL
FOR SUPPORT
Leg width is 17"; it is inset 15" from end
of peninsula.
conference surface.
The 24"- or 30"-deep peninsula can
attach to an 18"-, 24"-, or 30"-wide
panel. The 36"-deep peninsula can
attach to a 24"-, 30"-, or 36"-wide panel.
The brackets can accommodate a
maximum 6" inset on each end. (The
same dimensions apply when attaching
a peninsula to wall strips.)
cords and plugs. (There is a slight gap,
however, if placed perpendicular to the
front of a radiused-edge work surface.)
L
DEPTH OF
PENINSULA MATCHES
WIDTH OF PANEL
UP TO 6" INSET
ON EACH END
24"
36"
SUPPORT
BRACKETS
ATTACH HERE
30"
MAXIMUM 6"
INSET ON
ONE END
36"
SUPPORT
BRACKETS
ATTACH HERE
work surfaces.
support panel.
surface. With the round-end peninsula,
some clearance is lost due to the inset
support leg on the rounded end.
Although pencil drawers, drawer
pedestals, and machine support
peninsula, this reduces the amount of
clearance (kneespace), inhibiting the
peninsula’s use as a conference area.
Options
separately:
(FAF12.)
(FAH12.)
(G5112.B)
(G5112.C)
(G5112.E)
(AO483.)
L
ATTACHED TO
CANTILEVERED
WORK SURFACE
FOR SUPPORT
ATTACHMENT DOES
NOT INTERFERE WITH
SUPPORT PANEL
CAN BE ATTACHED AT
SURFACE FRONT EDGE
(FITS FLUSH IF
PERPENDICULAR TO
SQUARED-EDGE WORK
SURFACE; SLIGHT GAP IF
PERPENDICULAR TO
RADIUSED-EDGE WORK
SURFACE)
27"
CREATES SLIGHT
GAP DUE TO
RADIUSED EDGE
SUPPORT LEG INSET
REDUCES CLEARANCE
(G7715.)
(G7741. or G7742.)
Limitations
floor).
injury.
L
Flex-Edge™ Work Surfaces
COMPATIBLE WITH
SQUARED-EDGE AND
RADIUSED-EDGE
WORK SURFACES
RESILIENT
(FLEX-EDGE)
EDGING ON
FRONT EDGE
Flex-Edge work surfaces include various types of corner work surfaces, each with an
integrally molded, soft, resilient front-edge surface. The resilient edge reduces
pressure on the user’s wrists and carpal tunnel area during task-intensive work. It
deflects slightly when forearm pressure is applied, providing support for proper keying
positions.
The Flex-Edge front is found on a corner work surface, a corner work surface with a
cutout for a monitor lift, and a work surface support attachment.
These Flex-Edge work surfaces—and the monitor lifts that go with them—support
users’ ergonomic needs associated with heavy computer use.
L
Flex-Edge Corner Work Surface
A2430. No Cutout
A2440. Monitor Lift Cutout
Description
This work surface hangs from panels or
wall strips and abuts squared-edge work
surfaces. It has a laminate top and a
flexible waterfall front edge to support
the user’s arms during input and writing
tasks. The work surface has flexible side
edges and a curbed edge to keep items
from rolling off the back. Attachment
The work surface with monitor lift cutout
has an additional curbed edge to keep
items from rolling into the cutout.
Dimensions
Available in a 24" depth and 48" and 60"
widths, or in a 30" depth and 48" width.
L
The concave-shaped input surface
allows the user to pull in closer to the
center of the work surface. Using this
work surface between two rectangular
work surfaces creates a wide expanse
for reference documents. The flexible
front edge makes this an appropriate
choice for users who spend most of their
time at the computer.
The 24"-deep edges are designed to
abut 24"-deep work surfaces, and the
30"-deep edges are designed to abut
30"-deep work surfaces.
When used with a monitor lift, the work
surface allows independent height
adjustment of the monitor.
Options
Order the Monitor Lift (G7752., G7753.,
G7756., or G7757.) separately for the
corner work surface with the monitor lift
cutout.
USED ONLY NEXT
TO SQUARED-EDGE
WORK SURFACE
FLEX-EDGE CORNER
WORK SURFACE
RESILIENT
FRONT EDGE
PROTRUDES
OPTIONAL
MONITOR LIFT
CUTOUT
Limitations
Storage products, machine support
products, and work surface accessories
cannot be attached to this work surface.
ABUTS SQUARED-EDGE
WORK SURFACE
EXTENDED ON SIDES WITH
RECTANGULAR WORK SURFACES
L
Flex-Edge Corner Work Surface
AO440. No Cutout
AO442. Monitor Lift Cutout
Description
This work surface hangs from panels or
wall strips and abuts radiused-edge
work surfaces. It has a laminate top and
a flexible waterfall front edge to support
the user’s arms during input and writing
tasks. The work surface has flexible side
edges and a curbed edge to keep items
from rolling off the back. Attachment
The work surface with monitor lift cutout
has an additional curbed edge to keep
items from rolling into the cutout.
Dimensions
Available in a 24" depth and 48" and 60"
widths, or in a 30" depth and 48" width.
L
USED ONLY NEXT
TO RADIUSED-EDGE
WORK SURFACE
The concave-shaped input surface
allows the user to pull in closer to the
center of the work surface. Using this
work surface between two rectangular
work surfaces creates a wide expanse
for reference documents. The flexible
front edge makes this an appropriate
choice for users who spend most of their
time at the computer.
The 24"-deep edges are designed to
abut 24"-deep work surfaces, and the
30"-deep edges are designed to abut
30"-deep work surfaces.
When used with a monitor lift, the work
surface allows independent height
adjustment of the monitor.
Options
Order the Monitor Lift (G7752., G7753.,
G7756., or G7757.) separately for the
corner work surface with the monitor lift
cutout.
FLEX-EDGE CORNER
WORK SURFACE
RESILIENT
FRONT EDGE
PROTRUDES
OPTIONAL
MONITOR LIFT
CUTOUT
Limitations
Storage products, machine support
products, and work surface accessories
cannot be attached to this work surface.
ABUTS RADIUSED-EDGE
WORK SURFACE
EXTENDED ON SIDES WITH
RECTANGULAR WORK SURFACES
L
Monitor Lift
G7752. Single Arm, No Slide
G7753. Single Arm, Slide
G7756. Double Arm, No Slide
G7757. Double Arm, Slide
Description
This monitor lift attaches to a Flex-Edge
corner work surface with monitor lift
cutout. The counterbalance mechanism
permits the user to raise or lower
equipment from 4" below the work
surface to 12" above it. The assembly is
black and includes a lift, equipment
platform, and mounting pan. Attachment
The single-arm monitor lift permits the
user to raise or lower up to 50 pounds of
equipment. The double-arm monitor lift
permits the user to raise or lower up to
100 pounds of equipment. Any
equipment placed on the lift must fall
within the specified weight range and
cannot exceed the size of the monitor lift
cutout. The monitor lift with slide
provides 2" of forward adjustment and 3"
of backward adjustment.
SINGLE ARM
Dimensions
Width is 16".
Depth is 20" (22" with slide attachment).
Equipment placed on the lift must fall
within the specified weight range and
not exceed the size of the monitor lift
cutout. The maximum load of 100
pounds for the monitor lift
accommodates most computer monitors.
The double-arm lift should be specified
whenever it is likely the current smaller
equipment load will exceed 50 pounds in
the future.
DOUBLE ARM
For up to 2" of forward adjustment and
3" of backward adjustment, specify the
monitor lift with slide.
L
Supports and Hardware
Each Action Office Series 2 work surface includes the necessary hanging or attaching
hardware (including extra support arms for work surfaces 72" and wider). In addition,
there is a work surface bracket to increase support at the front of a work surface.
End work surface support panels and support pedestals can be placed beneath work
surfaces to provide support to them, enabling a longer uninterrupted run. Because
end support panels and support pedestals can eliminate some panels used as
returns, they open up the work area while providing support to both the work surface
and the panel run. (See “Determining Proper Support” for specific support
considerations for work surface support panels and pedestals.)
ATTACHING
HARDWARE
SUPPORT PANELS
OR PEDESTALS
WORK SURFACE
BRACKET
L
Work Surface Bracket
A2390.
Description
This bracket attaches to the front corner
of a hanging work surface to provide
additional support. It can be used only
when the return panel width matches
the work surface depth. This bracket
cannot be used with a Flex-Edge work
surface. Package contains four.
Dimensions
Height is 2 3/4".
DEPTH OF WORK SURFACE
MUST MATCH WIDTH OF
RETURN PANEL
Depth is 2 1/2".
W
This bracket is designed to provide
additional support when a work surface
will carry a particularly heavy load or a
load that is unevenly spread across the
surface. (The bracket does not, however,
change the overall load limit of the work
surface.)
D
To use this bracket, the work surface
depth must match the width of the return
panel.
Select the right-position bracket for the
right side of the work surface and the
left-position bracket for the left side of
the work surface (when facing the work
surface).
ILLUSTRATION SHOWS
LEFT-HAND POSITION
PROVIDES ADDITIONAL
SUPPORT AT FRONT CORNER
OF HANGING RECTANGULAR
WORK SURFACE
Brackets are always recommended—
regardless of load—when hanging work
surfaces on 80"- or 85"-high panels. See
the “Determining Proper Support”
section for more information.
L
Work Surface Support Panel, End
A2380.
Description
This panel attaches to both a squarededge work surface and a panel at the
end of a panel run to provide support
and to eliminate the need for a return
panel and panel connector. It has 1"
adjustable glides. The panel attaches
under a work surface at the left or right
end of a panel. Attachment hardware is
included.
The panel has a laminate or veneer
surface.
Dimensions
Available in 24" and 30" depths.
REPLACES RETURN PANEL
AND CORNER CONNECTOR
AT END OF PANEL RUN
Height is 27 1/8".
ATTACHES TO
SQUARED-EDGE
WORK SURFACE
This end work surface support panel
is used only with squared-edge work
surfaces.
The support panel depth must
correspond to the work surface depth: a
24"-deep panel to support a 24"-deep
work surface or a 30"-deep panel to
support a 30"-deep work surface. A 30"deep support panel is required for the
36"-deep end of a Liaison work surface
with cutout.
ATTACHES TO
BOTH WORK
SURFACE AND
PANEL
GLIDE COMPENSATES
FOR SLIGHTLY
UNEVEN FLOORS
Work surface support panels 24" deep
can be used in the middle of a run to
support 30"-deep work surfaces if the
work surfaces are ganged.
The support panel is nonhanded prior to
installation. Once installed, it becomes
right- or left-handed, but it can be
changed back by switching the bracket
and plugs around to the open side.
WRONG!
MUST USE SUPPORT PANEL
IN DEPTH TO MATCH
(EXCEPT WITH 36"-DEEP
LIAISON WORK SURFACE)
WORK SURFACES
MUST BE GANGED
WORK SURFACE
BRACKET
CAN BE USED AS MID-RUN
STABILIZER—BUT DOES NOT ALLOW
ACCESS TO CABLE MANAGEMENT BASE
L
Limitations
The work surface end support panel
provides support for a squared-edge
work surface at only the 29" height.
A work surface support panel can be
used at only one end of a panel run.
(The other end requires a return panel.)
Maximum panel height is 67" (Series 2)
or 62" (Series 1) for a panel run using a
work surface support panel as a return 62" OR 67"
on one end. (The exception is 80"- or
85"-high panels, Series 1 or Series 2,
respectively, which are acceptable if
they hold no hanging components other
than work surfaces.)
MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 62" OR 67"
80" AND 85"
FOR PANELS IN PANEL RUN
Suspended lateral files cannot be used
on the same panel run as the work
surface support panel.
A run supported by a work surface
support panel on one end has a
maximum length of 8' with acoustical
panels, 10' with hard-surfaced, fabriccovered, and tackable acoustical-barrier
panels. An end work surface support
panel can be used as a mid-run
stabilizer to increase the length of run
between return panels. See “Length of
Wall Run and Frequency of Support”
under “Determining Proper Support” in
the “Walls” section.
MAXIMUM LOAD PER PANEL
(FLIPPER DOOR UNIT, TACKBOARD,
AND WORK SURFACE)
ANY
PANEL TYPE
80" AND 85"-HIGH PANELS
ACCEPTABLE IF THERE
ARE NO LOAD-BEARING
COMPONENTS OTHER
THAN WORK SURFACES
16'
RETURN
PANEL
RETURN
PANEL
GANGED
MAXIMUM RUN OF 16'—RETURN PANELS
REQUIRED AT EACH END; NO COMPONENTS
OTHER THAN WORK SURFACES (GANGED) ALLOWED
WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT PANEL
(USED IN MIDDLE OF RUN)
WRONG!
WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANEL CANNOT BE USED
ALONG SAME PANEL RUN AS PANEL-HUNG LATERAL FILES
L
Work Surface Support Panel
AO432.
Description
This panel attaches to both a radiusededge rectangular work surface and an
Action Office Series 1 or Series 2 panel
to provide support and to eliminate the
need for a return panel and panel
connector. It attaches under a work
surface at the left or right end of a panel
and provides support at a panel run end.
The panel has a laminate surface and 1"
adjustable glides. Attachment hardware
is included.
Dimensions
Available in 24" and 30" depths.
Height is 27 3/8".
This work surface support panel is used
only with radiused-edge work surfaces.
The support panel depth must
correspond to the work surface depth: a
24"-deep panel to support a 24"-deep
work surface or a 30"-deep panel to
support a 30"-deep work surface.
Although this work surface support
panel is used with radiused-edge work
surfaces, which cannot be ganged to
adjacent work surfaces for support, it
can be used as a mid-run stabilizer if
attachment holes are drilled in the field.
REPLACES RETURN PANEL,
CORNER CONNECTOR, AND
SUPPORT ARM AT END OF
PANEL RUN
ATTACHES TO
RADIUSED-EDGE
WORK SURFACE
ATTACHES TO
BOTH WORK
SURFACE AND
PANEL
GLIDE COMPENSATES FOR
SLIGHTLY UNEVEN FLOORS
WRONG!
MUST USE SUPPORT PANEL
IN DEPTH TO MATCH
The support panel is nonhanded prior to
installation. Once installed, it becomes
right- or left-handed, but it can be
changed back by switching the bracket
and plugs around to the open side.
L
Limitations
The work surface support panel
provides support for a radiused-edge
work surface at only the 29" height.
A work surface support panel can be
used at only one end of a panel run.
(The other end requires a return panel.)
Maximum panel height is 67" (Series 2)
or 62" (Series 1) for a panel run using a
work surface support panel as a return
on one end. (The exception is 80"- or
85"-high panels, Series 1 or Series 2,
respectively, which are acceptable if
they hold no hanging components other
than work surfaces.)
Suspended lateral files cannot be used
on the same panel run as the work
surface support panel.
A run supported by a work surface
support panel on one end has a
maximum length of 8' with acoustical
panels or 10' with hard-surfaced, fabriccovered, and tackable acoustical-barrier
panels. See “Length of Wall Run and
Frequency of Support” under
“Determining Proper Support” in the
“Walls” section.
L
80" AND 85"
62" OR 67"
MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 62" OR 67"
FOR PANELS IN PANEL RUN
MAXIMUM LOAD PER PANEL
(FLIPPER DOOR UNIT, TACKBOARD,
AND WORK SURFACE)
80"- AND 85"-HIGH PANELS
ACCEPTABLE IF THERE
ARE NO LOAD-BEARING
COMPONENTS OTHER
THAN WORK SURFACES
Work Surfaces Transaction Surfaces
Transaction Surfaces
Transaction surfaces, which attach to the tops of panels, add aesthetic and functional
value in areas with frequent interaction or display.
All Action Office squared-edge transaction surfaces specifically designed for use with
Series 2 panels are 14 3/8" deep and 1" thick. When placed on top of a panel, these
transaction surfaces have a 6 1/4" overhang on each side of the panel. Like the work
surfaces, these transaction surfaces have a squared edge that is the same color as
the top surface.
Squared-edge transaction surfaces for Action Office Series 2 panels are available in
three shapes:
• Double round end
• Round/rectangular end
• Rectangular end
Radiused-edge transaction surfaces are 14" deep and 1 1/8" thick. When placed on
top of a Series 2 panel, these transaction surfaces have a nominal 6 3/8" overhang on
each side of the panel. Like the work surfaces, these transaction surfaces have a
radiused edge of vinyl that can blend or contrast with the finish of the transaction
surface top.
Radiused-edge transaction surfaces, developed originally for use with Action Office
Series 1 panels, are available only with rectangular ends.
All transaction surfaces use standard supports (ordered separately), located where
the transaction surface is to attach to the panel. Transaction surfaces also accept
optional task lights that can be attached to the underside of the transaction surface at
any point except at a panel center support.
6 ⁄«¢" OVERHANG
AT EACH SIDE
14 ‹«•"
TRANSACTION
SURFACE
TASK LIGHT
SQUARED-EDGE
TRANSACTION SURFACE
L
6 ‹«•" OVERHANG
AT EACH SIDE
14"
TRANSACTION
SURFACE
TASK LIGHT
RADIUSED-EDGE
TRANSACTION SURFACE
Squared-Edge Transaction Surfaces
The “Squared-Edge Transaction Surface/Support Panel Relationships” chart is a quick
reference to the transaction surface width required to fit on top of various-sized
supporting panels or panel runs; the chart is organized by transaction surface type
and applies only to squared-edge transaction surfaces. The chart assumes that all
adjacent panels are of equal or lower height so that finished ends on adjacent higher
panels do not interfere with the squared-edge transaction surface. However, a
squared-edge transaction surface can fit next to an adjacent, higher panel if the
adjacent panel on the opposite end of the transaction surface is of equal or lower
height.
ADJACENT TALLER PANELS
INTERFERE WITH ANY EXTENDING
SQUARED-EDGE TRANSACTION SURFACE ENDS
To determine the appropriate width of each shape of squared-edge transaction
surface, add to the width of the panel or panel run all dimensions gained from an
extending edge of the transaction surface (4") and dimension-adding panel hardware
used to finish an end of a panel or panel run (approximately 3"). Straight-line panel
connectors add no dimension.
For example, this drawing for the double-round-end, squared-edge transaction surface
illustrates the following:
48"
+ 8"
+ 6"
= 62"
Panel width
Two extending squared-edge
transaction surface edges
Panel hardware
(other than straight-line
panel connectors)
on two ends
(approximate width)
Squared-edge transaction
surface width required
L
4"
3"
62"
48"
PANEL
4"
3"
DOUBLE-ROUND-END
TRANSACTION SURFACE
DIMENSION-GAINING
PANEL HARDWARE
ADDS 3" AT
EACH END
Squared-Edge Transaction Surface/Support Panel Relationships
Transaction Surface
Type
Transaction Surface
Width
Width of Supporting
Panel or Run
Double Round
End
62"
74"
86"
48"
60"
72"
Round/Rectangular
End
31"
37"
43"
49"
55"
67"
79"
24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
60"
72"
Rectangular
End
24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
60"
72"
24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
60"
72"
Radiused-Edge Transaction Surfaces
Radiused-edge transaction surfaces have no extending edges; nor do the change-ofheight finished ends protrude beyond the panel edge. Therefore, their size can be
matched to the width of the supporting panel or panel run, and they can be used
adjacent to higher panels without interference.
L
Squared-Edge Transaction Surface,
Double Round End
A2810.
Description
This 14"-deep surface attaches to the
top of an Action Office Series 1 or 2
panel to provide a counter or display
surface. Round ends extend 4" past the
panel. The surface is predrilled for a
transaction surface task light.
The surface has a laminate top and vinyl
edge or a veneer top and edge.
Dimensions
Depth is 14 3/8".
62"
4"
3"
Height is 1".
4"
3"
48"
PANEL
DIMENSION-GAINING
PANEL HARDWARE
ADDS 3" AT
EACH END
Select the transaction surface width
according to the panel or panel run width:
Transaction
Surface
Width
Panel or
Panel Run
Width
62"
74"
86"
48"
60"
72"
Each round end extends 4" beyond the
end of the supporting panel. Dimensiongaining panel hardware accounts for
approximately another 3" on each end.
The chart above and the illustrations,
which show the width of the panel(s)
required to accommodate each size
transaction surface, account for the
round-end extensions and the
dimension-gaining hardware.
Squared-edge transaction surfaces have
a 6 1/4" overhang on each side of the
panel.
An optional task light, ordered
separately, can be attached to either
side under the transaction surface at
any point except at a panel center
support.
L
74"
4"
4"
3"
3"
48"
PANEL
12"
PANEL
STRAIGHT-LINE PANEL
CONNECTOR ADDS
NO DIMENSION
86"
4"
4"
3"
3"
24"
PANEL
48"
PANEL
STRAIGHT-LINE PANEL
CONNECTOR ADDS
NO DIMENSION
Because the support brackets for
transaction surfaces are relatively short,
they do not interfere with hanging
components (for example, a tackboard
in the space between the transaction
surface and the work surface).
Options
Order support hardware separately:
• Finished End with Transaction Surface
End Support (A1250.T)
• Transaction Surface Support, Center
(AO460.)
• Transaction Surface Support, Mid-End
(AO463.)
DOUBLE ROUND ENDS INTERFERE
WHEN ADJACENT PANELS ARE HIGHER
Order the optional Task Light,
Transaction Surface (G6220.),
separately.
Limitations
Higher panels cannot be used adjacent
to round-end transaction surfaces,
because the extended round ends
interfere with the adjacent panels.
L
Round/Rectangular End
A2820.
Description
surface. The round end extends 4" past
the panel; the rectangular end is flush
with the panel. The surface is predrilled
for a transaction surface task light.
Dimensions
Available in 31", 37", 43", 49", 55", 67",
and 79" widths.
31"
4"
4"
3"
3"
30"
PANEL
24"
PANEL
Depth is 14 3/8".
37"
Height is 1".
Select the transaction surface width
according to the panel or panel run width:
Transaction
Surface
Width
Panel or
Panel Run
Width
31"
37"
43"
49"
55"
67"
79"
24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
60"
72"
The round end of the surface extends 4"
beyond the end of the supporting panel.
Dimension-gaining panel hardware
accounts for approximately another 3".
The chart above and the illustrations,
which show the width of the panel(s)
required to accommodate each size
transaction surface, account for the
round-end extension and the dimensiongaining hardware on the round end.
DIMENSION-GAINING PANEL
HARDWARE ADDS 3" AT
OVERHANGING EDGE
4"
3"
43"
24"
PANEL
4"
3"
12"
PANEL
STRAIGHT-LINE PANEL
CONNECTOR ADDS NO
DIMENSION
49"
30"
PANEL
12"
PANEL
panel.
L
An optional task light, ordered separately,
can be attached to either side under the
transaction surface at any point except at
a panel center support.
55"
4"
3"
When installing the rectangular end of
the transaction surface next to a higher
adjacent panel, a separate change-ofheight support bracket must be ordered.
DIMENSION-GAINING
HARDWARE ADDS 3" AT
OVERHANGING EDGE
Limitations
The extended round end of this
transaction surface cannot be used
adjacent to a higher panel. If the
rectangular end can be tightly abutted to
the finished end of the higher panel,
however, the transaction surface can be
accommodated by allowing for a longer
extension on the round end.
67"
4"
Options
(AO460.)
(AO463.)
• Transaction Surface Support, Change
of Height (AO464.)
Order the optional Task Light, Transaction
Surface (G6220.), separately.
48"
PANEL
3"
48"
PANEL
79"
4"
3"
30"
PANEL
WORKS WITH HIGHER PANEL AS
LONG AS HIGHER PANEL IS
ADJACENT TO RECTANGULAR END
L
12"
PANEL
42"
PANEL
ADJACENT HIGHER PANEL
INTERFERES WITH ROUND END
CANNOT BE USED WITH
ADJACENT HIGHER PANEL
ON EXTENDED ROUND END
Rectangular End
A2830.
Description
surface. Ends are flush with the panel.
The surface is predrilled for a
transaction surface task light.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 60",
and 72" widths.
Depth is 14 3/8".
Height is 1".
Select the transaction surface width to
match the width of the panel or panel run.
24"
30"
24"
PANEL
30"
PANEL
Transaction surface rectangular ends
are flush with the ends of the support
panels or panel runs and therefore can
be placed on top of panels or panel runs
the same width as the transaction
surface. (See illustrations.)
panel.
support. The exception is the 24"-wide
transaction surface, which cannot
accept any task light.
NO ADDED DIMENSION
FROM PANEL HARDWARE
36"
42"
36"
PANEL
42"
PANEL
L
When installing this transaction surface
next to a higher panel, a separate
change-of-height support bracket must
be ordered for the end that is adjacent to
the higher panel.
48"
48"
PANEL
Options
(AO460.)
(AO463.)
of Height (AO464.)
separately.
NO ADDED DIMENSION
FROM PANEL HARDWARE
60"
30"
PANEL
Limitations
This transaction cannot be used
between two higher panels. A higher
panel can be used adjacent to one end
of the transaction surface, as long as the
adjacent panel on the opposite end of
the transaction surface is of equal or
lower height.
A transaction surface task light cannot
be mounted under a 24"-wide
transaction surface.
30"
PANEL
72"
24"
PANEL
24"
PANEL
24"
PANEL
FINISHED ENDS OF ADJACENT
HIGHER PANELS INTERFERE WITH
RECTANGULAR END TRANSACTION SURFACE
NO INTERFERENCE WHEN RECTANGULAR END
TRANSACTION SURFACE IS USED ADJACENT
TO HIGHER PANEL ON 1 END
L
CANNOT BE USED WITH ADJACENT
HIGHER PANELS ON BOTH ENDS
Right Angle
NP281.
Description
top of two 24"-wide Action Office Series
1 or 2 panels joined with a two-way 90°
connector. It provides a right-angle
counter or display surface. Attachment
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 60",
and 72" widths.
Depth is 14 3/8".
Height is 1".
match the width of the panel or panel
run on each side of a 90° corner. (Both
sides of the transaction surface must be
the same width.)
ADJACENT PANEL
ON OPPOSITE END
MUST BE OF EQUAL
OR LOWER HEIGHT
Transaction surface rectangular ends
are flush with the ends of the support
panels or panel runs and therefore can
be placed on top of panels or panel runs
the same width as that of the transaction
surface. (See illustrations.)
panel.
separately, can be attached under either
side of the transaction surface at any
point except at a panel center support.
The exception is the 24"-wide
HIGHER
ADJACENT
PANEL ON
1 END ONLY
SUPPORT BRACKET ON END
ADJACENT TO HIGHER PANEL
L
When installing this transaction surface
be ordered for the end that is adjacent to
the higher panel.
Options
(AO460.)
(AO463.)
of Height (AO464.)
separately.
Limitations
This transaction surface panel cannot be
used between two higher panels. A
higher panel can be used adjacent to
one end of the transaction surface, as
long as the adjacent panel on the
opposite end of the transaction surface
is of equal or lower height.
be mounted under a 24"-wide
transaction surface.
L
Radiused-Edge Transaction Surface
AO450.
Description
surface. Ends are flush with the panel.
The surface has a laminate or veneer
top and vinyl edge.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 60",
and 72" widths.
Depth is 14".
Height is 1 1/8".
match the width of the panel or panel run.
Transaction surface ends are flush with
the ends of the support panels or panel
runs and therefore can be placed on top
of panels or panel runs the same width
as the transaction surface and be used
adjacent to higher panels on one or both
sides without interference. (See
illustrations.)
Radiused-edge transaction surfaces
have a nominal 6 3/8" overhang on each
side of the panel.
support. The exception is the 24"-wide
24"
30"
24"
PANEL
30"
PANEL
NO ADDED DIMENSION
FROM PANEL HARDWARE
36"
42"
36"
PANEL
42"
PANEL
L
When installing the transaction surface
be ordered for each end that is adjacent
to a higher panel.
48"
48"
PANEL
Options
(AO460.)
(AO463.)
of Height (AO464.)
separately.
NO ADDED DIMENSION
FROM PANEL HARDWARE
60"
30"
PANEL
30"
PANEL
Limitations
be mounted under 24"-wide transaction
surface.
72"
24"
PANEL
24"
PANEL
24"
PANEL
NO INTERFERENCE WHEN RADIUSED-EDGE
TRANSACTION SURFACE IS USED ADJACENT
TO HIGHER PANEL ON ONE OR BOTH ENDS
L
Supports for Transaction Surfaces
2 ADJACENT
TRANSACTION
SURFACES
SUPPORT USED AT
JUNCTURE OF 2
TRANSACTION SURFACES
AND 2 PANELS
SUPPORT USED AT JUNCTURE
OF TRANSACTION SURFACE
AND ADJACENT HIGHER PANEL
The support hardware required for a transaction surface (radiused-edge or squarededge) is ordered separately from the product. There are at least two pairs of supports
required for each transaction surface—one pair for each end.
Some common transaction surface/panel combinations and uses of support hardware
are shown here:
•
•
•
•
a support used at the end of both the panel and the transaction surface
a support used at the end of a transaction surface at a 90° corner in the panel run
a support used at the juncture of two adjacent transaction surfaces and two panels
a support used at the juncture of a transaction surface and a higher adjacent panel
Because the support brackets for the transaction surfaces are relatively short, they do
not interfere with other typical hanging components. For example, it is possible to
place a tackboard in the space between the transaction surface and the work surface.
L
Transaction Surface Support
AO460. Center
AO461. End
AO463. Mid-End
Description
This bracket supports transaction
surfaces.
The center bracket supports two
transaction surfaces placed above
Action Office Series 1 or 2 panels in a
straight-line arrangement. The end
bracket supports the end of a
transaction surface placed above the
last Series 1 panel in a run; it must be
used with a hingeable finished end and
cannot be used with a two-, three-, or
four-way 90° connector; spacer; or
Series 2 panel. The mid-end bracket
supports the end of a transaction
surface placed above a two-, three-, or
four-way 90° connector or draw rod; it
can be used with Series 1 or 2 panels.
SINGLE
TRANSACTION
SURFACE
2 ADJACENT
TRANSACTION
SURFACES
Dimensions
Center bracket is 10 1/8" wide and
1 3/4" high.
End bracket is 10 1/8" wide and 2 1/2"
high.
Mid-end bracket is 10 1/8" wide and
1 3/4" high.
CENTER BRACKET
SUPPORT—USE AT
JUNCTURE OF 2
TRANSACTION SURFACES
AND 2 PANELS
CENTER BRACKET
SUPPORT—USE AT
JUNCTURE OF 2 PANELS
The center bracket is used at the
juncture of two transaction surfaces and
two panels in a straight line or a single
transaction surface spanning the
juncture of two panels.
The end bracket is used only with an
Action Office Series 1 panel and always
at the end of a panel run.
The mid-end bracket supports the open
ends of a transaction surface that is
above a 90° connector and is neither
adjacent to another transaction surface
nor over an end cap (i.e., never at the
end of a panel or a straight-line panel
run).
L
END SUPPORT
BRACKET—USE AT END OF
SERIES 1 PANEL RUN AND
TRANSACTION SURFACE
(CANNOT BE USED WITH
2-, 3-, OR 4-WAY
CONNECTOR OR SPACER
OR SERIES 2 PANEL)
MID-END BRACKET
SUPPORT—USE AT END OF
TRANSACTION SURFACE
AT 90Å CORNER
Options
When the end transaction surface
support is used, order the Finished End,
Hingeable (AO258.), separately.
Limitations
A center bracket precludes the
attachment of a transaction surface task
light at that point; the task light must be
attached elsewhere along the underside
of the transaction surface.
L
TRANSACTION SURFACE LIGHT
ATTACHES TO UNDERSIDE OF
TRANSACTION SURFACE AT ANY POINT
WITHIN PANEL WIDTH...EXCEPT AT
CENTER SUPPORT
Transaction Surface Support, Change
of Height
AO464.
Description
This bracket supports the end of a
transaction surface placed next to a
higher Action Office Series 1 or 2 panel.
Dimensions
Change-of-height bracket is 10 1/8" wide
and 1 3/4" high.
The change-of-height bracket can be
used on one or both sides of a
transaction surface, depending on how
many sides are adjacent to higher
panels. The exposed edge of each
higher panel requires a change-ofheight finished end.
Options
For each change-of-height support
bracket, order a Finished End, Change
of Height, Panel/Panel (AO251.),
separately.
L
CHANGE-OF-HEIGHT
BRACKET SUPPORT—
USE AT JUNCTURE OF
TRANSACTION SURFACE
AND ADJACENT HIGHER
PANEL
Work Surfaces Freestanding Work Surfaces
Freestanding
Work Surfaces
SQUARED-EDGE TABLE
RADIUSED-EDGE PRINTER
SUPPORT TABLE
RADIUSED-EDGE TABLE
RADIUSED-EDGE MOBILE TABLE
Action Office freestanding tables provide ancillary work surfaces to accommodate
general-purpose tasks, isolated surfaces for using electronic equipment, and surfaces
for locating mobile equipment conveniently. They include a squared-edge and
radiused-edge rectangular work table, a radiused-edge printer support table, and a
radiused-edge mobile table.
For additional freestanding work surfaces, see the Arrio freestanding systems
furniture planning information.
L
Squared-Edge Table
A4110. 25 1/2" High
A4111. 29" High
Description
This table has a modesty panel and
adjustable glides. It is predrilled for a
pencil drawer. Shipped knocked down.
The table has a laminate top and vinyl
Dimensions
The 25 1/2"-high version is available in
these sizes:
• 24" deep by 36" wide
The 29"-high version is available in
these sizes:
The table has adjustable glides that
provide 1/2" of height adjustment.
Because the spanner bar connecting the
table legs is inset from the back of the
table, all tables have a limited drawer
depth clearance: 14 1/2" on the 24"deep table and 17 3/4" on the 30"-deep
table.
Because of the table legs, all tables
have a limited width clearance: 30 3/4"
on the 36"-wide table, 42 3/4" on the
48"-wide table, 54 3/4" on the 60"-wide
table, and 66 3/4" on the 72"-wide table.
30"
24"
14 ⁄«™"
DRAWER DEPTH
CLEARANCE (24"-DEEP
FREESTANDING TABLE)
17 ‹«¢"
DRAWER DEPTH
CLEARANCE (30"-DEEP
FREESTANDING TABLE)
The limited depth and width clearance
on narrower tables restricts the storage
and machine support options that can
be attached to the underside of this
table. (See “Limitations.”)
L
Options
Order optional drawers (for 30"-deep
tables only) separately:
• Drawer with Lock, 5 1/2" High
(AO481.)
(AO482.)
(AO483.)
products for the 30"-deep table
separately:
Fully Adjustable (G7719.)—with shorttrack option
• Keyboard Platform, Extended DualSwivel (G7720.)—with short-track
option
(G7715.)—with standard-length arm
or extended-length arm with shorttrack option
• Mouse Tray, Keyboard Tray Attached
(G7740.)
(G7741. and G7742.)—with shorttrack option
separately:
Limitations
Except for some optional pencil drawers,
individual box drawers, and the twodrawer storage unit, suspended storage
pedestals cannot be attached under a
30"-deep table. No storage components
can be attached under a 24"-deep table.
L
Radiused-Edge Table
AO710. 25 1/2" High
AO712. 29" High
Description
This table has a modesty panel, two
cable access holes, and adjustable
glides. It is predrilled for drawers.
Shipped knocked down.
The table has a laminate or veneer top
and vinyl edge.
Dimensions
The 25 1/2"-high version is available in
these sizes:
The 29"-high version is available in
these sizes:
The table has adjustable glides that
provide 1/2" of height adjustment.
Because the spanner bar connecting the
table legs is inset from the back of the
table, all tables have a limited drawer
depth clearance: 14 1/2" on the 24"deep table and 17 3/4" on the 30"-deep
table.
Because of the table legs, all tables
have a limited width clearance: 30 3/4"
on the 36"-wide table, 42 3/4" on the
48"-wide table, 54 3/4" on the 60"-wide
table, and 66 3/4" on the 72"-wide table.
30"
24"
14 ⁄«™"
DRAWER DEPTH
CLEARANCE (24"-DEEP
FREESTANDING TABLE)
17 ‹«¢"
DRAWER DEPTH
CLEARANCE (30"-DEEP
FREESTANDING TABLE)
The limited depth clearance and limited
width clearance on narrower tables
restrict the storage and keyboard
support options that can be attached to
the underside of this table. (See
“Limitations.”)
L
Options
Order optional drawers (for 30"-deep
tables only) separately:
(AO481.)
(AO482.)
(AO483.)
products for the 30"-deep table
separately:
Fully Adjustable (G7719.)—with shorttrack option
• Keyboard Platform, Extended DualSwivel (G7720.)—with short-track
option
(G7715.)—with standard-length arm
or extended-length arm with shorttrack option
• Mouse Tray, Keyboard Tray Attached
(G7740.)
(G7741. or G7742.)—with short-track
option
separately:
Limitations
Except for some optional pencil drawers,
individual box drawers, and the twodrawer storage unit, suspended storage
pedestals cannot be attached under the
30"-deep table. No storage components
can be attached under a 24"-deep table.
L
Radiused-Edge Printer Support Table
AO713.
Description
This 24"-deep, 30"-wide mobile table
holds a printer. It has a laminate top and
vinyl edge, a paper feed slot, a cable
access hole, two paper feed/collection
drawers, and black casters. Shipped
knocked down.
Dimensions
Height is 29".
Depth is 24".
Width is 30 1/2".
The slot to feed printer paper will
accommodate paper of any standard
dimension. The slot measures 11" wide
by 3" deep.
The paper collection drawer extends
7 1/8" beyond the edge of the table. In
planning for either the placement or the
storage of this table, allow for the
additional clearance.
SLOT FOR FEEDING
STANDARD-SIZE
PRINTER PAPER
FOR PAPER
COLLECTION
The table’s 29" height makes it
compatible with hanging work surfaces
at standard sit-down height.
L
Radiused-Edge Mobile Table
AO714.
Description
This 20"-deep, 20"-wide table has black
casters. Shipped knocked down.
The table has a laminate or veneer top
and vinyl edge.
Dimensions
Height is 25 1/2".
Depth is 20".
Width is 20".
The table’s 25 1/2" height makes it
compatible with hanging work surfaces
at machine height. The height is also
ergonomically sound for working with
computers, typewriters, and other
electronic office equipment.
A mobile table can help accommodate
workers with reach and turning
limitations.
L
Storage Introduction
Storage
Introduction
The Action Office Series 2 system offers a variety of storage components—wallattached, work surface-attached, and freestanding—to meet user needs for long-term,
intermediate, and active storage. Most of the storage products come in modular
dimensions compatible with Action Office Series 2 panels. In addition, Liaison work
cabinets can be used with the Series 2 system to provide not only storage, but also
structural support and energy distribution and access. (See the separate Liaison
cabinet system planning information for details about planning with Liaison work
cabinets.)
Wall-attached storage is available in three styles: The A-style components have
rounded corners on the front facings; the B-style components have rolled front edges
on the front facings; and the E-style storage has straight edges. All three styles can be
ordered for Action Office panels as well as Ethospace frames; however, they are not
interchangeable.
Work surface-attached and freestanding products are also available in a variety of
styles: A- and G-Series work surface-attached pedestals, with a choice of three
different fronts for each series; and freestanding pedestals and lateral files with a
choice of three fronts on the A-Series and two fronts on the G-Series.
This wide range of styles, fronts, and drawer pull options for storage components is
shared by Herman Miller Action Office and Ethospace systems, as well as a number
of its furniture lines. Thus, users can achieve a facility-wide compatibility, yet retain the
freedom to select the Herman Miller product line that meets the needs of a particular
area or group of users.
L
Storage Introduction
Ergonomic Considerations for Wall-Attached and
Work Surface-Attached Storage
Herman Miller components meet workers’ needs for storage that is easy to reach and
conveniently placed for efficient work flow. Because the slots on the panels are in 1"
increments, wall-hung storage can be placed at exactly the height needed for easy
reach. In addition, Herman Miller offers storage with open fronts for complete
accessibility or enclosed storage with easily opened fronts and easy-to-grasp
hardware, especially helpful for workers with limited hand dexterity. Storage can also
be moved from one panel to another to accommodate changes in work flow or work
habits.
Suspended storage can be placed to the left or right of a work area to accommodate
worker preferences or needs, as can freestanding storage. Where access is required
for a wheelchair, suspended storage can be eliminated altogether to decrease the
obstacles to moving around in the workstation.
L
Storage Wall-Attached Storage
Wall-Attached Storage
ROUNDED
CORNERS
A-STYLE
WALL-ATTACHED STORAGE
ROLLED EDGES
B-STYLE
STRAIGHT EDGES
E-STYLE
Wall-attached storage components include enclosed flipper door units, lateral files,
and open and display shelves. Additional storage items include a coat bar and shelf, a
coat hook, and a number of work organizers and dividers.
Most wall-attached storage components are available in 24", 30", 36", and 48" widths;
60"-wide A- and B-style shelves and flipper door units—as well as 42"-wide B- and
E-style storage components—are also available. The widths of the storage
components are compatible with corresponding-width panels or combinations of
adjacent panels whose total width matches that of the storage component. For
example, a 48"-wide component can be attached to either a 48"-wide panel or two
adjacent 24"-wide panels. All components attach to the front of the panels and are
adjustable vertically in 1" increments.
For limitations on the number of components that can be attached to a wall run, see
“Determining Proper Support.”
L
Storage Component Styles
Wall-attached storage components are available in three styles: A-style, B-style, and
E-style. The three styles can be ordered for both Action Office and Ethospace
systems; however, they are not interchangeable.
While the E-style components were originally designed specifically for the Ethospace
system, a special attachment bracket allows E-style storage units originally purchased
to hang on Ethospace frames (and shipped after February 28, 1994) to mount on
Action Office panels. Likewise, a similar bracket allows A- and B-style components for
Action Office panels (shipped after February 28,1994) to be mounted on Ethospace
frames.
Keying and Lock Options
Wall-attached components can be keyed alike with other lockable components; this
means that one key can be used to lock and unlock a group of components, whether
wall attached, work surface attached, or freestanding. Keyed-alike components are
shipped with lock cylinders installed and with lock plugs shipped separately and
tagged for product and location as specified.
When the keyed-alike option is not specified, all lock cylinders and plugs are shipped
installed and randomly numbered.
L
Filing Capacity Provided by Wall-Attached Lateral Files
This chart shows total filing inches for wall-attached lateral files. Side-to-side
dimensions apply to letter- and A4-size documents. Inside height clearance is
11 1/4".
24" WIDE
30" WIDE
36" WIDE
42" WIDE
48" WIDE
SIDE-TO-SIDE FILING
LETTER AND A4-SIZE DOCUMENTS
39"
33"
27"
21"
45"
12 ⁄«¢"
FRONT-TO BACK FILING
LETTER-SIZE DOCUMENTS
6"
8"
5"
12 ⁄«¢"
TOTAL
CAPACITY = 20 ⁄«¢"
(1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED)
TOTAL
CAPACITY = 24 ⁄«™"
(1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED)
TOTAL
(2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED)
TOTAL CAPACITY = 36 ‹«¢"
(2 CONVERTERS REQUIRED)
FRONT-TO-BACK FILING
A4-SIZE DOCUMENTS (IN 24CM FOLDERS)
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
7"
5"
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
11"
TOTAL CAPACITY = 41 ‹«¢"
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
2 ‹«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
TOTAL
A4-SIZE
LETTER-SIZE
CAPACITY = 7"
(1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED)
TOTAL
(1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED)
TOTAL
A4-SIZE
LETTER-SIZE
CAPACITY = 5"
(2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED)
TOTAL CAPACITY = 35 ⁄«™"
A4-SIZE CAPACITY = 24 ⁄«™"
LETTER-SIZE CAPACITY = 11"
A4-SIZE CAPACITY = 36 ‹«¢"
LETTER-SIZE CAPACITY = 2 ‹«¢"
LEGAL-SIZE FILING
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
4 ‹«¢"
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
10 ‹«¢"
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
LETTER-SIZE FOR
REMAINDER
5"
12 ⁄«™"
12 ⁄«¢"
TOTAL
CAPACITY = 17"
LEGAL-SIZE
LETTER-SIZE
CAPACITY = 4 ‹«¢"
(1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED)
L
TOTAL
CAPACITY = 23"
LEGAL-SIZE
LETTER-SIZE
CAPACITY = 10 ‹«¢"
(1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED)
TOTAL
(1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED)
LEGAL-SIZE
LETTER-SIZE CAPACITY = 5"
TOTAL CAPACITY = 37"
LEGAL-SIZE CAPACITY = 24 ⁄«™"
LETTER-SIZE CAPACITY = 12 ⁄«™"
A-Style Storage
A-style storage components, originally designed for the Action Office Series 1 system,
have rounded corners on the front facings of doors and drawers. They can be ordered
for Action Office and Ethospace systems.
L
A-Style Suspended Lateral File
AO510. Laminate Front
AO511. Veneer Front
Description
This lockable file hangs from a panel,
a frame, or wall strips to hold letter-,
legal-, or A4-size hanging files.
The file has a laminate or veneer front.
Dimensions
widths.
Height is 12 1/2".
Depth is 15 1/2".
To convert from side-to-side filing to
multiple rows of front-to-back hanging
files requires a separate converter for
suspended lateral files.
HUNG FROM PANEL
OR FRAME
CAN BE USED
SINGLY…
The drawer opens to 29 3/4" in the fully
extended position.
…OR STACKED
When mounting one lateral file above
another, a 2" clearance between the
files is required.
The A-style suspended lateral file
requires a separate attachment bracket
to hang on an Ethospace frame or wall
strips.
Options
Order the File Converter, Suspended
Lateral File (G5925.), separately.
HUNG ON
WALL STRIPS
2" CLEARANCE REQUIRED
WHEN MOUNTING
1 LATERAL FILE ABOVE
ANOTHER
Order the Attachment Bracket, B-Style
Components (E3930.), separately to
convert this lateral file to hang on an
Ethospace frame or Ethospace wall
strips.
L
File Converter, Suspended Lateral
File
G5925.
Description
This bracket converts an A-, B-, or Estyle suspended lateral file drawer to
hold front-to-back hanging files. Finish is
black umber. Package contains four.
Dimensions
Depth is 12 3/8".
Height is 1 7/8".
One size fits all Action Office and
Ethospace suspended lateral file
drawers (A, B, and E styles in all sizes).
ALLOWS
L
File Drawer Organizer
B4961.
Description
This two-sectioned organizer fits into
any file drawer arranged for letter-size
filing. The removable top section stores
computer disks and other small items.
The bottom section stores larger items
or can be divided into three
compartments; it includes two vertical
dividers. Finish is black umber.
Dimensions
Width is 6".
Height of outer tray is 9"; height of inner
tray is 3", or 3 5/8" with the handle.
Overall height of two pieces nested is
9 5/8".
Outside depth of outer tray is 12 3/4";
inside depth is 11 3/8". Outside depth of
inner tray is 13"; inside depth is
11 1/16".
The inner and outer trays can be used
separately or together; with its handle,
the inner tray serves as a tote for small
desk items.
Files can be hung front to back from the
sides of the tray.
L
A-Style Flipper Door Unit
AO560. Fabric
Description
This storage unit hangs from a panel, a
frame, or wall strips and combines a
flipper door and a shelf to enclose
binders, files, and other items. It has a
fabric front. The underside of the shelf
accepts a task light. Attachment
hardware is included. Shipped knocked
down.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 48", and 60"
widths.
Available in nominal depths of 13" and
16"; actual depths are 12 1/2" and
15 1/2".
Height is 15 1/2".
When mounting one flipper door unit
above another, a 2" clearance is
required between them to allow the
doors to open.
To provide completely enclosed storage
when a flipper door unit hangs on an
open panel frame or on a glazed panel,
a flipper door back panel is required. For
most other applications, however, the
panel surface behind the flipper door
unit provides adequate enclosure.
2"
WHEN MOUNTING 1 FLIPPER DOOR
ABOVE ANOTHER
If reach and access concerns are most
important, order a shelf instead of this
covered unit. Where a flipper door has
already been installed, it is possible to
remove the flipper door top and front
closure and use it elsewhere.
A separate add-on shelf can provide
additional shelf space for a 24"- or 48"wide flipper door unit, in the 16" depth
only.
The 60"-wide flipper door unit requires a
60"-wide task light. Narrower flipper door
units can accept a task light the same
width as or shorter than the flipper door
unit.
L
UNIT INCLUDES DOOR AND
SHELF WITH END PANELS
The A-style flipper door unit requires a
separate attachment bracket to hang on
an Ethospace frame or Ethospace wall
strips.
Options
Order these optional storage
accessories separately:
• Flipper Door Back Panel (A3390.)
• Add-On Shelf (AO521.)—for 16"-deep
flipper door unit only
• Shelf Divider, Angled (G7330.)
• Shelf Divider, Rectangular (NP374.)
• Shelf Organizer (AO530.)
• Paper Organizer (AO533.)
Order optional lighting components
separately:
• Task Light, Basic (G6130.)
• Task Light, Standard (G6150.)
• Task Light, Energy Efficient (G6120.)
• Lumisoft Task Light (G6140.)
• Pavo Portable Task Light (G6420.)
convert this flipper door unit to hang on
strips.
L
A-Style Flipper Door
AO550. Fabric
Description
This flipper door attaches to a 15 1/2"high shelf to provide top and front
closure. It has a fabric front and includes
attachment hardware. Shipped knocked
down.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 48", and 60"
widths.
15 1/2".
Nominal height is 15 1/2"; actual height
is 15 3/8".
The flipper door requires attachment to
a separate A-style, 15 1/2"-high shelf.
When mounting one shelf with flipper
door above another, a 2" clearance is
doors to open.
a flipper door back panel is required. For
most other applications, however, the
panel surface behind the flipper door
unit provides adequate enclosure.
Options
Order the optional Flipper Door Back
Panel (A3390.) separately.
2"
ABOVE ANOTHER
DOOR FLIPS DOWN
FOR COVERED STORAGE—
STORES ON TOP
Limitations
The 15 1/2" depth is not available in the
36" width.
MOUNTS ATOP
15 ⁄«™"-HIGH SHELF
L
A-Style Flipper Door Security Kit
AO571.
Description
This kit attaches to a shelf to enclose
the locking mechanism on an A-style
flipper door for added security.
Dimensions
Height is 3 1/4".
Width is 2 1/4".
Depth is 1".
This kit does not interfere with mounting
a task light beneath the flipper door unit
or affect the 2" clearance required when
one flipper door unit is mounted above
another.
No additional key is required; the
existing flipper door lock goes into the
security kit.
L
Flipper Door Back Panel
A3390.
Description
This panel attaches to the back of an Aor B-style flipper door unit or a flipper
door with shelf to enclose the back.
Dimensions
Available in nominal 24", 30", 36", 42",
and 48" widths to fit most flipper door
units.
Actual height is 13 7/8".
The back panel provides visual
enclosure when flipper door units or
shelves with flipper doors are hung on
open panel frames and glazed panels.
The back panel can be used with a
15 1/2"-high, A- or B-style shelf with an
A- or B-style flipper door attached or
with an A- or B-style flipper door unit.
BACK PANEL CONCEALS STORED
MATERIALS WHEN FLIPPER DOOR
UNIT HANGS ON GLAZED PANEL
OR OPEN PANEL FRAME
Limitations
There is no corresponding-size back
panel for the 60"-wide shelf, flipper door,
and flipper door unit.
L
A-Style Shelf
AO520. 15 1/2" High
AO523. 7 1/2" High
Description
This shelf hangs from a panel, a frame,
or wall strips. The underside of the shelf
down.
The 7 1/2"-high shelf is for storage or
display; the 15 1/2"-high shelf stores
binders and books.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 48", and 60"
widths.
16". Actual depths of the shelves are 12"
and 14 7/8". Actual depths of shelf end
panels are 12 1/2" and 15 1/2".
The effective usable storage depth of
the shelf is 1/2" to 1" greater, since the
shelf stops short of the panel or frame,
wall, or back panel.
Available in 15 1/2" and 7 1/2" heights.
For visible filing of EDP-size paper or for
extra depth, order the 16"-deep, 15 1/2"high unit.
For enclosed storage (on the 15 1/2"high shelf only), use the A-style flipper
door for top and front enclosure and the
A-style flipper door back panel for back
enclosure on open panel frames and
glazed panels.
ADD FLIPPER DOOR AND BACK PANEL
FOR ENCLOSED STORAGE (15 ⁄«™"-HIGH
SHELF ONLY)
DEPTH OF SHELF ONLY—12"
FOR 13"-DEEP SHELF OR
14 ‡«•" FOR 16"-DEEP SHELF
EFFECTIVE USABLE
STORAGE DEPTH ⁄«™" TO 1"
ADDITIONAL; SHELF STOPS
SHORT AT BACK
additional shelf space for a 24"- or 48"wide shelf (15 1/2"-high, 16"-deep
version only).
The 60"-wide shelf requires a 60"-wide
task light. Narrower shelves can accept
a task light the same width as or shorter
than the shelf.
The A-style shelf requires a separate
attachment bracket to hang on an
strips.
L
CAN BE HUNG ON PANELS
OR FRAMES…
…OR ON WALLS WITH
WALL STRIPS
Options
• A-Style Flipper Door (AO550.)
shelf only
separately:
7⁄«™"-HIGH SHELF
STORAGE DEPTH 12"
convert this shelf to hang on an
strips.
Limitations
There is no 36" width in the 16"-deep
shelf.
The 16"-deep shelf is not available in a
7 1/2" height.
L
CAN BE HUNG ON PANELS
OR FRAMES…
…OR ON WALLS
WITH WALL STRIPS
Add-On Shelf
AO521.
Description
This shelf fits into a 15 1/2"-deep A-style
shelf or 16"-deep B-style shelf to add a
second shelf.
Dimensions
Height is 1".
Depth is 14 7/8".
Use the add-on shelf with the 24"- or
48"-wide, 16"-deep shelf.
The add-on shelf provides the same
storage depth as the unit’s original shelf.
Limitations
The add-on shelf is not available to fit
30"-, 36"-, 42"-, or 60"-wide shelves.
The add-on shelf cannot be used with
any 7 1/2"-high shelves or 15 1/2"-high,
13"-deep shelves.
L
FOR ADDITIONAL
SHELF STORAGE
A-Style Storage/Display Shelf
AO522.
Description
This 13"-deep shelf hangs from a panel,
a frame, or wall strips in a flat position
for storage or in a slanted position for
display. The underside of the shelf
down.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 48", and 60"
widths.
Height is 7 1/2".
Depth of shelf end panel is 12 1/2".
Nominal depth of shelf is 13"; actual
depth is 12 1/2".
The shelf position can be switched
between storage and display on site.
Task light attachment for a shelf used in
the slanted position requires a separate
display shelf adapter.
than the shelf.
SHELF IN
SLANTED
POSITION
SHELF IN
HORIZONTAL
POSITION
Dividing the interior for a shelf in the flat
position requires a separate shelf
divider.
The A-style shelf requires a separate
strips.
Options
Order the optional Shelf Divider, Angled
(G7330.), or the Shelf Divider,
Rectangular (NP374.), separately.
L
separately:
• Display Shelf Adapter, Task Light
(G6191.)
strips.
Limitations
The shelf can be divided only when the
shelf is in the flat position.
L
B-Style Storage
B-style storage components, originally designed for the Action Office Series 2 system,
have rolled edges on the front facings of doors and drawers. They can be ordered for
Action Office and Ethospace systems.
L
B-Style Suspended Lateral File
A3121. Laminate Front
A3122. Veneer Front
Description
This 16"-deep lockable file hangs from a
panel, a frame, or wall strips to hold
letter-, legal-, or A4-size hanging files.
The file has a laminate or veneer front.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", and 48"
widths.
Height is 13 1/2".
Depth is 15 7/8".
HUNG FROM PANEL
OR FRAME
extended position.
files is required.
The B-style suspended lateral file
to hang on an Ethospace frame or wall
strips.
Options
CAN BE USED
SINGLY…
…OR STACKED
HUNG ON
WALL STRIPS
WHEN MOUNTING
ANOTHER
strips.
L
B-Style Flipper Door Unit
A3350. Veneer Door
A3352. Fabric Door
A3353. Painted Door
Description
This storage unit hangs from a panel, a
frame, or wall strips and combines a
flipper door and a 13"- or 16"-deep shelf
to enclose binders, files, and other
items. The underside of the shelf
down.
The flipper door unit has a painted,
fabric-covered, or veneer front.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and
60" widths.
15 3/4".
is 15 3/8".
doors to open.
2"
ABOVE ANOTHER
a flipper door back panel (ordered
separately) is required. For most other
applications, however, the panel surface
behind the flipper door unit provides
adequate enclosure.
covered unit. Where a flipper door unit
has already been installed, it is possible
to remove the flipper door top and front
additional shelf space for a 24"- or 48"wide flipper door unit, in the 16" depth
only.
L
The 60"-wide flipper door unit requires a
60"-wide task light. Narrower flipper door
units can accept a task light the same
width as or shorter than the flipper door
unit.
The B-style flipper door unit requires a
strips.
Options
flipper door unit only
separately:
strips.
L
B-Style Flipper Door
A3310. Veneer Door
A3312. Fabric Door
A3313. Painted Door
Description
This flipper door attaches to a 15 1/2"high, 13"- or 16"-deep shelf to provide
top and front closure. Attachment
down.
The flipper door has a painted, fabriccovered, or veneer front.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and
60" widths.
15 3/4".
is 15 3/8".
a separate B-style, 15 1/2"-high shelf.
doors to open.
when a flipper door hangs on an open
panel frame or on a glazed panel, a
flipper door back panel (ordered
separately) is required. For most other
applications, however, the panel surface
behind the flipper door unit provides
adequate enclosure.
2"
ABOVE ANOTHER
DOOR FLIPS DOWN
STORES ON TOP
Options
Order the optional Flipper Door Back
Panel (A3390.) separately.
MOUNTS ATOP
L
B-Style Shelf
A3210. 15 1/2" High
A3221. 7 1/2" High
Description
This shelf hangs from a panel, a frame,
or wall strips. The underside of the shelf
down.
binders and books.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and
60" widths.
16"; actual depths of shelves are 12"
and 14 7/8". Actual depths of shelf end
panels are 12 3/4" and 15 3/4".
the shelf is 1/2" to 1" greater than the
shelf dimension, since the shelf stops
short of the panel or frame, wall, or back
panel.
For enclosed storage (on the 15 1/2"high shelf only), use the B-style flipper
door for top and front enclosure and the
B-style flipper door back panel for back
enclosure on open panel frames and
glazed panels.
ADD FLIPPER DOOR AND BACK PANEL
FOR ENCLOSED STORAGE (15 ⁄«™"-HIGH
SHELF ONLY)
EFFECTIVE USABLE
SHORT AT BACK
additional shelf space for a 24"- or 48"wide shelf (15 1/2"-high, 16"-deep
version only).
than the shelf.
CAN BE HUNG ON PANELS OR
FRAMES…
L
…OR ON WALLS WITH
WALL STRIPS
The B-style shelf requires a separate
strips.
Options
• B-Style Flipper Door (A3310., A3312.,
or A3313.)
shelf only
separately:
STORAGE DEPTH 12"
strips.
Limitations
The 16"-deep shelf is not available in a
7 1/2" height.
L
FRAMES…
…OR ON WALLS
WITH WALL STRIPS
B-Style Storage/Display Shelf
A3220.
Description
This 13"-deep shelf hangs from a panel,
a frame, or wall strips in a flat position
for storage or a slanted position for
display. The underside of the shelf
down.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and
60" widths.
Height is 7 1/2".
Actual depth of the shelf end panel is
12 3/4". Nominal depth of the shelf is
13"; actual depth is 12 1/2".
The shelf position can be switched
between storage and display on site.
Task light attachment for a shelf used in
the slanted position requires a separate
display shelf adapter.
than the shelf.
SHELF IN
SLANTED
POSITION
SHELF IN
HORIZONTAL
POSITION
Dividing the interior for a shelf in the flat
position requires a separate shelf
divider.
The B-style shelf requires a separate
strips.
Options
Order the optional Shelf Divider, Angled
(G7330.), or the Shelf Divider,
Rectangular (NP374.), separately.
L
separately:
• Display Shelf Adapter, Task Light
(G6191.)
strips.
Limitations
The shelf can be subdivided only when
the shelf is in the flat position.
L
E-Style Storage
E-style storage components, originally designed for the Ethospace system, have
straight edges on the front facings of doors and drawers. They can be ordered for
Action Office and Ethospace systems.
L
E-Style Suspended Lateral File
A3021. Fabric Front
A3022. Veneer Front
Description
This 16"-deep lockable file hangs from a
frame, a panel, or wall strips to hold
letter-, legal-, and A4-size hanging files.
The file has a fabric-covered or veneer
front.
Dimensions
Height is 13 1/2".
HUNG FROM PANEL
OR FRAME
Depth is 15 7/8".
extended position.
files is required.
The E-style suspended lateral file
to hang on an Action Office panel or
Action Office wall strips.
CAN BE USED
SINGLY…
…OR STACKED
HUNG ON
WALL STRIPS
WHEN MOUNTING
ANOTHER
Options
Order the Attachment Bracket, E-Style
Components (A3930.), separately to
Action Office panel or wall strips.
L
E-Style Flipper Door Unit
A3050. Veneer Door
A9001. Fabric Door
Description
This lockable storage unit hangs from a
frame, a panel, or wall strips and
combines a flipper door and a 14"- or
16 1/2"-deep shelf to enclose binders,
files, and other items. The underside of
the shelf accepts a task light.
The flipper door unit has a fabriccovered or veneer front.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", and 48"
widths.
16 1/2"; actual depths are 14 1/8" and
16 5/8".
Height is 15 1/2".
doors to open.
2"
ABOVE ANOTHER
covered unit. Where a flipper door unit
has already been installed, it is possible
to remove the flipper door top and front
Flipper door units can accept a task light
the same width as or shorter than the
flipper door unit.
E-style flipper door units include a
component brace with each unit, which
accommodates all loads that fall within
approved guidelines—even heavy
component loading.
The E-style flipper door unit requires an
attachment bracket, ordered separately,
to hang on an Action Office panel or
Action Office wall strips.
L
Options
separately:
an Action Office panel or Action Office
wall strips.
L
E-Style Flipper Door
A3010. Veneer Door
A9002. Fabric Door
Description
This lockable door attaches to a 15 1/2"high, 14"- or 16 1/2"-deep shelf to
provide top and front closure.
The flipper door has a fabric-covered or
veneer front.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", and 48"
widths.
2"
ABOVE ANOTHER
16 1/2"; actual depths are 14 1/8" and
16 5/8".
Height is 15 1/2".
a separate E-style, 15 1/2"-high shelf.
DOOR FLIPS DOWN
STORES ON TOP
doors to open.
Because there is no separate back
panel available for the E-style shelf, it is
possible to provide only front and top
enclosure.
L
MOUNTS ATOP
E-Style Shelf
A3030. 15 1/2" High
A3040. 7 1/2" High
Description
This shelf hangs from a frame, panel,
or wall strips. The underside of the
shelf accepts a task light. Attachment
down.
binders and books.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", and 48"
widths.
Available in nominal depths of 13 1/2"
and 16"; actual depths of shelves are
12" and 14 7/8". Actual depths of shelf
end panels are 13 1/4" and 15 1/4".
the shelf is 1/2" to 1" greater, since the
shelf stops short of the panel or wall.
For enclosed storage (on the 15 1/2"high shelf only), use the E-style flipper
door for top and front enclosure. When
hung on a frame with a tile or when
converted to hang on a solid panel, the
wall surface behind the flipper door
provides adequate enclosure. Because
there is no separate back panel for the
E-style shelf, it is not recommended for
use on glazed or open frame panels
when converted.
ADD FLIPPER DOOR FRONT AND TOP
CLOSURE (15 ⁄«™"-HIGH SHELF ONLY)
EFFECTIVE USABLE
SHORT AT BACK
This shelf can accept a task light the
same width as or shorter than the shelf.
E-style shelves include a component
brace with each unit, which
accommodates all loads that fall within
approved guidelines—even heavy
component loading.
L
FRAMES…
…OR ON WALLS WITH
WALL STRIPS
The E-style shelf requires a separate
attachment bracket to hang on an Action
Office panel or Action Office wall strips.
Options
• E-Style Flipper Door (A9002. or
A3010.)
separately:
STORAGE DEPTH 12"
convert this shelf to hang on an Action
Office panel or Action Office wall strips.
Limitations
Because there is no separate back
panel available to close off the back of
this shelf, this shelf is not suitable for
mounting on an open panel frame or a
glazed panel when converted.
FRAMES…
…OR ON WALLS
WITH WALL STRIPS
The 16"-deep shelf is not available in a 7
1/2" height.
L
E-Style Display Shelf
A3045.
Description
This 13"-deep slanted shelf hangs from
a frame, a panel, or wall strips to provide
display space. The underside of the
shelf accepts a task light. Attachment
down.
Dimensions
Height is 7 1/2".
Depth of shelf end panel is 13 1/4".
Nominal depth of shelf is 13"; actual
depth is 13 1/4".
This shelf can be used in a slanted
display position only.
The shelf can accept a task light the
same width as or shorter than the shelf.
No adapter is required to attach the task
light to the underside of the display
shelf.
The E-style display shelf requires a
an Action Office panel or wall strips.
SHELF SITS
IN SLANTED
POSITION ONLY
Options
separately:
Order the optional Attachment Bracket,
E-Style Components (A3930.),
separately to convert this shelf to hang
on an Action Office panel or Action
Office wall strips.
Limitations
This display shelf cannot be converted
to a flat position for storage.
L
E-Style Attachment Bracket
A3930.
Description
These brackets convert Ethospace Estyle suspended lateral files, flipper door
units, or shelves to hang on Action
Office panels or wall strips. The brackets
mount on the ends of Ethospace
components. Each component requires
two brackets for mounting. Package
contains six pair.
Dimensions
Available in 4 3/4", 9 7/8", and 10 1/2"
heights.
Each component requires two brackets
for mounting.
REQUIRES 2 BRACKETS
FOR MOUNTING
Select the bracket according to the
component to be attached.
Limitation
This bracket can be used only on E-style
storage products shipped after February
1994.
L
Storage Accessories
A number of accessories—most of them able to be used with A-, B-, or E-style
storage—add more organizing capabilities to Action Office Series 2 storage
components or provide added support for heavily loaded storage components. Other
accessories allow for coat and personal-item storage on Series 2 panels.
Component Brace
A3910.
Description
This bracket mounts under A- or B-style
lateral files, flipper door units, or shelves
hung from a tackable acoustical-barrier
panel to support heavy component
loading and reduce deflection of a panel
run. Package contains six.
Dimensions
Width is 1 3/4".
Height is 1 1/2".
Depth is 7/8".
For applications requiring the
component brace, see “Need for
Additional Support” in the “Determining
Proper Support” section.
Because each E-style storage
component includes a component brace,
which accommodates all loads that
meet approved guidelines, a separate
component brace is not needed for Estyle storage components.
L
Shelf Divider, Angled
G7330.
Description
This divider attaches to an Action Office
or Ethospace shelf to vertically divide
books and binders. Package contains
eight.
Dimensions
Depth is 9 1/2".
Width of shelf clip is 3".
Height is 5 5/8".
The divider can be placed at any point
along the width of a shelf and moved as
needed.
At 9 1/2" deep, the divider does not
extend the full depth of the shelf.
L
CAN BE ATTACHED
TO SHELF AT ANY POINT
ALONG FRONT EDGE
Shelf Divider, Rectangular
NP374.
Description
This divider attaches to an Action Office
or Ethospace shelf to vertically divide
books and binders. Package contains
eight.
Dimensions
Depth is 11".
Width of shelf clip is 3 1/8".
Height is 5 1/2".
along the width of a shelf—and moved
as needed.
At 11" deep, the divider does not extend
the full depth of the shelf.
L
CAN BE ATTACHED
TO SHELF AT ANY POINT
ALONG FRONT EDGE
Shelf Organizer
AO530.
Description
This freestanding organizer sits on a
shelf or in a flipper door unit. It has three
adjustable shelves and three label
holders for each shelf.
Dimensions
Width is 22 1/2".
Height is 12 1/8".
Depth is 12".
The shelf organizer unit can be placed
at any point along the width of a shelf or
flipper door unit to provide vertical
division of the space.
Shelves within the organizer can be
spaced at vertical increments of 1 3/4".
CAN BE PLACED
ANYWHERE ON SHELF
ORGANIZER SHELVES
CAN BE SPACED AT
1 ‹«¢" VERTICAL
INCREMENTS
Options
Order the Shelf Organizer Shelf
(AO531.) and the Shelf Organizer
Divider (AO532.) separately.
DIVIDES HORIZONTAL EXPANSE
OF SHELF SPACE
L
Shelf Organizer Shelf
AO531.
Description
This adjustable shelf is placed in a shelf
organizer. Package contains six.
Dimensions
Width is 22 1/4".
Height is 1/2".
Depth is 11".
These shelves can be used in addition
to the three that are included with the
shelf organizer. The shelves can be
spaced at vertical increments of 1 3/4"
within the organizer.
ADDITIONAL SHELVES
AS NEEDED FOR
SHELF ORGANIZER
Options
Order the Shelf Organizer Divider
L
Shelf Organizer Divider
AO532.
Description
This divider snaps onto a shelf organizer
shelf to vertically divide the shelf.
Package contains six.
Dimensions
Available in 2 1/4" and 6" heights.
Depth is 11".
Width is 2 3/4".
along the width of a shelf in the shelf
organizer and moved as needed.
Because the clip that attaches the
divider to the shelf is sized to fit over a
shelf organizer shelf, these dividers
cannot be attached directly to the thicker
A-, B-, or E-style shelf.
L
DIVIDES HORIZONTAL
EXPANSE OF SHELF SPACE
Paper Organizer
AO533.
Description
This freestanding organizer sits on a
work surface or shelf for vertical or
horizontal storage. Finish is dark tone.
Package contains eight trays and twelve
connectors.
Dimensions
Width is 12 7/8".
Height is 2".
Depth is 10 3/8".
To stabilize paper organizers stacked
horizontally or vertically requires paper
organizer connectors. Each connection
between organizers requires one
connector at each side of the
organizers.
CAN BE USED VERTICALLY
OR HORIZONTALLY ON SHELVES
OR WORK SURFACES
Options
For additional or replacement
connectors, order the optional Paper
Organizer Connector (AO534.)
separately.
L
Paper Organizer Connector
AO534.
Description
This connector joins two paper organizer
trays for additional stacking. Finish is
dark tone. Package contains 24.
Dimensions
Width is 10 1/4".
Height is 2".
The connectors—used in pairs for each
connection—are used on each side of
the trays to keep the organizers
stabilized and in place when stacked
vertically or horizontally.
ALLOWS FOR STACKING
OF MULTIPLE PAPER
ORGANIZERS
L
A-Style Coat Bar and Shelf
AO524.
Description
This 17 1/2"-deep, 48"-wide unit hangs
from a panel, a frame, or wall strips. It
has a shelf for storage and a coat bar
beneath the shelf. Attachment hardware
is included. Shipped knocked down.
Dimensions
Width is 48".
Height is 15 1/2".
Depth is 17 1/2".
This coat bar and shelf requires an
attachment bracket, ordered separately,
to hang on an Ethospace frame or
Ethospace wall strips.
FOR STORAGE OF
PERSONAL ITEMS
AND COATS
Options
convert this coat bar and shelf to hang
on an Ethospace frame or Ethospace
wall strips.
L
Coat Hook
AO535.
Description
This hook fits over the top of an Action
Office Series 1 or 2 panel for hanging
coats, hats, and umbrellas. Finish is
medium tone. Package contains six.
Dimensions
Width is 1".
Height is 3 1/4".
FITS OVER
TOP OF PANEL
Depth is 4"; actual extension from face
of panel is 1 3/8".
The coat hook can be attached at any
point along the width of the panel top.
L
Storage Work Surface-Attached Storage
Work SurfaceAttached Storage
A variety of storage products can be hung from the undersides of Action Office work
surfaces. Storage ranges from a single small drawer for pencils and other items to
pedestals of multiple drawers in a number of configurations; there are also a number
of organizers that fit inside the drawers to further subdivide them.
Work surface-attached drawer pedestals are available in A-Series and G-Series
products. While the most distinctive difference between the two series is in their
drawer fronts, A-Series pedestals offer a configuration with a 3"-high pencil drawer, in
addition to box and file drawers.
There are several additional, miscellaneous storage components that can be attached
beneath Series 2 work surfaces and peninsulas: three pencil drawers (two styles in
plastic) to hold and organize pencils and other small items, two sizes of single plastic
drawers, and a storage unit containing those drawers. These storage products can be
fitted with a stationery divider or a divider package to subdivide the drawers and
organize their contents.
L
Planning Considerations for Work Surface-Attached Storage
All drawers and suspended drawer pedestals are screwed to the underside of the
work surface using predrilled holes; except where supports prohibit, drawers and
drawer units can be positioned at the center, the left, or the right of a work surface.
To determine the horizontal clearance available for attaching drawers to work
surfaces, subtract 3" from the width of each panel with attached supports; this
accounts for the room required for cantilevered supports. For example, 3" is required
to accommodate the supports on a 36"-wide panel, leaving 33" of clearance for
drawers. For a 72"-wide work surface suspended on two 36"-wide panels, 3" is
deducted from between each pair of support arms, leaving 66" of clearance (33" on
each side of the support arms).
TO DETERMINE CLEARANCE FOR ATTACHING
DRAWERS OR DRAWER PEDESTALS—
EXTRA SUPPORTS ON
60"- AND 72"-WIDE
WORK SURFACES
SUBTRACT 3"
FROM PANEL WIDTH
SUBTRACT 3" FROM PANEL WIDTH
BETWEEN EACH PAIR OF
WORK SURFACE SUPPORTS
(6" TOTAL)
Filing Capacity Provided by Work Surface-Attached Pedestals
The chart shows the total filing inches for pedestal file drawers in A- and G-Series
work surface-attached storage pedestals.
The inside height clearance of the pedestal file drawer is 10 3/4"; interior height of the
drawer side is 9 1/2".
SIDE-TO-SIDE
LEGAL
SIDE-TO-SIDE
A4 WITH LETTER
SIDE-TO-SIDE
LETTER
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
20" DEPTH
(G- OR ASERIES)
3 ⁄«™"
16 ⁄«™"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=12 ⁄«¢"
L
1 ⁄«™"
FRONT-TO-BACK
LETTER ONLY
TOTAL CAPACITY=13 ‹«¢"
(A4=24 CM FOLDERS)
A4 CAPACITY=12 ⁄«¢"
LETTER CAPACITY=1 ⁄«™"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=15 ‹«¢"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=16 ⁄«™"
A-Series Storage
All A-Series pedestals are designed to be compatible with Ethospace; Action Office
Series 1, 2, and 3; and Liaison systems. They can also be used with Newhouse
Group® and Relay® furniture. A-Series storage also blends with Arrio freestanding
systems furniture.
Front Styles
A-Series pedestals offer three different drawer fronts:
• The F-front option has centered, recessed oval pulls and comes in a solid-color
finish only. This recessed pull minimizes the protrusion usually associated with
handles and causes minimal obstruction in tight places. Specifying the recessed
pull upside down helps accommodate users with limited hand mobility, and
specifying the recessed pull in a contrasting color aids workers with visual
impairment.
• The H-front option has applied arc pulls that can be grasped easily by workers with
limited hand mobility; because of its relatively flat design, it causes less obstruction
than most applied pulls. The H-front option for the pedestal comes in a solid-color
finish only.
• The J-front option has applied D-shaped pulls that can also be grasped easily; the
wide curve of the pull makes it easy for workers with limited hand mobility to slip
their hands through the pull. The J-front option comes in a solid-color finish only.
A-SERIES WORK SURFACE-ATTACHED PEDESTALS
F-FRONT OPTION:
CENTERED, RECESSED
OVAL PULLS
H-FRONT OPTION:
APPLIED ARC PULLS
J-FRONT OPTION:
D-SHAPED PULLS
Suspended Pedestals
A-Series suspended pedestals offer a box/file and a box/box/box configuration, along
with a pencil/box/file configuration not available in G-Series pedestals.
L
Support Pedestals
A-Series support pedestals have a dual function—storage and support. Used at either
end of a run of Herman Miller systems panels or at the mid-run at a connection point,
the support pedestal provides support for both a work surface and the panels from
which the work surface hangs. Because a support pedestal attaches to the work
surface as well as the panel, it requires a work surface height of 29" and precludes
adjusting the height of the work surface.
These support pedestals offer three different drawer configurations: file/file,
pencil/box/EDP, and box/box/file. Because the support pedestal is fixed in place, it
does not offer a choice of bases; it comes with raised feet.
The support pedestal eliminates the need for a return or a work surface support
panel.
Support pedestals are available in nominal 20" and 24" depths; actual depths are
19 5/8" and 23 1/2" respectively.
The 20"-deep pedestal supports a 24"-deep work surface; the 24"-deep pedestal
supports a 30"-deep work surface. To match the height of any stationary pedestal
used beneath a work surface to the height of the support pedestal used in a
workstation or series of workstations, specify the raised-feet option for the stationary
pedestal.
The file drawer accommodates front-to-back, letter-size hanging files and side-to-side
letter, legal, and A4-size files when equipped with a pedestal file converter. The EDP
drawer accommodates bound computer paper (12 1/8" by 11 7/8") filed side to side as
well as letter-, legal-, and A4-size paper side to side and letter-size paper front to
back.
All A-Series pedestals are available without locks—as well as with individually keyed
locks or keyed-alike locks.
If desired, all lockable drawers and pedestals can be keyed alike; this means that one
key can be used to lock and unlock a group of components, whether wall attached,
work surface attached, or freestanding. Keyed-alike components are shipped with lock
cylinders installed and with lock plugs shipped separately and tagged for product and
location as specified. When the keyed-alike option is not specified, all lock cylinders
and plugs are shipped installed and randomly numbered.
L
F-Front Pedestal, Suspended
FAF12.
Description
This pedestal mounts under a predrilled
hanging or freestanding work surface
and has recessed oval pulls. The actual
pedestal depth is 19 5/8". Mounting
A file drawer holds letter-size front-toback hanging files.
Dimensions
For box/file and box/box/box pedestals:
• Width is 14 5/8"; interior width is
12 1/4".
• Depth is 19 5/8"; interior depth is
16 1/2".
For pencil/box/file pedestals:
12 1/4".
16 1/2".
This suspended pedestal offers a choice
of one 6" box drawer and one 12" file
drawer; one 3" pencil drawer, one 6" box
drawer, and one 12" file drawer; or three
6" box drawers. All drawers have fullextension drawer slides.
The minimum distance between the
suspended pedestal and an adjacent
work surface support panel is 5/8", and
1 1/2" for an adjacent return panel or
frame with work surface support arm.
The file drawer can be converted to hold
side-to-side letter-, legal- and A4-size
hanging files with a separate file
converter.
L
ATTACHES TO UNDERSIDE
OF WORK SURFACE
1 ⁄«™" MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN
PEDESTAL AND ADJACENT RETURN
PANEL OR FRAME WITH WORK SURFACE
SUPPORT ARM; fi«•" MINIMUM
DISTANCE BETWEEN PEDESTAL
AND WORK SURFACE SUPPORT PANEL
Options
Order optional accessories for pencil
drawers separately:
• Drawer Divider, Pedestal (FAA10.03)
• Utility Tray, Pedestal (G5912.)
Order optional accessories for box
drawers separately:
• Stationery Divider, Pedestal (G5911.)
Order optional accessories for file
drawers separately:
• File Converter, Pedestal (G5913.)
• File Compressor (G5914.)
• File Drawer Organizer (B4961.)
Limitations
This suspended pedestal cannot be
attached under the following products:
• Action Office freestanding tables
• Ethospace peninsula with access
cover or rectangular peninsula
• Newhouse Group machine return or
table with adjustable keyboard tray
• Relay display, high-performance, or
computer surface table desk or fourleg-base table
• Arrio freestanding work surfaces
The pencil/box/file suspended pedestal
cannot be attached under the following
products:
• Newhouse Group table or table desk
• Relay table or table desk
L
F-Front Pedestal, Support
FAF13.
Description
This pedestal attaches to both a work
surface and a panel or frame at either
the end of a run or mid-run to provide
support. The pedestal eliminates the
need for a return panel and panel corner
connector or a work surface support
panel. It has recessed oval pulls and
raised feet with 1/2" adjustable glides.
The pedestal attaches under a work
surface on the left or right side.
The actual pedestal depth is 19 5/8" or
23 1/2". A 20"-deep pedestal supports a
24"-deep work surface; a 24"-deep
pedestal supports a 30"-deep work
surface. A file drawer holds letter-size
front-to-back hanging files; an EDP
drawer holds EDP-size side-to-side
hanging files or letter-size front-to-back
hanging files.
Dimensions
Height is 27 1/4".
Width is 14 5/8"; interior width is 12 1/4".
Depths are nominal 20" and 24"; actual
depths are 19 5/8" and 23 1/2".
This support pedestal offers a choice of
two 12" file drawers; one 3" pencil
drawer, one 6" box drawer, and one 15"
EDP file drawer; or two 6" box drawers
and one 12" file drawer.
The 20"-deep support pedestal is used
to support a 24"-deep work surface at
the end of a work surface run; however,
it can be used in the middle of a run to
The gap between the support pedestal
and the wall run is closed up with a filler
plate that comes with the support
pedestal and attaches to both the end
panel or frame and the work surface.
L
FILLER
PLATE
side-to-side letter-, legal-, and A4-size
converter.
The support pedestal can be reused
with a different Herman Miller panel
system by ordering the appropriate
service parts.
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
Order the optional File Drawer Organizer
(B4961.) for EDP drawers separately.
To reuse the support pedestal with a
different Herman Miller panel system,
order the appropriate service parts:
With a 20"-deep support pedestal:
• For attachment to an Action Office
Series 1 or 2 panel, service part
no. 241924
Series 3 panel, service part
no. 241926
• For attachment to an Ethospace
frame and work surface, service part
no. 241928
no. 241925
no. 241927
no. 241929
L
Limitations
The support pedestal provides support
for a work surface at only the 29" height.
L
H-Front Pedestal, Suspended
FAH12.
Description
and has applied arc pulls. The actual
pedestal depth is 19 5/8". Mounting
Dimensions
12 1/4".
16 1/2".
For pencil/box/file pedestals:
12 1/4".
16 1/2".
drawer; one 3" pencil drawer, one 6" box
drawer, and one 12" file drawer; or three
6" box drawers. All drawers have fullextension drawer slides.
converter.
L
OF WORK SURFACE
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
Limitations
• Arrio freestanding systems work
surfaces
The pencil/box/file suspended pedestal
cannot be attached under the following
products:
• Newhouse Group table or table desk
• Relay table or table desk
L
H-Front Pedestal, Support
FAH13.
Description
panel. It has applied arc pulls and raised
feet with 1/2" adjustable glides. The
pedestal attaches under a work surface
on the left or right side. Attachment
surface. A file drawer holds letter-size
front-to-back hanging files; an EDP
drawer holds EDP-size side-to-side
hanging files.
Dimensions
Height is 27 1/4".
depths are 19 5/8" and 23 1/2".
two 12" file drawers; one 3" pencil
drawer, one 6" box drawer, and one 15"
EDP file drawer; or two 6" box drawers
and one 12" file drawer.
L
FILLER
PLATE
converter.
service parts.
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
no. 241924
no. 241926
no. 241928
no. 241925
no. 241927
no. 241929
L
Limitations
for a work surface at only the 29"-height.
L
J-Front Pedestal, Suspended
FAJ12.
Description
and has applied D-shaped pulls. The
actual pedestal depth is 19 5/8".
Mounting hardware is included.
Dimensions
Height is 19 5/8".
Depth is 19 5/8"; interior depth is
16 1/2".
drawer or three 6" box drawers. All
drawers have full-extension drawer
slides.
converter.
Options
drawers separately:
PULL EXTENDS 1 ‹«•"
FROM DRAWER FRONT
OF WORK SURFACE
drawers separately:
L
Limitations
• Arrio freestanding systems work
surfaces
L
J-Front Pedestal, Support
FAJ13.
Description
panel. It has applied D-shaped pulls and
raised feet with 1/2" adjustable glides.
The pedestal attaches under a work
surface on the left or right side. A file
drawer holds letter-size front-to-back
hanging files. Attachment hardware is
included.
surface.
Dimensions
Height is 27 1/4".
depths are 19 5/8" and 23 1/2".
two 12" file drawers or two 6" box
drawers and one 12" file drawer.
FILLER
PLATE
converter.
L
service parts.
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
With a 20"-deep pedestal:
no. 241924
no. 241926
no. 241928
With a 24"-deep support panel:
no. 241925
no. 241927
no. 241929
Limitations
L
G-Series Storage
All G-Series pedestals can be used with Ethospace; Action Office Series 1, 2, and 3;
and Liaison systems, making them compatible with any office. They can also be used
with Newhouse Group and Relay furniture. (The C-front option matches the design
details for Newhouse Group furniture; the E-front option matches Relay furniture
details.) G-Series storage also blends with Arrio freestanding systems furniture.
Front Styles
G-Series pedestals also offer three different drawer fronts:
• The B-front option has full-width, recessed pulls and comes in a solid-color finish
only.
• The C-front option has centered, recessed pulls and can be specified with either
solid-color or veneer drawer fronts; in veneer, there is a choice of recut or natural.
• The E-front option has full-width bar pulls and comes in a solid-color finish only; the
pull extends 1 3/8" from the drawer front.
G-SERIES WORK SURFACE-ATTACHED PEDESTALS
B-FRONT OPTION:
FULL-WIDTH,
RECESSED PULLS
C-FRONT OPTION:
CENTERED,
RECESSED PULLS
E-FRONT OPTION:
FULL-WIDTH
BAR PULLS
Suspended Pedestals
G-Series suspended pedestals are available in box/file and box/box/box
configurations.
Support Pedestals
G-Series support pedestals are available in box/box/file and file/file configurations.
G-Series pedestals are available with individually keyed locks or keyed-alike locks, but
are not available without locks.
L
L
B-Front Pedestal, Suspended
G5112.B Box/File
G5142.B Box/Box/Box
G5171.B Box
G5172.B File
Description
This lockable pedestal mounts under a
predrilled hanging or freestanding work
surface and has full-width, recessed
pulls. The actual pedestal depth is
19 5/8". Mounting hardware is included.
Dimensions
12 1/4".
16 1/2".
For box pedestals:
12 1/4".
16 1/2".
For file pedestals:
12 1/4".
16 1/2".
of one 6" box drawer, one 12" file
drawer, one 6" box drawer and one 12"
file drawer, or three 6" box drawers. All
slides.
The minimum distance required
between a suspended pedestal and an
adjacent work surface support panel is
5/8"; a 1 1/2" distance is required for an
adjacent return panel or frame with work
surface support arm.
OF WORK SURFACE
hanging files with a file converter,
ordered separately.
L
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
Limitations
L
B-Front Pedestal, Support
NP361. Box/Box/File
NP362. File/File
Description
This lockable pedestal attaches to both
a work surface and an Action Office
Series 1 or Series 2 panel at either the
end of a run or mid-run to provide
panel. It has full-width, recessed pulls
and 1/2" adjustable glides. The actual
pedestal depth is
19 5/8"; each pedestal supports a 24"deep work surface. A file drawer holds
letter-size front-to-back hanging files.
Dimensions
For box/box/file and file/file pedestals:
• Height is 28".
12 1/4".
16 1/2".
The support pedestal is used to support
a 24"-deep work surface at the end of a
work surface run; however, it can also be
used in the middle of a run to support
30"-deep work surfaces if the work
surfaces are ganged.
FILLER
PLATE
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
Limitations
L
C-Front Pedestal, Suspended
G5112.C Box/File
G5142.C Box/Box/Box
Description
surface and has centered, recessed
Pulls on a file with a solid color front
match the front finish; pulls on a file with
a veneer front match the case finish. The
file drawer holds letter-size front-to-back
hanging files.
Dimensions
Height is 19 5/8".
Depth is 19 5/8"; interior depth is 16 1/2".
This suspended pedestal is available
with one 6" box drawer and one 12" file
slides.
ordered separately.
OF WORK SURFACE
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
L
Limitations
L
E-Front Pedestal, Suspended
G5112.E Box/File
G5142.E Box/Box/Box
Description
surface and has full-width, black umber
bar pulls. The actual pedestal depth is
The file drawer holds letter-size front-toback hanging files.
Dimensions
Height is 19 5/8".
Depth is 19 5/8"; interior depth is 16 1/2".
This suspended pedestal is available
with one 6" box drawer and one 12" file
slides.
ordered separately.
PULL EXTENDS 1 ‹«•"
FROM DRAWER FRONT
OF WORK SURFACE
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
L
Limitations
L
Pedestal Accessories
The drawers in Herman Miller pedestals can be fitted with a series of accessories that
subdivide space to hold papers, pens, paper clips, and similar small items and keep
them organized for easy retrieval. File drawers can also be outfitted with a converter
to accommodate side-to-side filing or a compressor to divide nonhanging files.
Drawer Divider, Pedestal
FAA10.03 For pencil drawer
FAA10.06 For box drawer
Description
This removable divider is used in a
pencil or box drawer. Finish is black
umber.
Dimensions
Width is 12 3/8".
Depth is 2".
Height is 3" for pencil drawer divider, 6"
for box drawer divider.
CAN BE PLACED
AT ANY POINT
inside the drawer to divide space. The
divider can be moved as required.
Multiple dividers can be used in a single
drawer.
Options
The drawer divider can be used along
with the Stationary Divider, Pedestal
(G5911.), or the Utility Tray, Pedestal
(G5912.), ordered separately.
L
Stationery Divider, Pedestal
G5911.
Description
These four removable dividers are used
in box drawers. Finish is black umber.
Dimensions
Height is 4 5/8".
The divider can be placed to provide
access to stationery stored toward or
away from the user.
Options
The divider can be used along with the
Drawer Divider, Pedestal (FAA10.06), or
the Utility Tray, Pedestal (G5912.),
ordered separately.
STATIONERY DIVIDER WITH
PAPER ACCESS FROM FRONT
STATIONERY DIVIDER WITH
PAPER ACCESS FROM REAR
L
Utility Tray, Pedestal
G5912.
Description
This sectioned tray stores pencils and
small items in a pencil or box drawer.
Finish is black umber.
Dimensions
Width is 12 5/8".
Height is 1 5/8".
Depth is 4 3/4".
CAN BE POSITIONED
IN FRONT OR REAR
The sectioned tray can be placed at the
front of the drawer or at the rear.
Options
The tray can be used along with the
Drawer Divider, Pedestal (FAA10.06),
or the Stationery Divider, Pedestal
(G5911.), ordered separately.
L
SECTIONED TO HOLD AND ORGANIZE
PENCILS AND SMALL ITEMS
File Converter, Pedestal
G5913.
Description
These black umber brackets convert a
file drawer to hold letter-, legal-, and A4size side-to-side hanging files. Two
converters are used per drawer.
Package contains four.
Dimensions
Available to fit 12"-high file drawers.
Two converters are required for each 12"
drawer to convert the drawer to side-toside filing.
L
ALLOWS SIDE-TO-SIDE FILING
OF HANGING FOLDERS
File Compressor
G5914.
Description
These compressors lock into slots in the
bottom of a pedestal file drawer or the
pull-out shelf of an A-Series
freestanding lateral file to divide
nonhanging files. Finish is black umber.
Dimensions
Width is 9".
Height is 6 1/4".
A compressor can fit into any pair of
slots in the drawer bottom or pull-out
shelf and can be moved as needed.
The maximum number of compressors
for each pedestal file drawer is:
• 20"-deep drawer: 8 compressors
The maximum number of compressors
for each pull-out shelf is:
• 30"-wide shelf: 10 compressors
L
MOVABLE, TO ADJUST FOR
NONHANGING FILE STORAGE
LOCKS INTO ANY 1 OF 8 PAIRS OF
SLOTS IN BOTTOM OF DRAWER
Pencil Drawers
Pencil drawers, in a choice of sizes, configurations, and construction, can be mounted
under Action Office Series 2 work surfaces.
Pencil Drawer
G5010.
Description
This plastic drawer mounts under a
hanging or freestanding work surface to
store pencils and other small items.
Dimensions
Width is 21 1/8".
Depth is 16 1/4".
Height is 1 7/8" at back, 1" at front.
The narrow front profile allows the
maximum amount of kneespace under a
work surface.
Subdivided sections at the front of the
drawer accept a variety of small items.
NARROW PROFILE TO ALLOW
MAXIMUM KNEESPACE
DIFFERENT SIZE SECTIONS
TO HOLD VARIETY OF
SMALL ITEMS
Limitations
This drawer cannot be suspended under
the following products:
• 24"-wide work surfaces
• Relay 30"-wide, four-leg-base table
• Some Arrio work surface sizes (See
the “Attaching Pencil Drawers” matrix
in the Arrio Freestanding Systems
Furniture Planning Guide to determine
compatibility with specific work
surfaces.)
L
Pencil Drawer, Metal
G5012.
Description
This metal drawer mounts under a
hanging or freestanding work surface to
store pencils and other small items.
Dimensions
Width is 21 3/4".
Depth is 18 5/8".
Height is 2 1/2" at back, 1 1/2" at front.
The narrow front profile allows the
maximum amount of kneespace under a
work surface.
SECTIONS SEPARATE SMALL
ITEMS
Limitations
The drawer cannot be mounted under
the following products:
• 24"-wide work surfaces
• 24"-deep Action Office freestanding
tables
• Action Office 18"-deep work surfaces
• Relay 30"-wide or 22"-deep 4-legbase table or 48"-wide display table
desk
• Some Arrio work surface sizes (See
the “Attaching Pencil Drawers” matrix
in the Arrio Freestanding Systems
Furniture Planning Guide to determine
surfaces.)
L
A-Style Pencil Drawer
AO480.
Description
This drawer mounts under a predrilled
panel-hung work surface or under an
Arrio work surface to store pencils and
other small items. Mounting hardware is
included.
Dimensions
Width is 20 3/4".
Depth is 15 3/8".
Height is 3" at back, 2 1/2" at front.
DIFFERENT-SIZE
SECTIONS
Limitations
This drawer cannot be suspended under
some Arrio work surface sizes. (See the
“Attaching Pencil Drawers” matrix in the
Arrio Freestanding Systems Furniture
Planning Guide to determine
surfaces.)
L
A-Style Drawers
A-style drawers are suspended under a work surface, providing a low-cost alternative
to a storage pedestal. These A-style drawers have dividers to hold and organize
papers and small items within the drawers.
Drawer with Lock
AO481. 5 1/2" High
AO482. 11 1/2" High
Description
This lockable drawer mounts under a
predrilled panel-hung work surface or
freestanding table. It has full-extension
suspension. Mounting hardware is
included.
The 5 1/2"-high drawer stores small
items; the 11 1/2"-high drawer stores
papers and files.
Dimensions
Width is 20 3/4".
Depth is 14 7/8".
Nominal heights are 5 1/2" and 11 1/2";
actual heights are 5 7/8" and 12".
This drawer can be mounted at any of
several predrilled locations on the
underside of a work surface.
5 ⁄/™"-HIGH DRAWER
Options
For the 11 1/2"-high drawer, order the
optional A-Style Stationery Divider
Package (AO490.) separately.
For the 5 1/2"-high drawer, order the
optional A-Style Drawer Divider Package
Limitations
This drawer cannot be attached to the
underside of an Arrio freestanding work
surface.
L
11 ⁄/™"-HIGH DRAWER
A-Style Storage Unit with Lock
AO483.
Description
This lockable, two-drawer storage unit
mounts under a predrilled panel-hung
work surface or freestanding table. It
stores small items, papers, and files and
has full-extension suspension. Mounting
Dimensions
Width is 20 3/4".
Depth is 15 1/4".
Height is 17 3/4".
This storage unit can be mounted at any
of several predrilled locations on the
underside of a work surface.
Options
Order optional accessories separately:
• A-Style Stationery Divider (AO490.)
• A-Style Drawer Divider Package
(AO491.)
Limitations
This storage unit cannot be attached to
the underside of an Arrio freestanding
work surface.
L
A-Style Stationery Divider
AO490.
Description
This unit vertically divides an A-Style
11 1/2"-high drawer. Finish is dark tone.
Dimensions
Width is 15 3/4".
Depth is 13".
Height is 8 1/4".
Limitations
This stationery divider cannot be used
with an A-style 3"-high pencil drawer or
5 1/2"-high drawer with lock.
The stationery divider slots are not
removable.
L
A-Style Drawer Divider Package
AO491.
Description
This package divides materials within an
A-Style 5 1/2"-high drawer. It includes
four removable dividers and a pencil tray.
Finish is dark tone.
Dimensions
Width is 13 5/8".
Depth is 16 1/8".
Height is 5 1/4".
The stationery dividers and pencil tray
are movable, so that the location of the
dividers and pencil tray can be changed
to suit the user’s work preferences.
PENCIL TRAY
AND DIVIDERS
CAN BE MOVED
Limitations
This drawer divider package cannot be
used with an A-style 3"-high pencil
drawer or 11 1/2"-high drawer with lock.
L
Storage Freestanding Storage
Freestanding Storage
Freestanding storage products can be used within a workstation or in centralized
storage areas for bulk filing. Because they’re not attached to a work surface, they
provide alternatives for relocating storage at will. Freestanding storage includes
stationary and mobile pedestals as well as lateral files. There are also several
organizers—such as the file drawer organizer—that can allow file drawers set up
for letter-sized filing to store other items.
L
Freestanding Pedestal Drawer Storage
Pedestals—A-Series or G-Series, stationary or mobile—can be located under
squared- and radiused-edge rectangular work surfaces, squared-edge rectangular
and round-end peninsulas, and Arrio freestanding work surfaces. They offer an
alternative to work surface-attached storage in a workstation. Because A-Series
freestanding storage offers additional depths, however, the work surface depth as well
as its width must be taken into account in specifying freestanding storage to fit
beneath work surfaces. (The “Compatibility Between Work Surface and Storage
Depth” chart is a quick reference for fit for wall-attached work surfaces and
peninsulas. For considerations of fit for Arrio work surfaces, refer to the Arrio™
Freestanding Systems Furniture Planning Guide.) With A-Series pedestals, certain
drawer configurations requiring greater clearance may not fit beneath a work surface
at typical heights. Height requirements must be checked carefully; a choice between
glides and the raised foot may affect the fit.
Since the depth of the Herman Miller work surface has a significant impact on the
storage depth, the “Compatibility Between Work Surface and Storage Depth” chart
summarizes the information about which freestanding storage fits under various work
surfaces. Details about compatibility and fit are covered in the information about each
storage type.
Compatibility Between Work Surface and Storage Depth
Freestanding
Storage Type
24"-Deep
Work Surface
30"-Deep
Work Surface
Rectangular
Peninsula
Stationary Storage
20" deep (G- or A-Series)
24" deep (A-Series)
28" deep (A-Series)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Mobile Storage
20" deep (G-Series)
24" deep (A-Series)
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Yes*
Support Pedestals
20" deep (A-Series only)
24" deep (A-Series only)
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
—
*Work surface must be at 29" height
Note: See “Stationary Pedestal Storage” for storage limitations related to use of
60"-wide work surface.
L
Filing Capacity Provided by Freestanding Pedestals
The charts show the total filing inches for pedestal file drawers and EDP file drawers
in A- and G-Series storage pedestals.
The inside height clearance of the pedestal file drawer is 10 3/4"; interior height of the
drawer side is 9 1/2". The inside height clearance of the 15" EDP drawer (A-Series
only) is 13 1/8"; interior height of the drawer side is 11 7/8".
SIDE-TO-SIDE
EDP ONLY
(BOUND)
SIDE-TO-SIDE
LEGAL
SIDE-TO-SIDE
A4 WITH LETTER
SIDE-TO-SIDE
LETTER
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
20" DEPTH
(G- OR ASERIES)
1 ⁄«™"
3 ⁄«™"
N/A
TOTAL CAPACITY
=12 ⁄«¢"
TOTAL CAPACITY=13 ‹«¢"
(A4=24 CM FOLDERS)
LETTER CAPACITY=1 ⁄«™"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=15 ‹«¢"
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
5 ⁄«•"
16 ⁄«™"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=16 ⁄«™"
2 CONVERTERS
24" DEPTH
(A-SERIES
ONLY)
FRONT-TO-BACK
LETTER ONLY
7 ⁄«•"
20 ⁄«•"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=12 ⁄«¢"
TOTAL CAPACITY=17 ‹«8"
LETTER CAPACITY=5 ⁄«8"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=15 ‹«¢"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=12 ⁄«¢"
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
2 CONVERTERS
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
12 ⁄«¢"
28" DEPTH
(A-SERIES
ONLY)
9 fi«•"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=20 ⁄«8"
11 ‹«•"
24 fi«•"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=12 ⁄«¢"
L
TOTAL CAPACITY=21 7«8"
LETTER CAPACITY=9 fi«•"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=23 fi«•"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=12 ⁄«¢"
TOTAL CAPACITY
=24 fi«•"
A-Series Pedestals
All A-Series pedestals are designed to be visually compatible with all Herman Miller
systems and freestanding furniture.
Front Styles
A-Series pedestals offer three different drawer fronts:
handles and also causes minimal obstruction in tight places. Specifying the
recessed pull upside down helps accommodate users with limited hand mobility,
and specifying the recessed pull in a contrasting color aids workers with visual
impairment.
than most applied pulls. The H-front option for pedestals comes in a solid-color
finish only.
A-SERIES PEDESTALS
F-FRONT OPTION:
CENTERED, RECESSED,
OVAL PULLS
L
H-FRONT OPTION:
APPLIED ARC PULLS
J-FRONT OPTION:
D-SHAPED PULLS
Stationary Pedestal Storage
A-Series stationary pedestals are available in three depths (20", 24", and 28", nominal
dimensions); they offer a 3"-high pencil drawer and a 15"-high EDP drawer in addition
to the 6" box and 12" file drawers (a total of four drawer heights in four configurations).
A-Series stationary pedestals offer the option of either a raised foot that allows the
pedestal to fit snugly up under the work surface or an adjustable glide that
compensates for variances in carpeting or differences in types of flooring. (Adjustable
glides allow an adjustment of 1/2". The raised foot raises the pedestal by 1" and
includes 1/2" adjustable glides and additional counterweights.) In addition to allowing
interchangeability of glides and the raised foot, these stationary pedestals can be
converted into mobile ones by substituting casters for the glides or raised feet.
All 20"- and 24"-deep pedestals can be stored beneath any Herman Miller panel-hung
work surface. The 28"-deep pedestals fit flush beneath only the 30"-deep work
surfaces.
Because of the metal support under the 60"-wide work surface, only 20"-deep
pedestals fit under 24"-deep work surfaces. The 20"- and 24"-deep pedestals can,
however, fit under 30"-deep, 60"-wide work surfaces.
The 12"-high file drawer accommodates front-to-back, letter-size hanging files and
side-to-side letter-, legal-, and A4-size files when equipped with a pedestal file
converter. The EDP drawer accommodates bound computer paper
(12 1/8" wide by 11 7/8" high) filed side to side as well as letter-, legal-, and A4-size
paper side to side and letter-size paper front to back.
Each stationary pedestal is shipped with an integral counterweight for stability.
Additional counterweights are required when A-Series stationary pedestals are
converted to mobile ones.
L
Mobile Pedestal Storage
A-Series mobile pedestals offer three drawer configurations (file/file, pencil/box/file,
and box/box/file) and are available in a nominal 24" depth. The file drawer
accommodates front-to-back, letter-size hanging files and side-to-side letter-, legal-,
and A4-size files when equipped with a pedestal file converter.
Dual-wheel casters, field installed, are for use on either carpeted or hard floors. The
casters on A-Series mobile storage units can be removed later to convert the pedestal
to a stationary pedestal—with either adjustable glides or raised feet (additional
counterweights may be needed).
The ranges in depth and drawer configuration require that the work surface depth and
height be considered when planning where such storage units can be placed. Any
mobile pedestal can be stored beneath any depth work surface or rectangular
peninsula at a nominal 29" sit-down height, as long as the installation tolerances and
glide adjustments allow for the pedestal height.
Because A-Series mobile pedestals are 27 3/4" high in all configurations except the
pencil/box/file option, they are a tight fit beneath a work surface set at a nominal 29"
seated height. To use those 27 3/4"-high pedestals in that situation, the clearance
beneath the work surface must be at least 27 3/4", the glide option must be used, and
the tolerances and glide adjustments on the panels and pedestals must provide
sufficient clearance for the pedestal height. (In applications where the mobile pedestal
will be moved frequently, the G-Series pedestal or the lower A-Series pencil/box/file
combination is preferable to the tight fit of the A-Series 27 3/4"-high pedestals.)
All A-Series freestanding storage units are available without locks as well as with
individually keyed locks or keyed-alike locks.
L
F-Front Pedestal, Freestanding
FAF10. Stationary
FAF11. Mobile
Description
This freestanding pedestal fits below a
and has recessed oval pulls.
The actual depth of a stationary
pedestal is 19 5/8", 23 1/2", or 28"; the
actual depth of a mobile pedestal is
19 5/8" or 23 1/2". A file drawer holds
letter-size front-to-back hanging files; an
EDP drawer holds EDP-size side-to-side
hanging files. Glides adjust a stationary
pedestal 1/2"; feet raise a stationary
pedestal 1" and include 1/2" adjustable
glides and additional counterweights.
The mobile pedestal has black umber
casters.
Dimensions
For all stationary pedestals:
• Heights are 23 3/8" and 26 3/8".
12 1/4".
• Depths are nominal 20", 24", and 28";
actual depths are 19 5/8", 23 1/2", and
28"; interior depths are 16 1/2", 20 1/
8", and 24 5/8".
For pencil/box/file mobile pedestals:
12 1/4".
• Depths are nominal 20" and 24";
actual depths are 19 5/8" and 23 1/2";
interior depths are 16 1/2" and
20 1/8".
For file/file and box/box/file mobile
pedestals:
12 1/4".
20 1/8".
L
This freestanding pedestal offers a
choice of two 12" file drawers; one 3"
pencil drawer, one 6" box drawer, and
one 15" EDP file drawer; or two 6" box
drawers and one 12" file drawer in a
stationary pedestal. This freestanding
pedestal also offers two 12" file drawers;
one 3" pencil drawer, one 6" box drawer,
and one 12" file drawer; or two 6" box
mobile pedestal.
pedestal and an adjacent work surface
support panel is 5/8", and 1 1/2" for an
When used with squared-edge or
radiused-edge work surfaces, most 20"and 24"-deep pedestals require a work
surface at least 24" deep; and most 28"deep pedestals require a 30"-deep work
surface. When used with Ethospace
work surfaces, the cable management
trough along the back edge of the work
surface takes up some of the room at
the rear; therefore, only 20"-deep
pedestals can fit under 24"-deep work
surfaces, and most 24"-deep pedestals
fit under a 30"-deep work surface. See
“Limitations” for exceptions to these
general guidelines.
FREESTANDING PEDESTALS:
FOR PLACEMENT
To assure that the top of the stationary
pedestal will be flush with the underside
of the work surface, specify the
stationary pedestal with the raised-feet
option.
A mobile pedestal can be converted to a
stationary one—with either glides or
raised feet—by ordering the appropriate
service parts.
Options
drawers separately:
MOBILE PEDESTALS:
ON CASTERS
FOR EASY MOBILITY
drawers separately:
L
drawers separately:
Order optional File Drawer Organizer
To convert a mobile pedestal to a
stationary one, order the appropriate
service parts:
To convert to the glide option, order:
• Pop rivet, service part no. 134826
• Anti-tip glide, service part no. 134835
• Glide, service part no. 241795
• Glide nut, service part no. 241871
To convert to a raised-foot option, order:
• Raised foot, service part no. 241886
• Leveler glide, service part no. 241872
• Screw, service part no. 134827
Limitations
F-front freestanding pedestals cannot fit
below the following products:
• Ethospace round-end peninsula with
access or 25 1/2"-high rectangular
peninsula (pedestal feet won’t fit;
pedestal glides will fit)
• Some Arrio freestanding work surface
sizes (See the “Freestanding Pedestal
File Clearance” matrix in the Arrio
Freestanding Systems Furniture
surfaces.)
The 20"-deep freestanding pedestal
cannot fit below the Newhouse Group
machine return or table with adjustable
keyboard tray.
The 24"- and 28"-deep freestanding
pedestals (stationary and mobile)
cannot fit below the following products:
• Action Office 60"-wide work surface
• Newhouse Group table desk, machine
return, or table with adjustable
keyboard tray
• Relay table desk or display, highperformance, or computer surface
table desk
L
The 24"-deep stationary pedestal also
cannot fit below a 24"-deep Ethospace
work surface unless a pencil/box/file
pedestal is specified; the 28"-deep
pedestal cannot fit below a 30"-deep
Ethospace work surface unless a pencil/
box/file pedestal is specified.
The 24"-deep mobile pedestal also
• Newhouse Group furniture
• Ethospace 24"-deep work surfaces or
rectangular peninsulas, unless a
pencil/box/file configuration is
specified
• Action Office freestanding tables,
unless a pencil/box/file configuration
is specified
L
H-Front Pedestal, Freestanding
FAH10. Stationary
FAH11. Mobile
Description
and has applied arc pulls.
pedestal is 19 5/8", 23 1/2", or 28";
the actual depth of a mobile pedestal
is 19 5/8" or 23 1/2". A file drawer holds
letter-size front-to-back hanging files; an
EDP drawer holds EDP-size side-to-side
hanging files. Glides adjust a stationary
pedestal 1/2"; feet raise a stationary
pedestal 1" and include 1/2" adjustable
glides and additional counterweights.
The mobile pedestal has black umber
casters.
Dimensions
• Heights are 23 3/8" and 26 3/8".
12 1/4".
28"; interior depths are 16 1/2",
20 1/8", and 24 5/8".
For pencil/box/file mobile pedestals:
12 1/4".
20 1/8".
For file/file and box/box/file mobile
pedestals:
12 1/4".
20 1/8".
L
choice of two 12" file drawers; one 3"
pencil drawer, one 6" box drawer, and
one 15" EDP file drawer; or two 6" box
stationary pedestal. This freestanding
pedestal also offers two 12" file drawers;
one 3" pencil drawer, one 6" box drawer,
and one 12" file drawer; or two 6" box
mobile pedestal.
FOR PLACEMENT
general guidelines.
option.
service parts.
Options
drawers separately:
MOBILE PEDESTALS:
ON CASTERS
FOR EASY MOBILITY
drawers separately:
L
drawers separately:
Order optional File Drawer Organizer
service parts:
Limitations
H-front freestanding pedestals cannot fit
peninsula (pedestal with feet won’t fit;
pedestal with glides will fit)
surfaces.)
keyboard tray.
keyboard tray
table desk
L
The 24"-deep stationary pedestal also
cannot fit below a 24"-deep Ethospace
work surface unless a pencil/box/file
pedestal is specified; the 28"-deep
pedestal cannot fit below a 30"-deep
Ethospace work surface unless a pencil/
box/file pedestal is specified.
rectangular peninsulas, unless a
pencil/box/file configuration is
specified
• Action Office freestanding tables,
unless a pencil/box/file configuration
is specified
L
J-Front Pedestal, Freestanding
FAJ10. Stationary
FAJ11. Mobile
Description
and has applied D-shaped pulls. A file
drawer holds letter-size front-to-back
hanging files.
pedestal is 19 5/8", 23 1/2", or 28";
the actual depth of a mobile pedestal
is 19 5/8" or 23 1/2". Glides adjust a
stationary pedestal 1/2"; feet raise a
stationary pedestal 1" and include 1/2"
adjustable glides and additional
counterweights. The mobile pedestal
has black umber casters.
Dimensions
12 1/4".
20 1/8", and 24 5/8".
For all mobile pedestals:
12 1/4".
20 1/8".
choice of two 12" file drawers or two 6"
box drawers and one 12" file drawer.
L
FOR PLACEMENT
general guidelines.
option.
MOBILE PEDESTALS:
ON CASTERS
FOR EASY MOBILITY
service parts.
Options
drawers separately:
drawers separately:
service parts:
L
Limitations
J-front freestanding pedestals cannot fit
peninsula (pedestal with feet won’t fit;
pedestal with glides will fit)
surfaces.)
keyboard tray.
• Ethospace work surfaces, 24"- and
30"-deep, respectively
keyboard tray
table desk
rectangular peninsulas
L
G-Series Pedestals
All G-Series pedestals are designed to be visually compatible with all Herman Miller
Front Styles
G-Series pedestals offer two different drawer fronts:
only.
• The C-front option has centered, recessed pulls and can be specified either with a
solid-color finish or with recut or natural veneer drawer fronts.
G-SERIES PEDESTALS
B-FRONT OPTION:
FULL-WIDTH,
RECESSED PULLS
C-FRONT OPTION:
CENTERED,
RECESSED PULLS
Stationary Pedestal Storage
G-Series stationary pedestals are available only in a 20" nominal depth, with three
combinations of 6" box and 12" file drawers.
G-Series stationary pedestals have adjustable glides (1/2" adjustment) that
compensate for variances in carpeting or differences in types of flooring. In addition to
the height-adjustable glides at the back, G-Series stationary pedestals have anti-tip
feet at the front.
All 20"-deep pedestals can be stored beneath any Herman Miller panel-hung work
surface.
The 12"-high file drawer accommodates front-to-back, letter-size hanging files and
side-to-side letter-, legal-, and A4-size files when equipped with a pedestal file
converter.
Each stationary pedestal is shipped with an integral counterweight for stability.
L
Mobile Pedestal Storage
G-Series mobile pedestals offer one configuration (with one 6" box and one 12" file
drawer) and are available in a nominal 20" depth. The file drawer accommodates
front-to-back, letter-size hanging files and side-to-side letter-, legal-, and A4-size files
when equipped with a pedestal file converter.
Dual-wheel casters, field installed, are for use on either carpeted or hard floors.
Any G-Series mobile pedestal can be stored beneath a 24"- or 30"-deep Herman
Miller work surface at a nominal 29" sit-down height, as long as the installation
tolerances and glide adjustments allow for the pedestal height. In applications where
the mobile pedestal will be moved frequently, G-Series pedestals (or the lower ASeries pencil/box/file combination) are preferable because of the tight fit of some of
the higher A-Series pedestals.
G-Series freestanding storage units are available only with individually keyed locks or
keyed-alike locks; they are not available without locks.
L
B-Front Pedestal, Freestanding
G5110.B Stationary (Box/File)
G5111.B Mobile (Box/File)
G5130.B Stationary (File/File)
G5120.B Stationary (Box/Box/File)
Description
This lockable, freestanding pedestal fits
below a hanging or freestanding work
surface and has full-width, recessed
pulls. A file drawer holds letter-size frontto-back hanging files.
The actual pedestal depth is 19 5/8",
23 1/2", or 28"; the actual depth of a
mobile pedestal is 19 5/8". A stationary
pedestal has 1/2" adjustable glides. The
mobile pedestal has black umber
casters.
Dimensions
For box/file stationary pedestals:
12 1/4".
• Depth is nominal 20"; actual depth is
19 5/8"; interior depth is 16 1/2".
For box/file mobile pedestals:
12 1/4".
For box/box/file and file/file stationary
pedestals:
12 1/4".
20 1/8", and 24 5/8".
Because of its lower height, the box/file
pedestal can be used under most
hanging work surfaces, even ones at
machine height.
L
between a pedestal and an adjacent
work surface support panel is 5/8"; a
1 1/2" distance is required for an
Options
drawers separately:
FOR PLACEMENT
drawers separately:
Limitations
File/file and box/box/file stationary
pedestals cannot fit below the following
products:
• Ethospace 25 1/2"-high rectangular
peninsula
surfaces.)
The file/file and box/box/file drawer
configurations are not available in a
mobile pedestal.
L
MOBILE PEDESTALS:
ON CASTERS
FOR EASY MOBILITY
C-Front Pedestal, Freestanding
G5111.C Mobile (Box/File)
G5130.C Stationary (File/File)
G5120.C Stationary (Box/Box/File)
Description
This lockable, freestanding pedestal fits
below a hanging or freestanding work
surface and has centered, recessed
19 5/8". A file drawer holds letter-size
front-to-back hanging files.
A stationary pedestal has 1/2"
adjustable glides. The mobile pedestal
has black umber casters. Pulls on a file
with a solid color front match the front
finish; pulls on a file with a veneer front
match the case finish.
Dimensions
For box/file mobile pedestals:
12 1/4".
For box/box/file and file/file stationary
pedestals:
• Width is 14 5/8; interior width is
12 1/4".
Because of its lower height, the box/file
pedestal can be used under most
hanging work surfaces, even ones at
machine height.
between a pedestal and an adjacent
work surface support panel is 5/8"; a
1 1/2" distance is required for an
Options
drawers separately:
L
drawers separately:
Limitations
File/file and box/box/file stationary
pedestals cannot fit below the following
products:
• Ethospace 25 1/2"-high rectangular
peninsula
surfaces.)
FOR PLACEMENT
The file/file and box/box/file drawer
configurations are not available in a
mobile pedestal; the box/file drawer
configuration is not available in a
stationary pedestal.
MOBILE PEDESTALS:
ON CASTERS
FOR EASY MOBILITY
L
Freestanding Lateral File Storage
Freestanding lateral files are available in nominal 30", 36", and 42" widths and in
A-Series and G-Series, each with their distinctive drawer front styles. The A-Series
line offers an additional product—a four-drawer lateral file with a flipper door unit on
top. Freestanding lateral files accommodate letter-, legal-, and A4-size paper and
suspension files. Inside drawer height clearance (the maximum height for filing
materials) is 10 7/8"; the interior height of the drawer side is 9 1/2".
Lateral files include 5/8" adjustable leveling glides, drawer labels and label holders,
and a side-to-side hanger bar for suspended files. All freestanding lateral files convert
to front-to-back filing with separate freestanding lateral file converters. (Front-to-back
filing provides the maximum filing inches for letter-size papers.) In addition, the
removable file drawer organizer can be used in any lateral file drawer set up for lettersize filing to store items other than files.
A positive interlock system allows only one drawer to be opened at a time. Each
freestanding lateral file must be further stabilized either with a freestanding lateral file
counterweight or by anchoring the file to an adjacent file or wall; knockouts and
ganging hardware are included for that purpose.
The two-drawer lateral file can be located under a work surface of any depth where
the clearance height of the work surface exceeds the height of the lateral file and the
width is less than the clearance between the work surface supports.
L
Filing Capacity Provided by Freestanding Lateral Files
This chart shows total filing inches and configurations for freestanding lateral file
drawers. Front-to-back and side-to-side dimensions are given for letter-, legal-, and
A4-size documents. The illustrations show the filing configurations used to reach
those capacities.
30" WIDE
36" WIDE
42" WIDE
26 fi«•"
32 fi«•"
38 fi«•"
SIDE-TO-SIDE
LEGAL, A4,
LETTER
2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED
2 CONVERTERS AND
1 ADAPTER REQUIRED
6 ⁄«•"
2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED
FRONT-TO-BACK
LETTER
16 ⁄«¢"
16 ⁄«¢"
1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED
FRONT-TO-BACK
A4 WITH LEGAL
16 ⁄«¢"
16 ⁄«¢"
2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED
16 ⁄«¢"
1 CONVERTER
REQUIRED
10 ⁄«™"
(LEGAL)
4 ⁄«¢"
2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED
(LEGAL)
10 ⁄«™"
16 ⁄«¢"
2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED
2 CONVERTERS
REQUIRED
6 ⁄«™"
FRONT-TO-BACK
LEGAL
16 ⁄«¢"
L
16 ⁄«¢"
16 ⁄«¢"
Total Filing Inches for Freestanding Lateral Files
30" Wide
36" Wide
42" Wide
Side-to-Side
Legal, A4, Letter
Per drawer
2 Drawer
3 Drawer
4 Drawer
Flipper Door
26 5⁄8"
53 1⁄4"
79 7⁄8"
106 1⁄2"
130 5⁄8"
32 5⁄8"
65 1⁄4"
97 7⁄8"
130 1⁄2"
160 5⁄ 8"
38 5⁄8"
77 1⁄4"
115 7⁄8"
154 1⁄2"
190 5⁄8"
Front-to-Back Letter
Per drawer
2 Drawer
3 Drawer
4 Drawer
32 1⁄2"
65"
97 1⁄2"
130"
38 5⁄8"
77 1⁄4"
115 7⁄8"
154 1⁄2"
48 3⁄4"
97 1⁄2"
146 1⁄4"
195"
Front-to-Back A4
with Legal
Per drawer
2 Drawer
3 Drawer
4 Drawer
32 1⁄2"
65"
97 1⁄2"
130"
36 3⁄4"
73 1⁄2"
110 1⁄4"
147"
43"
86"
129"
172"
Front-to-Back Legal
Per drawer
2 Drawer
3 Drawer
4 Drawer
26 3⁄4"
53 1⁄2"
80 1⁄4"
107"
32 1⁄2"
65"
97 1⁄2"
130"
39"
78"
117"
156"
L
A-Series Lateral Files
All A-Series lateral files are designed to be visually compatible with all Herman Miller
Front Styles
A-Series lateral files offer three different drawer fronts:
handles and also causes minimal obstruction in tight places. Specifying the
recessed pull upside down helps accommodate users with limited hand mobility,
and specifying the recessed pull in a contrasting color aids workers with visual
impairment.
than most applied pulls. The H-front option for pedestals comes in a solid-color
finish only.
A-SERIES LATERAL FILES
F-FRONT OPTION:
CENTERED, RECESSED,
OVAL PULLS
L
H-FRONT OPTION:
APPLIED ARC PULLS
J-FRONT OPTION:
D-SHAPED PULLS
Sizes
A-Series freestanding lateral files are available in nominal 30", 36", and 42" widths,
with two, three, or four drawers, or with four file drawers and a flipper door above
them. Behind the flipper door is a pull-out shelf with three dividers (more can be
added) for holding and separating nonhanging files, books, and binders, or other
similar items.
4-DRAWER LATERAL FILE
WITH FLIPPER DOOR
A-Series lateral files come with adjustable glides or—for two-drawer lateral files
only—the option of raised feet with adjustable glides. (The raised feet add 1 1/8" to
the unit’s height.)
All A-Series freestanding storage units are available without locks as well as with
individually keyed locks or keyed-alike locks.
L
F-Front Freestanding Lateral File
FAF22. 2 Drawers
FAF23. 3 Drawers
FAF24. 4 Drawers
FAF25. 4 Drawers with Flipper Door
Description
This lateral file holds letter-, legal-,
and A4-size hanging files. It has
recessed oval pulls, 1/2" adjustable
glides, and a positive interlock system
that permits only one drawer or pull-out
shelf to open at a time. The actual file
depth is 19 5/8".
The actual file width is 29 5/8", 35 5/8",
or 41 5/8". Raised feet, available on twodrawer units only, raise the file 1" and
have 1/2" adjustable glides and a
counterweight.
Dimensions
Widths are nominal 30", 36", and 42";
actual widths are 29 5/8", 35 5/8", and
41 5/8"; interior widths are 26 1/8",
32 1/8", and 38 1/8".
MUST BE ANCHORED,
GANGED TO ANOTHER
FILE, OR STABILIZED
WITH COUNTERWEIGHT
Heights are 26 3/8" (2 drawers), 38 3/4"
(3 drawers), 51 1/8" (4 drawers), and
64 1/2" (4 drawers with flipper door).
Depth is nominal 20"; actual depth is
19 5/8".
The two-drawer lateral file can be
located under a work surface of any
depth that is at least 29" high. The width
of the lateral file must be less than the
clearance between the work surface
supports.
The glides have a 5/8" adjustment range
to compensate for uneven floors. The
raised-foot option adds 1 1/8" of
adjustment to the height of the twodrawer file; the glides used with the
raised feet also have a 5/8" adjustment
range.
L
GLIDES PROVIDE fi«•"
ADJUSTMENT RANGE
W
CLEARANCE BETWEEN WORK
SURFACE SUPPORTS MUST BE
EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN
WIDTH OF LATERAL FILE TO USE
FILE BENEATH WORK SURFACE
Each freestanding lateral file must be
anchored, ganged to another file, or
stabilized with a counterweight. When
two 42"-wide files with four drawers or
two 42"-wide files with four drawers and
a flipper door are ganged side to side, a
counterweight must also be attached to
each.
The counterweight may be specified as
a permanent, factory-installed option on
any freestanding file or as a separate,
field-installed option.
Options
Order the optional File Converter,
Freestanding Lateral File (FAA20.),
separately to convert side-to-side filing
to front-to-back filing.
Order the optional File Compressor
(G5914.) for the pull-out shelf
separately.
(B4961.) separately.
Order the Counterweight (G5935.)
separately if not specified as a
permanent, factory-installed option.
L
H-Front Freestanding Lateral File
FAH22. 2 Drawers
FAH23. 3 Drawers
FAH24. 4 Drawers
FAH25. 4 Drawers with Flipper Door
Description
This lateral file holds letter-, legal-,
and A4-size hanging files. It has
applied arc pulls, 1/2" adjustable glides,
and a positive interlock system that
permits only one drawer or pull-out shelf
to open at a time. The actual file depth is
19 5/8".
counterweight.
Dimensions
32 1/8", and 38 1/8".
MUST BE ANCHORED,
GANGED TO ANOTHER
FILE, OR STABILIZED
WITH COUNTERWEIGHT
19 5/8".
supports.
range.
L
ADJUSTMENT RANGE
W
each.
Options
separately.
L
J-Front Freestanding Lateral File
FAJ22. 2 Drawers
FAJ23. 3 Drawers
FAJ24. 4 Drawers
FAJ25. 4 Drawers with Flipper Door
Description
This lateral file holds letter-, legal-, and
A4-size hanging files. It has applied Dshaped pulls, 1/2" adjustable glides, and
a positive interlock system that permits
only one drawer or pull-out shelf to open
at a time. The actual file depth is 19 5/8".
counterweight.
Dimensions
32 1/8", and 38 1/8".
MUST BE ANCHORED,
GANGED TO ANOTHER
FILE, OR STABILIZED
WITH COUNTERWEIGHT
19 5/8".
supports.
range.
L
ADJUSTMENT RANGE
W
each.
Options
separately.
L
G-Series Lateral Files
All G-Series lateral files are designed to be visually compatible with all Herman Miller
Front Styles
G-Series pedestals and lateral files offer two different drawer fronts:
only.
• The C-front option has centered, recessed pulls and can be specified either with a
solid-color finish or with recut or natural veneer drawer fronts.
G-SERIES LATERAL FILES
B-FRONT OPTION:
FULL-WIDTH,
RECESSED PULLS
C-FRONT OPTION:
CENTERED,
RECESSED PULLS
Sizes
G-Series freestanding lateral files are available in nominal 30", 36", and 42" widths,
with two, three, or four drawers.
Lateral files come with adjustable glides that compensate for uneven floors but do not
significantly affect the height of the file.
G-Series freestanding storage units are available only with individually keyed locks or
keyed-alike locks; they are not available without locks.
L
B-Front Freestanding Lateral File
G5210.B 2 Drawers
G5220.B 3 Drawers
G5230.B 4 Drawers
Description
This lockable lateral file holds letter-,
legal-, and A4-size hanging files. It has
full-width, recessed pulls; 1/2" adjustable
glides; and a positive interlock system
that permits only one drawer to open at
a time. The actual file depth is 19 5/8".
or 41 5/8".
Dimensions
32 1/8", and 38 1/8".
MUST BE ANCHORED,
GANGED TO ANOTHER
FILE, OR STABILIZED
WITH COUNTERWEIGHT
(3 drawers), and 53 1/2" (4 drawers).
19 5/8".
supports.
ADJUSTMENT RANGE
to compensate for uneven floors.
two 42"-wide files with four drawers are
ganged side to side, a counterweight
must also be attached to each.
W
L
Options
L
C-Front Freestanding Lateral File
G5210.C 2 Drawers
G5220.C 3 Drawers
G5230.C 4 Drawers
Description
This lockable lateral file holds letter-,
legal-, and A4-size hanging files. It has
centered, recessed pulls; 1/2" adjustable
glides; and a positive interlock system
that permits only one drawer to open at
a time. The actual file depth is 19 5/8".
or 41 5/8". Pulls on a file with a solid
color front match the front finish; pulls on
a file with a veneer front match the case
finish.
Dimensions
32 1/8", and 38 1/8".
MUST BE ANCHORED,
GANGED TO ANOTHER
FILE, OR STABILIZED
WITH COUNTERWEIGHT
(3 drawers), and 53 1/2" (4 drawers).
19 5/8".
supports.
ADJUSTMENT RANGE
to compensate for uneven floors.
two 42"-wide files with four drawers are
ganged side to side, a counterweight
must also be attached to each.
W
L
Options
L
File Converter, Freestanding Lateral
File
FAA20.
Description
These black umber brackets convert any
freestanding lateral file drawer to hold
letter, legal-, and A4-size front-to-back
hanging files. Two converters are used
per drawer. Package contains four.
The file converter package for the 36"wide file includes two file adapters to
maximize filing capacity; use one
adapter per drawer.
Dimensions
Available to fit 30"-, 36"-, and 42"-wide
drawers.
FILE CONVERTER
Two file converters are required in each
drawer for front-to-back, letter-size filing.
One end of the hanging file attaches
over the converter, the other over the
side of the file drawer. In wider drawers,
where there is a middle front-to-back
row of files, the files hang over both
converters.
The file converter package for 36"-wide
files also includes two file adapters to
maximize filing capacity for letter-size
filing (use one adapter per drawer).
L
IN MIDDLE ROW,
FILES HANG
BETWEEN 2
CONVERTERS
FOR END ROWS,
FILES ATTACH
OVER DRAWER
SIDE AND
CONVERTER
Counterweight
G5935.
Description
This counterweight attaches to the
inside back of a freestanding lateral file
to stabilize a file that is not anchored or
ganged to another file.
The counterweight for a 30"-wide file
includes two plates; the counterweight
for a 36"- or 42"-wide file includes four
plates.
Dimensions
Width is 11".
Height is 19".
Counterweights may be specified as a
permanent, factory-installed option on
files or—by specifying this product
number—as a separate product for field
installation.
L
COUNTERWEIGHTS
STABILIZE FILE
WHEN NOT ANCHORED
OR GANGED
Display Components Introduction
Display Components
Introduction
The Action Office system provides both tackable and writing surfaces for the vertical
display of information in office and conference areas. There are also clips and
hangers to hold artwork, presentation papers, drawings, coats, umbrellas, and other
items on a vertical panel surface.
Tackboards are available in the rounded-corner A-style, as well as the rolled-edge
B-style for tackboards and marker boards.
L
Display Components
A-Style Tackboard
AO610.
Description
This tackboard displays notes,
photographs, or art. It has a fabric
surface and includes attachment
hardware.
This single-sided tackboard attaches to
a panel or wall strip.
Dimensions
Heights are 11 1/2", 15 1/2", 30", and
48". (The 30" height is available only in
a 30" width; the 48" height is available
only in 24" and 48" widths. The 11 1/2"
height is not available in a 36" width.)
Widths are 24", 30", 36", 48", and 60".
Tackboards can be suspended at any
height.
ATTACHES TO PANELS OR
WALL STRIPS
TASK LIGHT
15 ⁄«™"
TACKBOARD
11 ⁄«™"
TACKBOARD
(ALLOWS ROOM FOR
TOOL BAR BELOW)
TOOL BAR
WORK SURFACE
AT HEIGHT OF 29"
L
Display Components
A-Style Marker Board
AO630.
Description
This board attaches to a panel or wall
strips and has a white, erasable writing
surface. It includes a 20"-wide tray and
attachment hardware.
Dimensions
Available in three sizes:
• 24" high by 48" wide
In placing the marker board, allow
clearance for the 2 7/8"-deep marker/
eraser trough.
ATTACHES TO PANELS
OR WALL STRIPS
The tray is always 20" wide, regardless
of the width of the marker board.
20"-WIDE
TRAY ON
MARKER
BOARD OF
ANY WIDTH
L
PROTRUDES 2 ‡«•"
FROM WALL OR PANEL
Display Components
Display Clip
AO640.
Description
This clip hangs from the top of a panel
to hold notes, drawings, or presentation
papers. Finish is medium tone. Package
contains two.
Dimensions
Width is 2 1/2".
Height is 2 1/4".
HOOKS OVER RECTANGULAR
PANEL TOP CAP AT ANY POINT
ALONG PANEL WIDTH
Depth is 3".
Because the portion of the display clip
that hooks over the top is squared, the
display clip can be attached only to
panels with rectangular top caps.
The display clip can be attached at any
point along the panel width.
Limitations
The display clip cannot be used on a
panel with an oval top cap.
L
Display Components
B-Style Tackboard
A3410.
Description
This tackboard attaches to a panel or
wall strips to display notes, photographs,
or art. It has a fabric surface and
includes attachment hardware.
Dimensions
Available in 12", 16", 20", 30", and 48"
heights and in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48",
and 60" widths.
The 30" height is available only in a 30"
width; the 48" height is available only in
a 48" width.
ATTACHES TO PANELS OR
WALL STRIPS
Tackboards can be suspended at any
height.
TASK LIGHT
20"
TACKBOARD
16"
TACKBOARD
(ALLOWS ROOM FOR
TOOL BAR BELOW)
TOOL BAR
WORK SURFACE
AT HEIGHT OF 29"
L
Display Components
B-Style Marker Board
A3510.
Description
This board attaches to a panel or wall
strips and has a white, erasable writing
surface. It includes a 20"-wide tray and
attachment hardware.
Dimensions
Available in three sizes:
In placing the marker board, allow
clearance for the 2 7/8"-deep marker/
eraser trough.
ATTACHES TO PANELS
OR WALL STRIPS
The tray is always 20" wide, regardless
of the width of the marker board.
20"-WIDE
TRAY ON
MARKER
BOARD OF
ANY WIDTH
L
PROTRUDES 2 ‡«•"
FROM WALL OR PANEL
Lighting Introduction
Lighting
Introduction
Herman Miller offers users a range of task lighting options to address performance
requirements and cost issues in properly illuminating today’s office. These products
address not only illumination, but also the issues of energy efficiency, energy codes,
and visual performance requirements for paper tasks and the computer environment.
L
Lighting Issues
Although intensity, or quantity of light, is an important variable in determining task
visibility, the quality of light actually has the greater impact. Quality of light, in terms of
task visibility, is primarily related to the angle at which light strikes a task. Light from
some angles can reduce task visibility, creating what is referred to as veiling
reflections (reflected glare). With proper optical control, veiling reflections can be
reduced and visual performance enhanced.
REFLECTED GLARE
Optical control is typically a function of the task light lens or a series of lenses and
reflectors. When light passes through a well-designed and molded acrylic lens, it can
be redirected at specifically designed angles. The proprietary lens used in Herman
Miller’s standard and energy-efficient task lights significantly reduces veiling
reflections by directing light onto the task from the appropriate angles. As well as
providing high-quality illumination on the task, it also contains a series of prisms that
eliminates any direct brightness if the task light is mounted above eye level. The
Lumisoft task lights use dual, injection-molded batwing lenses, a metal shield, and an
internal reflector to produce a patented optical system that delivers virtually glare-free
illumination. The panel-mounted task light uses a pair of lenses that control the
brightness of the fixture, if it is used above eye level, and provides a very high quality
of task-level illumination.
L
Planning Considerations for Lighting
In office environments, several different types of lighting should be considered
together to produce optimal comfort and productivity. These include general
illumination, task lighting, daylight, and accent and display lighting.
General Lighting
General lighting provides background illumination for the entire office. Typically, it
consists of recessed fluorescent fixtures, providing direct illumination. General lighting
can also be provided by indirect fixtures that are pendent-mounted from the ceiling,
integrated into the furniture, or wall mounted. Indirect fixtures illuminate the ceiling,
which, in turn, reflects the light back down into the office space. Indirect lighting is
sometimes referred to as ambient lighting, but technically any type of general
illumination can be referred to as ambient lighting.
DIRECT LIGHTING—
PROJECTS LIGHT DIRECTLY
DOWN INTO WORK SPACE
INDIRECT LIGHTING—
REFLECTS LIGHT FROM CEILING
BEFORE LIGHT REACHES WORK SPACE
Before energy conservation and the use of computers in the office, general lighting
usually provided the intensity of light required for task performance. Today,
opportunities exist for lowering the lighting intensity levels from general lighting
systems if supplemental task lighting is provided at all task locations. Lower general
lighting levels can significantly reduce energy loads and often create better visual
environments, especially for computer tasks. The advent of electronic ballasts and
long-life lamps has also enabled task lighting products to deliver the highest levels of
visual performance and the greatest degree of lighting efficiency.
L
Task Lighting
Task lighting illuminates a specific work area within a work space. Current office
lighting standards suggest the use of low-level general illumination (20 to 50 footcandles), supplemented by task lights to increase the illuminance level at specific
task locations. For this application, the quality of light that illuminates the task is
critical for good task visibility. Task lighting should utilize the best available optical
control to avoid veiling reflections and direct glare when a task light is mounted
above eye level.
Offices with intensive computer usage require special considerations. When
illumination for a paper task is adjacent to a computer screen, high-quality light is
especially important and dimming control is a useful option. Providing lower lighting
levels on the paper task may be helpful to balance the brightness between the two
tasks for maximum comfort and performance, especially with dark-background
computer screens.
DIRECTS LIGHT ONTO
WIDE WORK AREA
Under-shelf task lights may not be useful with a computer located directly beneath
the same shelf. The task light will primarily light the top of the monitor and perhaps
create too much light in the area surrounding the computer. Eliminating the shelf
above the monitor allows enough general lighting to surround the computer to create
a better balance of brightness for the eye.
LOW-LEVEL LIGHTING FROM SIDE
IDEAL FOR LIGHTING PAPERWORK
NEXT TO COMPUTER
L
Daylight
While natural light in an office can have very positive psychological effects on
workers, it must be used carefully or controlled to offset the dangers it poses.
Daylight can cause severe vision problems, as it may produce glare, veiling
reflections, and adaptation problems.
Adaptation is the function of the eye adapting to various levels of brightness.
Although the eye can adapt to tremendous variations of brightness, viewing
brightness extremes simultaneously within a specific field of view can cause eye
strain, fatigue, and a reduction of visual performance. (Sunlight is typically 100 times
brighter than interior illumination levels. Even after passing through tinted glass,
sunlight that strikes dark surfaces, such as carpeting, can exceed comfortable
brightness recommendations. A cloudy sky can be 1,000 times brighter than a
computer screen.)
BRIGHTNESS OF DAYLIGHT IS
NEARLY 1,000 TIMES THAT OF
COMPUTER SCREEN
To maintain the benefits of natural light and avoid the problems its excessive
brightness can produce, careful planning and placement of furniture and equipment
are required. Additionally, selection of window treatment and workstation orientation
are critical.
Selective placement of panels can provide an effective means of blocking excessive
brightness and controlling views. In workstations that contain computers, care
should be taken to avoid direct views of windows and sunlight or the reflection of
daylight onto the computer screen.
Accent and Display Lighting
Accent and display lighting is used in the office environment to add visual interest
and to create appropriate visual cues. Light can be used to define space, create a
sense of orientation, and provide highlight and shadow, allowing for greater visual
clarity. Accent and display lighting can entail using wall washing to highlight a
vertical surface or using an under-shelf light to accent a display shelf. This type of
lighting is especially important in offices using indirect lighting for general
illumination. Such offices otherwise appear flat, dull, and uninteresting.
L
Task Lighting Products
Lamp
All Herman Miller linear task lights use energy-efficient fluorescent lamps. The lamp
is a T8, rapid-start lamp (265 ma., tri-phosphor), often referred to by its various trade
names or designations as Octron (Osram-Sylvania) or Trimline (General Electric).
The color temperature is 3,500 degrees Kelvin, which represents a neutral color
temperature between warm and cool.
A typical fixture, for use beneath a 48" shelf, uses a 36", 25-watt lamp, 5 watts less
than a T12 lamp at 30 watts. This lamp also has fuller spectral distribution, which
provides better color rendition; its color-rendition index is about 75. The life of this
lamp is rated at 20,000 hours, based on operating the lamp for three hours every
time it is started. With longer operating time per start, lamp life increases.
Lens
The basic task light uses an acrylic prismatic lens, which obscures the lamp and
diffuses light. Its primary application is for secondary work surfaces and display
areas.
Herman Miller’s standard task light and energy-efficient task light use an injectionmolded, proprietary, batwing lens. This custom-designed, optical-control lens
provides high-quality illumination across the work surface and limits direct fixture
brightness when mounted above eye level. The transaction surface task light also
uses a batwing lens. The Lumisoft task light uses dual, injection-molded batwing
lenses; a metal shield; and an internal reflector to produce a patented optical system
that delivers virtually glare-free illumination. The panel-mounted task light adds an
overlay to a batwing lens to diffuse the light from the fluorescent tube over the entire
surface of the batwing lens. This improves the quality of light and reduces direct
fixture brightness.
ELEVATION
BATWING LENS
PLAN VIEW
WORK SURFACE
BATWING LENS
DIRECTS LIGHT AT
AN ANGLE TO MINIMIZE
REFLECTED GLARE
L
Task Light Choices
• Basic task light: A utilitarian housing/lens package. A basic task light for use
in display areas and secondary task areas; developed to respond to situations
requiring an economical initial cost. The fixture uses a T8, 3500K, rapid-start lamp,
a prismatic lens, and a normal-power-factor magnetic ballast.
• Standard task light: A task light for general applications providing high-quality
illumination across the work surface. This fixture utilizes a batwing lens; a T8,
3500K, rapid-start lamp; and a normal-power-factor magnetic ballast.
• Energy-efficient task light: A task light for general applications with minimum
energy use that provides high-quality illumination across the work surface. This
fixture will meet any local or state energy codes and utilizes a batwing lens; a T8,
3500K, rapid-start lamp; and a high-power-factor magnetic ballast. Options include
an electronic ballast for additional energy savings and a three-level dimming
option.
• Lumisoft task light: A highly energy-efficient task light that provides task-level
illumination with virtually no direct or reflected glare. This fixture uses dual highperformance batwing lenses, an energy-efficient electronic ballast, and a T8,
3500K, fluorescent lamp rated at 20,000 hours of operation. It can be specified
with a three-way dimmer and an occupancy sensor. The light is available as a
standard linear task light or as part of a chain of one starter light and up to seven
add-on lights that can be powered from a single receptacle, yet retain their
independent on-off function.
• Panel-mounted task light: A highly energy-efficient linear task light that delivers
high-quality task lighting in systems environments that do not have overhead
storage components for attachment. It uses a batwing lens with an overlay, an
electronic ballast, and a T8, 3500K, fluorescent lamp.
• Pavo portable task light: A portable task light with the capability to be mounted
where needed (on a panel or frame, on the back or side edge of a work surface,
or on a freestanding base on a work surface) and be positioned to place
illumination exactly where needed. The Pavo task light uses a computer-designed
asymmetrical reflector that provides side-angle light distribution. The optical
system is augmented by an ergonomic fixture that is articulated to allow the light
to be directed for completely glare-free illumination. The task light uses only a 13watt lamp to deliver 100 foot-candles of illumination on a task and has articulated
arms and a grab ring for positioning the fixture.
• Transaction surface task light: A light that mounts under an Action Office
transaction surface or an Arrio desktop shelf unit to provide uniform illumination
across a work surface. This fixture uses a batwing lens, an electronic ballast, and
a T8, 3500K, fluorescent lamp.
In addition, Herman Miller’s task light offering includes an adapter that allows task
lights to be mounted under storage/display shelves.
L
Lighting
Task Light, Basic
G6130.
G6131. (Chicago)
Description
This light mounts under a flipper door
unit or shelf to light a work surface. It
has a normal-power-factor ballast and
includes a T8 lamp with a 3500° Kelvin
color temperature. The light is UL listed
and CSA certified. Mounting hardware
and three cord management clips are
included.
The 24"-wide light includes one preheat
fluorescent lamp; 30"- to 60"-wide lights
include one rapid-start fluorescent lamp.
The 60"-wide light can be specified only
with a 60"-wide flipper door unit or shelf;
smaller lights cannot mount under 60"wide storage products.
Dimensions
24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and 60" shelf and
flipper door unit widths.
This basic task light is designed to
deliver lighting for use in display areas
and for secondary work surfaces. It
diffuses light with an acrylic prismatic
lens and uses a housing with visible
screws, making it the least expensive of
Herman Miller task lights and
particularly suitable for bid situations.
The basic task light has a 7' grounded
cord set that exits at the rear right
corner and an on/off rocker switch
located at the back right of the fixture’s
exposed surface. (The Chicago version
has a 6' cord set with a fuse plug.)
Basic task lights are available to meet
specialized municipal or national
electrical requirements.
L
Lighting
Limitations
The basic task light delivers a relatively
low-quality illumination, resulting in low
visual performance. It uses an acrylic
prismatic lens, which diffuses light but
cannot distribute it at specific angles to
reduce glare and minimize veiling
reflections.
The 24"-wide task light, with its preheat
fluorescent lamp, does not match the
color rendition of the other sizes of this
basic task light.
L
Lighting
Task Light, Standard
G6150.
G6151. (Chicago)
G6153. (New York City)
Description
unit or shelf to uniformly light a work
surface. It has a normal-power-factor
ballast and includes a T8 lamp with a
3500° Kelvin color temperature and
batwing lens. The light is UL listed and
CSA certified. Mounting hardware and
three cord management clips are
included.
Dimensions
24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and 60" shelf and
This standard task light is designed to
deliver inexpensive, highly uniform,
general-purpose task lighting. It uses an
acrylic, injection-molded batwing lens to
project light across a user’s field of
vision, reducing glare and minimizing
veiling reflections.
DIFFUSES LIGHT
OVER ENTIRE
WORK SURFACE
The standard task light has a 7'
grounded cord set that exits at the rear
right corner and an on/off rocker switch
located at the back center of the light.
(The Chicago version has a 6' cord set
with a fuse plug.)
The 24"-wide light is most effective if it
is used in conjunction with other lights,
where it can be supplemented with
spillover illumination from adjacent
lights.
L
Lighting
Standard task lights are available to
meet specialized municipal or national
Limitations
The 24"-wide task light, with its preheat
fluorescent lamp, does not match the
color rendition of the other sizes of this
standard task light.
L
Lighting
Task Light, Energy Efficient
G6120.
G6121. (Chicago)
G6123. (New York City)
Description
surface. It has an energy-efficient highpower-factor, magnetic ballast or an
electronic ballast and includes a T8
lamp with a 3500° Kelvin color
temperature and batwing lens. The light
is UL listed and CSA certified. Mounting
hardware and three cord management
clips are included.
Dimensions
24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and 60" shelf and
flipper door unit widths; nominal 24"wide task light available only with highpower-factor ballast without dimmer.
LIGHTS ENTIRE
WORK SURFACE
This task light is designed to deliver a
very high degree of energy-efficient,
highly uniform, general-purpose task
lighting. It uses an acrylic, injectionmolded batwing lens to project light
across a user’s field of vision, reducing
glare and minimizing veiling reflections.
This task light is available with either a
high-power-factor, magnetic ballast (with
or without dimming) or an electronic
ballast without dimming. The highpower-factor, magnetic ballast with trilevel dimming provides a significant
reduction in electrical consumption.
L
Lighting
The energy-efficient task light has a 9'
right corner and an on/off rocker switch
located at the back center of the light.
(The Chicago version has a 6' cord set
with a fuse plug.)
The 24"-wide light is most effective if it is
used in conjunction with other lights,
where it can be supplemented with
spillover illumination from adjacent
lights.
Energy-efficient task lights are available
to meet specialized municipal or national
L
Lighting
Lumisoft Task Light
G6140. Standard
G6141. Standard (Chicago)
G6142. Daisy Chain Starter
G6143. Daisy Chain Add-On
Description
surface. It has an electronic ballast, T8
lamp with a 3500° Kelvin color
temperature, and dual batwing lenses.
The light also has a patented optical
system that effectively eliminates glare.
It is UL listed and CSA certified.
This light is available with a three-step
dimmer and an occupancy sensor to
automatically turn the light on and off.
smaller lights cannot mount under 60"wide storage products. The standard
and daisy chain starter lights have two
cord management clips; the daisy chain
add-on light has one.
LIGHTS ENTIRE WORK SURFACE
The daisy chain system allows a run of
lights to be operated from a single
power source. A series of add-on lights
is plugged into one starter light to
operate up to eight lights from a single
outlet; each light has an independent on/
off switch. The daisy chain add-on light
has a 24" cord.
Dimensions
30", 36", 42", 48", and 60" shelf and
L
Lighting
This task light is designed to deliver the
highest quality of energy-efficient, highly
uniform task lighting. The daisy chain
starter and add-on lights are designed
for use in situations where a single
receptacle must be used to power
multiple lights. (The power source for the
add-on light is a daisy chain starter task
light or an add-on light attached to a
daisy chain starter task light.) Because a
daisy-chain configuration requires fewer
receptacles for lighting, it can reduce
significantly the number and expense of
powered panels specified for a work
station.
The Lumisoft task light uses an internal
reflector to diffuse the direct output of
the lamp and redirect the light through
two acrylic, injection-molded batwing
lenses; this reduces glare and minimizes
veiling reflections by keeping light from
passing directly from the lamp to the
task area. With its high-power-factor
electronic ballast, it also provides a
significant reduction in electrical
consumption.
This high-performance task light has a
and an on/off rocker switch located at
the center of the light. The standard task
light has a 9' cord set that exits at the
center and can be routed to either the
left or the right. (The Chicago version
has a 9' cord set with a four-amp fuse
plug.) The daisy chain starter also has a
9' cord set, but it exits on either the left
or the right, depending on which is
specified. (The exit location and plug-in
location of the cord can be reversed
later in the field.) The cord set on the
add-on task light is 24" long; it also exits
on either the left or the right, depending
on which is specified. (The exit location
and plug-in location of the cord can be
reversed later in the field.)
L
Lighting
This high-performance task light has an
electronic ballast, with or without threelevel dimming. It is also available with an
occupancy sensor option that
automatically turns the light on and then
off after an office is unoccupied for 15
minutes. The dimming mechanism and
the occupancy sensor also play a role in
reducing electrical consumption.
Each standard Lumisoft task light
requires its own receptacle; it cannot be
used as a starter light to power Lumisoft
add-on task lights in a chain. The
Lumisoft starter and add-on task lights
are required for that configuration.
Each starter task light requires its own
receptacle; but it can be used as a
starter lamp to power add-on Lumisoft
task lights in a chain.
Up to eight task lights (one daisy chain
starter and seven add-on lights) can be
powered from one receptacle; each light
is turned on and off independently,
including the starter light.
The starter light must be the first in the
sequence of lights, with the other lights
to either the right or the left, depending
on the cord exit location specified. In
specifying the right-hand starter light,
the cord exit location is on the right-hand
side of the light at the rear and the addon lights are plugged in on the left. The
left-hand starter light has the cord exit
location on the left and the add-on lights
to the right.
STARTER LIGHT
MUST BE FIRST
IN SEQUENCE
REAR
ADD-ON
ADD-ON
STARTER
FRONT
UP TO 7
ADD-ON LIGHTS
INDEPENDENT
ON/OFF FUNCTION
24"
MAXIMUM OF 24"
(FROM CORD EXIT
LOCATION TO
PLUG-IN LOCATION)
ADD-ON
(RIGHT EXIT)
STARTER
(RIGHT EXIT)
STARTER
(LEFT EXIT)
ADD-ON
(LEFT EXIT)
REAR
FRONT
ADD-ON LIGHTS CAN BE ADDED
AT LEFT OR RIGHT, BUT NOT BOTH
(CAN BE REVERSED IN FIELD)
If the configuration of the lighting
changes or the lights are used in
another location, however, the cord exit
and plug-in locations on all the lights
can be reversed and the add-on lights
can be reattached in the opposite
direction.
Although shorter task lights can be used
beneath wider flipper door units or
shelves, a maximum of 24" (from cord
exit location to plug-in location) is
allowed between a daisy chain starter
and adjacent add-on task lights that
must be linked.
L
Lighting
A version of the standard task light is
available to meet Chicago municipal
codes; the standard task light meets
electrical requirements for most other
municipal or national codes, particularly
New York City and Canada.
Limitations
There is no Lumisoft task light to fit
beneath 24"-wide flipper door units
or shelves.
The daisy chain starter and add-on
task lights do not meet Chicago, New
York City, or San Francisco municipal
codes; however, they meet specialized
electrical requirements for most other
municipal or national codes.
L
Lighting
Task Light, Transaction Surface
G6220.
G6221. (Chicago)
Description
This light mounts under an Action Office
transaction surface or Arrio desktop
shelf unit to uniformly light a work
surface. It has an electronic ballast,
T8 lamp with a 3500° Kelvin color
temperature, and batwing lens. The light
cannot be used with an Ethospace
transaction surface or 24"-wide Action
Office Series 1 or Series 2 transaction
surface. It is UL listed and CSA certified.
Dimensions
Available in nominal 20", 38", and 53"
widths; actual widths are 20 3/4", 38",
and 53 1/8" respectively.
ATTACHES TO
UNDERSIDE OF
TRANSACTION
SURFACE
This task light is intended to provide
uniform lighting for task areas under an
Action Office transaction surface or an
Arrio desktop shelf unit. It uses an
acrylic extruded batwing lens to bounce
light across a user’s field of vision,
reducing glare and minimizing veiling
reflections. With its electronic ballast, it
provides a significant reduction in
electrical consumption.
This task light has a 6' grounded cord set
that exits at the rear center of the light
and an on/off switch located at the back
center of the light. (The Chicago version
has a 6' cord set with a fuse plug.)
For Action Office Series 1 and Series 2
Transaction Surfaces:
The transaction surface can accept any
transaction surface task light that is
narrower in width. The exception is the
24"-wide transaction surface, which
cannot accept any task light.
For Action Office Series 3 Transaction
Surfaces:
In selecting the appropriate-width task
light, allowance must be made for any
overhanging ends on the transaction
surface and any clearance taken up by
dimension-adding connectors. The chart
below recommends the appropriate task
light width for each transaction surface.
L
Lighting
Transaction
Surface
Width
Task Light
Width
24"-37"
42"
43"
48"-55"
60"
62"
67"-86"
20"
38"*
20"
38"*
53"*
38"*
53"*
* A shorter task light can also fit,
but it provides less illumination.
For Ethospace Transaction Surfaces:
Ethospace transaction surfaces cannot
accept any transaction surface task
lights.
For Arrio Desktop Shelf Units:
The chart below recommends the
appropriate task light width for each
Arrio desktop shelf unit.
Desktop
Shelf Unit
Width
Task Light
Width
24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
20"
20"
20"
38"*
38"*
* The 20"-wide task light can also fit,
but it provides less illumination.
Transaction surface task lights are
available to meet specialized municipal
or national electrical code requirements.
Limitations
The transaction surface task light cannot
be used with an Ethospace transaction
surface or a 24"-wide Action Office
Series 1 or Series 2 transaction surface.
L
Lighting
Panel-Mounted Task Light
G6230.
G6231. (Chicago)
Description
This light hangs from an Action Office
panel or Ethospace frame to uniformly
light a work surface. It has an electronic
ballast, T8 lamp with a 3500° Kelvin
color temperature, and batwing lens with
an overlay. The light has a 9/16" cord
that exits from the left or right side. It is
UL listed and CSA certified. Mounting
hardware and two cord management
clips are included.
A wider light can mount on a narrower
panel or frame.
Dimensions
Available in nominal widths to match
standard 30", 36", 42", 48", and 60"
modular panel and frame widths.
Cord extends 9/16" beyond edge of light
at point of cord exit.
This task light is intended to light task
areas that do not have a flipper door unit
or shelf above them that will accept an
undershelf task light.
Because the mounting hardware can be
placed at any position along the back of
the light, the task light can be mounted
off-module on a panel or frame that is
narrower than the light. This allows a
longer light to be centered, but extend
beyond the sides of the panel or frame
to which it is attached, or to extend offcenter beyond one or both sides of a
panel or frame. This task light can also
span adjacent panels or frames whose
widths equal the width of the task light.
This task light is designed to deliver the
highest quality of energy-efficient, highly
uniform, general-purpose task lighting.
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE
IN 1" INCREMENTS
BETWEEN 12"-24"
24"
PANELS
24"
24"
42"
42" LIGHT, CENTERED
ON 24"-WIDE PANEL
24"
24"
24"
42"
42" LIGHT, POSITIONED
OFF-MODULE
L
Lighting
This task light uses an internal reflector
to diffuse the direct output of the lamp;
the light is redirected through an acrylic
overlay and an extruded batwing lens
with a series of precise optical prisms
that direct light at angles to reduce glare
and minimize veiling reflections. With its
high-power-factor electronic ballast, it
also provides a significant reduction in
electrical consumption.
The panel-mounted task light can be
mounted at any height, in 1" increments,
in the slots in the hanger rails at the
sides of a panel or frame. (For effective
lighting, however, the bottom of the light
fixture should be between 12" and 24"
above the work surface; 16" is
recommended.) The light can be
specified to hang on either Action Office
panels or Ethospace frames, but the
brackets for the task light are not
interchangeable between the systems.
(Brackets for mounting the light on
another Herman Miller system are
available as replacement parts. Action
Office panel brackets can be substituted
in the field for the Ethospace frame
brackets, and vice versa, by ordering the
replacement brackets directly from the
Herman Miller customer service
representative at Garcy/SLP, 1-800-2217913.)
This task light has a 9' grounded cord
set that exits at either the left or the right
end plate and an on/off rocker switch
located at the top right of the light.
L
Lighting
Because the cord extends 9/16" beyond
the end of the light, certain planning
considerations must be observed to
prevent obstructions:
• Two panel-mounted task lights
mounted adjacent to one another at
the same height must be specified so
that the cords exit at the outside end
of each.
• When a panel-mounted task light is
mounted next to a flipper door unit or
shelf or to an Action Office tackboard,
the cord must exit on the side
opposite the hanging component.
• The cord cannot exit at the corner of
the workstation in any Ethospace
corner configuration or in an Action
Office Series 3 corner configuration
with an adjacent flipper door unit,
shelf, or tackboard. (This applies
whether the panels or frames are of
equal height or of unequal heights
with a change-of-height finished end.)
• When a flipper door unit, shelf, or
Action Office tackboard is used in the
corner of a corner configuration, a
panel-mounted task light on the
corner’s perpendicular wall must be at
a height that does not interfere with
the depth of the flipper door unit,
shelf, or tackboard.
Panel-mounted task lights are available
to meet specialized municipal or national
Limitation
In certain corner configurations, in
certain change-of-height configurations,
or in certain configurations carrying
flipper door units, shelves, or
tackboards, there is not sufficient
clearance for the task light cord to exit.
See the planning considerations for
specific planning guidelines to deal with
these situations.
CORDS MUST EXIT
AT OUTSIDE ENDS
ADJACENT PANEL-MOUNTED
TASK LIGHTS AT SAME HEIGHT
PANEL-MOUNTED TASK LIGHT
NEXT TO FLIPPER DOOR UNIT
OR SHELF OR ACTION OFFICE
TACKBOARD
CORD CAN EXIT
AT CORNER
CORD CANNOT
EXIT AT CORNER
PANEL-MOUNTED
TASK LIGHT
PANEL-MOUNTED
TASK LIGHT
ETHOSPACE CORNER
CONFIGURATION
PANEL-MOUNTED
TASK LIGHT
ACTION OFFICE CORNER
CONFIGURATION
ADJACENT HANGING
COMPONENT
ACTION OFFICE SERIES 3 PANELS—
CORD CANNOT EXIT AT CORNER
ACTION OFFICE SERIES 1 AND 2
PANELS—CORD CAN EXIT AT CORNER
ACTION OFFICE CORNER CONFIGURATION
WITH ADJACENT FLIPPER DOOR UNIT,
SHELF, OR TACKBOARD
PANEL-MOUNTED TASK LIGHTS
FLIPPER
DOOR UNIT
L
CORD MUST EXIT OPPOSITE
HANGING COMPONENTS
PANEL-MOUNTED TASK LIGHT
AND HANGING COMPONENT ON
PERPENDICULAR WALL MUST
BE AT DIFFERENT HEIGHTS
Lighting
Pavo Portable Task Light
G6420.
Description
This light hangs from a panel or frame,
clamps to a hanging or freestanding
work surface, or sits on a work surface.
It has a 13-watt compact fluorescent
lamp, a grab ring on the fixture head,
and adjustable arms that allow light to
be directed. The arms extend up to 24"
and rotate 360°. The fixture head pivots
up 90°, down 40°, and rotates 360°. The
arm pivot joints and base are black; the
fixture head end plates, fixture head
attachment, and arms are neutral accent
colors. The light is UL listed and CSA
certified.
The light cannot clamp to the side of a
Newhouse Group table desk, back of a
24"-deep Newhouse Group table desk,
or side of a Flex-Edge work surface. The
light cannot be panel or frame mounted
in an Action Office Series 3 or
Ethospace 90° corner.
Dimensions
Height of arm is 20" (two segments of 8"
and 12"); height of light housing is
3 1/4".
Depth of housing is 8 1/4"; with grab ring
and pivot head, depth is 11 1/2". Depth
of horizontal arm extension is 8".
Width of housing is 9 1/2"; with grab
ring, width is 15 1/4".
Clamp mounting base is 2" wide, 4"
(nominal) deep, and 5 1/2" high.
Freestanding base is nominal 11 1/2"
wide and 7 1/2" deep.
Panel or frame mounting base is 2" wide
and 3 1/4" high.
L
Lighting
This task light is suitable in a number of
situations: where totally glare-free
illumination is required (because of the
difficulty of the task or the importance of
speed and accuracy to the task), where
glossy materials are used, where there
are no shelves to which a linear, highperformance task light can be mounted,
and where task lighting is required on
freestanding work surfaces.
3 MOUNTING OPTIONS
Because it can be specified to mount in
the slots of a hanger rail on a panel or
frame, to clamp onto a work surface, or
to be used freestanding on a work
surface, the portable task light provides
many options for positioning the fixture
to provide glare-free illumination, for
supplementing or replacing traditional
under-shelf task lighting, or for providing
lighting where traditional task lights
cannot be used.
The panel- or frame-mounted version
comes with two brackets—one for
mounting the light into the hanger rail
slot on the left side of the panel and one
for mounting the light into the vertical
hanger rail slot on the right side of the
panel. Because the combination of the
bracket and the base of the fixture’s
mounting arm extends across both
hanger rail slots and slightly onto the
adjacent panel or frame, no hanging
components can be hung adjacent to
the task light bracket.
The panel- or frame-mounted version
can be mounted at any height, in 1"
increments, in the vertical hanger rails at
the sides of the panel or frame. It can be
specified to hang on either Action Office
panels or Ethospace frames, but the
brackets for the task light are not
interchangeable between the systems.
(The brackets for mounting the light on
Action Office panels can be substituted
in the field for the Ethospace frame
brackets, and vice versa, by ordering the
replacement brackets directly from the
L
MOUNT ON PANEL
OR FRAME
CLAMP TO
WORK SURFACE
SIT FREESTANDING
ON WORK SURFACE
HANGING COMPONENTS CANNOT
BE ATTACHED ADJACENT TO
PANEL-MOUNTED LIGHT
BRACKET AND ARM BASE
EXTEND BEYOND HANGER
RAIL SLOT ADJACENT TO
ONE BEING USED FOR
MOUNTING LIGHT
Lighting
The clamp version can attach to all
Herman Miller freestanding or hanging
work surfaces. It can be attached at
nearly any point along the back or sides
of the work surface. (See “Limitations”
for the few exclusions or restrictions.) No
matter where the light is attached,
however, it is critical to position the
fixture head so that it does not bounce
light directly into the worker’s eyes,
causing reflected glare.
For glare-free illumination, the fixture
head should be placed to the side of the
task, with the head of the fixture in a
direction parallel to the task. (See
illustration at right.) The fixture head
should also be parallel to the surface
being illuminated (see illustration at
right) and be at or slightly below eye
level. (On the panel-mounted version,
the armature bracket should be attached
close to the work surface for easiest
positioning and for positioning the fixture
head close enough to the work surface
to prevent glare in the worker’s eyes.)
POSITIONING OF PORTABLE TASK LIGHT
PARALLEL TO
ILLUMINATED SURFACE
TO SIDE OF, AND
PARALLEL TO, TASK
To prevent the user from obstructing the
illumination while working, the head of
the fixture should be mounted to the left
if the worker is right handed and to the
right if the worker is left handed. (See
illustration at right.)
To aid in positioning the light over the
work surface, the articulated arms allow
the head to be adjusted over a radius of
24" (maximum). The grab ring encircling
the head is used to position the light for
effective illumination. (The arm has a
tension adjustment at each pivot joint
that allows the fixture to be tightened to
lock it into place or remain looser for
easier repositioning.)
RIGHT HANDED—FIXTURE HEAD TO LEFT
LEFT HANDED—FIXTURE HEAD TO RIGHT
With the appropriate service parts,
a panel-mounted, clamp, or freestanding
version can be transformed into any one
of the other versions. (These service
parts are ordered directly from the
L
Lighting
This task light has a computer-designed
optical system that provides superior
asymmetrical light distribution, without
direct or reflected glare. It features an
energy-efficient 13-watt compact
fluorescent lamp. It has a 120-volt
magnetic ballast with a disconnect
feature for easy routing of the cord and
plug.
It has a 9' cord set, in addition to the 24"
of cord that follows the contours of the
dual articulating arms; an on/off rocker
switch is located in the back center on
the fixture head.
This task light meets electrical
requirements for most municipal and
national codes, particularly Chicago,
New York City, and Canada.
CLAMP MUST ALIGN
WITH CUTOUTS
Limitations
The portable task light cannot be
mounted in the slotted hanger strips at
the 90° juncture of two Action Office
Series 3 panels or Ethospace frames.
In clamping the task light to the back of
an Ethospace work surface, the clamp
must be positioned to align with one of
the cutouts in the trough.
TROUGH
ETHOSPACE
WORK SURFACES
The Pavo task light cannot clamp onto
the side of a wall-attached or Arrio work
surface at the point where the work
surface support or leg is attached or
onto the side of a wall-attached work
surface when a work surface support
panel is used.
On Newhouse Group table desks, the
light cannot be clamped to the side of
any work surface because of the
interference caused by the legs. The
light also cannot be clamped to the back
of a 24"-deep Newhouse work surface
but can attach at the cable port opening.
(The clamp does decrease the amount
of room left for cable passage.) The light
cannot be clamped to the side of a FlexEdge work surface.
L
Lighting
Display Shelf Adapter, Task Light
G6191.
Description
These dark tone adapters are used to
mount a task light under an A- or B-style
storage/display shelf. Two adapters are
required for mounting the task light.
Package contains two.
Dimensions
Height is 6 1/2".
Depth is 9 5/8".
The adapter can be used with a basic,
standard, or energy-efficient task light.
The task light requires two adapters for
mounting.
PERMITS TASK LIGHT UNDER
STORAGE/DISPLAY SHELF
TO PROVIDE NORMAL
WORK SURFACE LIGHTING
This adapter can accommodate any size
task light.
Limitations
This adapter cannot be used with the
Lumisoft task light.
L
Machine Support Tools Introduction
Machine Support
Tools
Introduction
Herman Miller provides a variety of freestanding and work surface-attached products
to support the use of computers and other electronic equipment in offices. The
products are adjustable, designed for the maximum amount of individual control. They
can be a crucial element in employers’ efforts to make the workplace more
accommodating for people with disabilities, as well as for the increasing number of
workers who spend long hours working on computers.
L
Ergonomic and Planning Considerations for Machine
Support Tools
Herman Miller machine support tools take into account not only the variety and
amount of electronic equipment in a modern office, but also the human factors related
to how effectively a worker can use that equipment. At the heart of these products is
the ability to position the user, the equipment, and the documents in the right
relationship to one another—for ease of viewing and ease of use. Often, machine
support tools are used in conjunction with specialty work surfaces (such as heightadjustable work surfaces or ones with platforms to hold monitors), lighting, work tools,
and seating to address the needs of the electronic office place.
Achieving a more effective working environment through the use of machine support
tools involves a number of issues:
Distance from Monitors and Documents
Monitors and documents that are too close to the worker require extra effort for near
focusing; likewise, distances too great may make them hard to see. While a distance
of 20" to 30" between the user and the equipment or documents is generally
recommended, being able to meet personal preferences or the needs of multiple
users is ideal. As the median age of the U.S. work force increases, there is likely to be
a corresponding increase in the number of workers who want to view the monitor
screen from further away to lessen eye fatigue.
IDEAL DISTANCE: 20"–30"
Herman Miller machine support tools, like document stands, equipment support
stands, keyboard trays, and their supporting adjustable armatures, allow the user to
properly align—and quickly reposition—documents and equipment to meet personal
preferences or physiological needs. Keyboard trays and platforms, for example,
incorporate a gravity-lock system that allows workers to set the position of their
keyboard anywhere along a roughly 6" range of travel. They also offer extended, dualswivel arms that allow keyboard trays and platforms to fit into tight, L-shaped
configurations; and a choice of long and short tracks that allows these machine
support tools to be installed on narrower or irregularly shaped work surfaces.
L
Range of User Sizes
Situations like shared workstations, multi-shift operations, and free-address offices
mean that a number of users, in a range of sizes and shapes, are likely to be using
the same workstation at any given time for perhaps a wide range of tasks.
SAME STATION, 2 DIFFERENT PEOPLE
Adjustable keyboard trays—especially ones with a wide range of movement—make it
easy to accommodate various sizes of users without changing the height of the work
surface. (The extended arms on Herman Miller’s keyboard trays have an 8" vertical
range.) The capability to adjust the keyboard tray allows a worker to avoid awkward
postures by properly adjusting the keyboard to achieve neutral postures, which put the
least amount of strain on body parts; the adjustable keyboard tray also minimizes
awkward reaches or twisting motions by bringing the keyboard closer to the body.
Products like Scooter® stands and turntables allow for shared use of equipment or
enable a work area to be set up quickly to handle inputting.
Alternatives to Keyboarding
Now that computer use is common among workers of all types and at all levels,
keyboards are no longer the sole input device. Over 95 percent of the personal
computers currently sold can operate a mouse as well. Many workstations, however,
force users to operate the mouse from awkward positions that increase their risk of
injury.
OVEREXTENDED
POSITION
AWKWARD
POSITION
Herman Miller offers a number of mouse tray options that attach either to keyboard
trays or platforms directly or beneath the work surface.
L
Various Input Postures
Computer users work in a variety of postures. Depending on the task being
performed, the person’s stature, the type of chair being used, personal preference,
and other factors, the worker can be sitting in a rigid posture, a reclined position, or
any position between these two extremes. The posture chosen can have an effect on
the angle of the keyboard tray or platform. For example, setting the keyboard at a
negative angle when working from an upright posture is an acceptable position and is
becoming more common. As a result, Herman Miller keyboard trays and platforms
incorporate 30 degrees of tilt in the trays (+15/-15 degrees from the neutral position).
NEED FOR KEYBOARD TRAY TO CHANGE
ANGLE OF KEYBOARD TO MATCH SEATED POSTURE
Workers with Special Needs
As the U.S. work force ages and its median age increases, the incidence of users with
limited grip is rising. (This limited-grip problem can also be one of the frequent results
of carpal tunnel surgery.) Similarly, the diversity of that work force has added more
workers to the lower end of the anthropometric scale and workers of smaller stature
can experience problems adjusting keyboard trays. Most of these problems are
related to supporting the weight of the keyboard and tray while adjusting the height of
the product. This weight can, in extreme cases, be in excess of 15 pounds.
Recognizing these problems, Herman Miller has incorporated into its product line
mechanisms that can address these issues.
Several Herman Miller input-device support products are available with an alternative
to the standard knob. A paddle mechanism allows workers with limited grip strength or
similar problems to adjust their keyboard tray or platform—difficult or impossible for
them to do in the past.
All Herman Miller keyboard trays and platforms also include an internal spring that
assists the user in adjusting the height of the product. The spring, in conjunction with
the single adjustment knob, simplifies the adjustment process for all workers.
While providing solutions to these needs is not the sole domain of machine support
tools, they can play a significant role in providing ergonomic benefits to workers.
L
Machine Support Tools
Keyboard Holder with Palm Rest,
Fully Adjustable
G7719.
Description
This black umber holder attaches to a
rectangular or corner work surface to
hold a detached keyboard. It has an
extended-length arm that extends 8".
The holder has horizontal and tilt
adjustments and swivels for storage
beneath the work surface. It tilts over a
30° range (-15° to +15°) and has an 8"
vertical range; a padded palm rest
adjusts vertically over a 1 1/8" range.
The holder adjusts for keyboards 5 1/2"
to 9" deep. Attachment hardware is
included. Shipped knocked down.
The holder is available with a 17 3/4"- or
21"-long track. The paddle option allows
easier adjustment for individuals with
limited grasping ability.
Dimensions
Palm rest width is 19 1/2".
8" VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT
12 ‹«¢"
Depth is 12 3/4" (from front edge of
palm rest to back edge of clamps).
Length of track is 21" for standard track,
17 3/4" for short track.
This keyboard holder uses rubber-tipped
clamps that adjust to the depth of the
keyboard. Since the holder clamps to
the keyboard, it keeps the keyboard
from slipping backward when positioned
at a negative angle.
TILT -15Å TO +15Å
PADDED PALM REST
(1 ⁄«•" VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT)
CLAMPS
ADJUST
TO FIT
KEYBOARDS
5 ⁄«™" TO
9" DEEP
The clamp mechanism of the holder is
particularly suited to small corners,
since it requires only enough space for
the keyboard itself (there is no tray).
The extended-length arm on the
keyboard holder allows the keyboard
holder to clear the adjacent edges of a
36"-wide corner work surface or
provides additional extension wherever
needed.
The shorter track allows the keyboard
holder to fit beneath narrower-depth
work surfaces.
L
The keyboard holder, with either a knob
or a paddle adjustment, extends 6"
below the bottom of the work surface in
its stored position.
The palm rest is independently
adjustable, allowing the user to adjust
the height to accommodate any
keyboard thickness or personal work
preference.
This fully adjustable keyboard holder
provides a great deal of flexibility in
accommodating workers who are in
wheelchairs or who have physical
challenges. The paddle option allows
easier vertical adjustment for individuals
with grasp limitations. This keyboard
holder also provides the highest level of
adjustment for workers who spend much
of their workday at a computer.
The keyboard holder can be used with
the following work surfaces:
• 36"-, 42"-, and 48"-wide corner work
surfaces
• 24"- and 30"-deep hanging
rectangular systems work surfaces
(holder may not completely fit under a
24"-deep work surface for storage,
especially with the shorter track)
• all peninsula work surfaces
• all 30"- and 36"-deep Action Office
rectangular freestanding work
surfaces
• some Arrio freestanding work surface
sizes (See the "Attaching Machine
Support Tools” matrix in the Arrio
surfaces.)
An optional mouse tray can be attached
to the side of the keyboard holder.
Options
Order the optional Mouse Tray,
Keyboard Tray Attached, Clamp Tray
(G7740.C), separately.
L
Limitations
The keyboard holder can be used with
24"-deep freestanding work surfaces
and with returns only if the short track is
ordered.
The keyboard holder may not completely
store under a 24"-deep work surface,
even with the short-track option.
L
Keyboard Platform, Extended Dual
Swivel, with Standard Tray
G7720.T
Description
This platform attaches to a rectangular
or corner work surface to support a
detached keyboard. It has an extendedlength arm that extends 8". The platform
has horizontal, vertical, and tilt
adjustments and swivels for storage
beneath the work surface. It tilts over a
30° range (-15° to +15°) and has a
spring-assisted arm to ease the 8"
vertical adjustment. Swivel points at both
ends of the arm allow a variety of
positions while remaining parallel with
the edge of the work surface. The
platform is predrilled for a mouse tray.
PIVOT
POINTS
DUAL-SWIVEL ARM
ALLOWS 18" PIVOT
TO LEFT OR RIGHT
8" VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT
TILT -15Å TO +15Å
The platform is available with a 17 3/4"or 21"-long track.
10" DEEP
Dimensions
Width is 22".
Depth is 10".
The two swivel points on this keyboard
platform—one at each end of the
armature—allow users to pivot the
keyboard about 18" to the right or left
while still keeping it parallel to the edge
of the work surface. This dual swivel and
the extended-length arm enable the user
to position the keyboard to either side for
left- or right-handed mousing. The
platform can be mounted in tight corners
formed by rectangular work surfaces, or
on work surfaces with irregular or curved
edges. On systems work surfaces with
different depths, the dual pivots allow a
computer to be placed at either end or
both ends of the work surface and a
keyboard platform to be mounted under
the work surface between them; the
keyboard platform can be oriented either
way.
L
DUAL-SWIVEL ARM
ALLOWS KEYBOARD TO
CLEAR TIGHT 90Å ANGLES…
…AND IRREGULAR
OR CURVED EDGES
platform to fit beneath narrower work
surfaces.
The keyboard platform extends 6" below
the bottom of the work surface in its
stored position.
The dual-swivel keyboard platform
provides a high degree of flexibility for
challenges. It also provides the highest
level of adjustment for workers who
spend much of their workday at a
computer.
The keyboard platform can be used with
surfaces
surfaces
• some Arrio freestanding rectangular
work surface sizes and front edge
configurations (See the “Attaching
Machine Support Tools” matrix in the
surfaces.)
This standard-tray version can accept an
optional palm rest.
An optional mouse tray, ordered
separately, can be attached to the side
of the keyboard platform.
Options
Order the optional Palm Rest, Keyboard
Tray (G7790.), separately.
Keyboard Tray Attached, Standard Tray
(G7740.T), separately.
L
Limitations
ordered.
The keyboard platform may not
completely store under a 24"-deep work
surface, even with the short-track option.
L
Keyboard Platform, Extended Dual
Swivel, with Clamp Tray
G7720.C
Description
This black umber platform attaches to a
rectangular or corner work surface to
support a detached keyboard. It has an
extended-length arm that extends 8".
The platform has horizontal, vertical,
and tilt adjustments and swivels for
storage beneath the work surface. It tilts
over a 30° range (-15° to +15°) and
adjusts for keyboards 5 1/2" to 9" deep.
The spring-assisted arm eases the 8"
vertical adjustment. Swivel points at both
ends of the arm allow a variety of
positions while remaining parallel with
the edge of the work surface.
8" VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT
PIVOT
POINTS
DUAL-SWIVEL ARM
ALLOWS 18" PIVOT
TO LEFT OR RIGHT
12 ‹«¢"
The platform is available with a 17 3/4"or 21"-long track.
TILT -15Å TO +15Å
Dimensions
Width is 19 1/2".
Depth is 12 3/4".
PADDED PALM REST
(1 ⁄«•" VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT)
The two swivel points on this keyboard
platform—one at each end of the
armature—allow users to pivot the
keyboard about 18" to the right or left
while still keeping it parallel to the edge
of the work surface. This dual swivel and
the extended-length arm enable the user
to position the keyboard to either side for
left- or right-handed mousing. The
platform can be mounted in tight corners
formed by rectangular work surfaces, or
on work surfaces with irregular or curved
edges. On systems work surfaces with
different depths, the dual pivots allow a
computer to be placed at either end or
both ends of the work surface and a
keyboard platform to be mounted under
the work surface between them; the
keyboard platform can be oriented either
way.
L
DUAL-SWIVEL ARM
ALLOWS KEYBOARD TO
CLEAR TIGHT 90Å ANGLES…
CLAMPS ADJUST
TO FIT KEYBOARDS
5 ⁄«™" TO 9" DEEP
KNOB ADJUSTS
HORIZONTAL AND
TILT MOVEMENT
…AND IRREGULAR
OR CURVED EDGES
platform to fit beneath narrower work
surfaces.
The keyboard platform with the clamp
tray uses rubber-tipped clamps that
adjust to the depth of the keyboard to
keep the keyboard from slipping
backward when positioned at a negative
angle. The clamp mechanism is suited to
small corners, since it requires only
enough space for the keyboard itself
(there is no tray). The clamp-tray version
also features an adjustable palm rest that
accommodates any keyboard thickness
or personal work preference.
The keyboard platform extends 6" below
stored position.
The dual-swivel keyboard platform
challenges. It also provides the highest
level of adjustment for workers who
spend much of their workday at a
computer.
surfaces
surfaces
• some Arrio freestanding rectangular
work surface sizes and front edge
configurations (See the “Attaching
surfaces.)
An optional mouse tray, ordered
separately, can be attached to the side
of the keyboard platform.
L
Options
Keyboard Tray Attached, Clamp Tray
(G7740.C), separately.
Limitations
ordered.
The keyboard platform may not
completely store under a 24"-deep work
surface, even with the short-track option.
L
Keyboard Tray, Fully Adjustable
G7715.
Description
This tray attaches to a work surface to
support a detached keyboard. It has
horizontal, vertical, and tilt adjustments
and swivels for storage beneath the
work surface. The tray tilts over a 30°
range (-15° to +15°) and has a standardor extended-length arm that is spring
assisted to ease vertical adjustment. It is
predrilled for a mouse tray. Attachment
down.
The standard-length arm extends 4" and
has a 5 3/4" vertical range. The
extended-length arm extends 8" and has
an 8" vertical range; it is available with a
17 3/4"- or 21"-long track. The paddle
option allows easier adjustment for
individuals with limited grasping ability.
Dimensions
Tray width is 22".
Tray depth is 10".
Standard-length arm (G7715.04)
extends 4" on 17 3/4"-long track, with
5 3/4" vertical range. Extended-length
arm (G7715.08) extends 8" on 21"-long
or 17 3/4"-long track, with 8" vertical
range.
The keyboard tray can be ordered with
either a standard-length arm or an
extended-length arm. The extendedlength arm allows the tray to clear the
adjacent edges of a 36"-wide corner
work surface or provide additional
extension wherever needed.
TILT -15Å TO +15Å
5 ‹«¢"
tray with extended-length arm to fit
beneath narrower-depth work surfaces.
Specify the extended-length arm for use
with corner work surfaces, 30"-deep
rectangular hanging work surfaces, or
Arrio concave corner table desks or
when greater arm extension is needed.
L
KEYBOARD TRAY LOCKS
IN POSITION IN USE
KEYBOARD STORES
WHEN NOT IN USE
SINGLE KNOB OR PADDLE ON
ARM MECHANISM FOR BOTH
HEIGHT AND TILT
ADJUSTMENTS
The keyboard tray with either a knob or
a paddle adjustment extends 6" below
stored position.
The fully adjustable keyboard tray
challenges. The paddle option allows
easier vertical adjustment for individuals
with grasp limitations. This keyboard tray
also provides the highest level of
adjustment for workers who spend much
of their workday at a computer.
The keyboard tray can be used with the
following work surfaces:
• 42"- and 48"-wide hanging corner
work surfaces; 36"-wide hanging work
surfaces (with extended-length arm
only)
(keyboard tray with extended-length
arm may not completely fit under a
surfaces and—with the standardlength arm—24"-deep freestanding
work surfaces
sizes and front edge configurations
(See the “Attaching Machine Support
Tools” matrix in the Arrio Freestanding
Systems Furniture Planning Guide to
determine compatibility with specific
work surfaces.)
The keyboard tray accepts the optional
palm rest to provide a soft front edge.
to the side of the keyboard tray.
Options
L
Limitations
The keyboard tray with extended-length
arm can be used with 24"-deep
freestanding work surfaces and with
returns only if the short track is ordered.
L
Keyboard Tray, Adjustable
G7716.
Description
This tray attaches to a work surface to
support a detached keyboard. It has
horizontal and tilt adjustments and
swivels for storage beneath the work
surface. The tray height is fixed at 2 1/4"
below the bottom of the work surface. It
is predrilled for a mouse tray.
TILT 0Å–15Å
3 ‹«•" FIXED
Dimensions
Tray width is 22".
Tray depth is 10".
Length of track is 17 3/4".
The adjustable keyboard tray tilts 15°
and extends 6" below the bottom of the
work surface in its stored position.
KEYBOARD STORES BENEATH
WORK SURFACE WHEN NOT IN USE
While it does not have a vertical
adjustment, the adjustable keyboard tray
offers some flexibility in accommodating
workers who are in wheelchairs or who
have physical challenges. It also offers
horizontal and tilt adjustments for
workers who spend much of their
workday at a computer.
The keyboard tray can be used with the
following work surfaces:
• all hanging corner work surfaces
• all freestanding Action Office
rectangular work surfaces
sizes and front edge configurations
(See the “Attaching Machine Support
Tools” matrix in the Arrio Freestanding
Systems Furniture Planning Guide to
determine compatibility with specific
work surfaces.)
The keyboard tray accepts the optional
palm rest to provide a soft front edge.
to the side of the keyboard tray.
L
Options
Limitations
The adjustable keyboard tray does not
have vertical adjustability.
L
Palm Rest, Keyboard Tray
G7790.
Description
This palm rest provides a soft contact
surface on the front edge of a keyboard
tray. Finish is black umber.
Dimensions
Width is 18".
The palm rest can be attached to most
Herman Miller keyboard trays.
Limitations
The palm rest cannot be used with the
following products:
• Extended dual-swivel keyboard
platform with clamp tray
• Fully adjustable keyboard holder with
palm rest
• Action Office keyboard drawer without
lock
• Burdick Group™ keyboard tray
• Scooter stand
L
SLIPS ONTO FRONT EDGE
OF KEYBOARD TRAY
Mouse Tray, Keyboard Tray Attached,
Standard Tray
G7740.T
Description
This tray attaches to a keyboard tray or
to an extended dual-swivel keyboard
platform with standard tray to support a
mouse or other input device. Its tilt
mechanism allows the tray to remain flat
when the keyboard holder is tilted. The
tray swivels for storage beneath the
keyboard and can be installed on the left
or right side. Attachment hardware is
included.
Dimensions
Width is 8"; depth is 8".
Mouse tray for standard tray fits flush to
keyboard tray and extends 8" from right
or left of keyboard tray.
CAN ALSO
ATTACH ON LEFT
The polycarbonate surface is conducive
to moving and tracking with an input
device.
ATTACHES TO KEYBOARD TRAY
OR EXTENDED DUAL-SWIVEL
KEYBOARD PLATFORM
30Å TILT
8"
8"
The keyboard product to which the
mouse tray attaches must be ordered
separately. These products include the
fully adjustable keyboard tray, the
adjustable keyboard tray, and the
extended dual-swivel keyboard platform
with standard tray.
Limitations
This mouse tray cannot be attached
directly to a work surface.
L
Mouse Tray, Keyboard Tray Attached,
Clamp Tray
G7740.C
Description
This tray attaches to a keyboard holder
with palm rest or to an extended dualswivel keyboard platform with clamp tray
to support a mouse or other input
device. Its tilt mechanism allows the tray
to remain flat when the keyboard holder
is tilted. The tray swivels for storage
beneath the keyboard and can be
installed on the left or right side.
Dimensions
Mouse tray for clamp tray extends 14",
15", or 16" from right or left of swivel
mechanism base (to fit different-size
keyboard trays).
The polycarbonate surface is conducive
to moving and tracking with an input
device.
This mouse tray with clamp tray can be
mounted in one of three positions,
depending on the width of the keyboard
being used.
CAN ALSO
ATTACH ON LEFT
30Å TILT
ATTACHES TO KEYBOARD HOLDER
OR EXTENDED DUAL-SWIVEL
KEYBOARD PLATFORM
TOTAL
EXTENSION
14"-16"
8"
8"
The keyboard product to which the
mouse tray attaches must be ordered
separately. These products include the
fully adjustable keyboard holder with
palm rest and the extended dual-swivel
keyboard platform with clamp tray.
Limitations
This mouse tray cannot be attached
directly to a work surface.
L
Mouse Tray, Work Surface Attached
G7741. Storable
G7742. Adjustable/Storable
Description
This tray attaches to a work surface and
supports a mouse or other input device.
It swivels for storage beneath the work
surface. The tray cannot be used with a
Flex-Edge work surface. Attachment
The storable tray has a horizontal
adjustment and a fixed height at 5/16"
below the bottom of the work surface.
The adjustable/storable tray has
horizontal and vertical adjustments; the
vertical adjustment is 5 3/4".
Dimensions
The adjustable/storable version has both
horizontal and vertical adjustments. The
storable version has only horizontal
adjustment.
5 ‹«¢" TOTAL
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
8"
8"
ATTACHES TO
WORK SURFACE
Limitations
The mouse tray should be positioned so
that it does not interfere with the
horizontal adjustability of any keyboard
tray that is also attached to the work
surface.
L
A-Style Keyboard Drawer
AO479.
Description
This drawer mounts under a panel-hung
or freestanding work surface to store a
detached keyboard. It cannot mount
under a 24"- or 30"-wide rectangular
work surface or a 36"-wide corner work
surface. Mounting hardware is included.
Dimensions
Width is 27 7/8".
Depth is 14 5/8".
Height is 3 1/4".
This keyboard drawer slides in and out
to store a detachable keyboard after
use.
The housing for the keyboard drawer is
fixed in position below the work surface.
To assure sufficient knee clearance,
consider the dimensions of the housing.
SLIDES IN
AND OUT
Limitations
The keyboard tray does not adjust
horizontally or vertically; therefore, it
does not easily accommodate workers
in wheelchairs or with special needs, nor
does it offer as much relief for workers
with computer-intensive jobs.
L
CPU Holder, Adjustable
G7810.
Description
This holder mounts under a work
surface and holds a computer
processing unit (CPU). The holder slides
out 11 1/2" and swivels 360° for easier
access to connections at the back of the
CPU. Straps on the holder support a
CPU of up to 65 pounds and a
maximum outside dimension of 60".
Finish is black umber. Attachment
Dimensions
Width is 5 3/8".
Depth is 13 1/4".
Perimeter (with straps extended) is 60"
maximum.
This CPU holder fits beneath any type of
work surface (wall attached or
freestanding), including returns.
CAN BE ATTACHED TOWARD
REAR OF WORK SURFACE TO
MINIMIZE VISIBILITY AND
MAXIMIZE LEGROOM
The CPU holder can be attached toward
the rear of the work surface, making the
CPU less visible and giving the user
more legroom.
This CPU holder accommodates CPUs
up to 65 pounds and up to 60" in
circumference.
STRAPS EXPAND TO
HOLD CPUS UP TO
60" CIRCUMFERENCE
Limitations
On narrower work surfaces, the CPU
holder extends further to the front,
minimizing legroom beneath the work
surface.
Attachment under the Relay highperformance table desk is not
recommended.
The adjustable CPU holder cannot be
attached to all Arrio freestanding work
surface sizes. (See the “Attaching
surfaces.)
L
CPU Holder
NP280.
Description
This wire-formed steel rack mounts
under a 24"- or 30"-deep Action Office
work surface, 24"- or 30"-deep
Ethospace bullnose work surface, or
30"-deep Action Office freestanding
table. Attachment hardware is included.
Dimensions
Width is 7".
Height is 23".
Depth is 19".
On deeper work surfaces, the CPU
holder can be attached toward the rear
of the work surface, making the CPU
slightly less visible and giving the user
more legroom.
This CPU holder accommodates the
weight of any CPU that fits the
dimensions of the holder.
Limitations
On narrower work surfaces, the CPU
holder extends further to the front,
minimizing legroom beneath the work
surface.
L
CAN BE ATTACHED TOWARD
REAR OF WORK SURFACE TO
MINIMIZE VISIBILITY AND
MAXIMIZE LEGROOM
Scooter® Stand
M1100.
Description
This mobile, adjustable platform holds a
detached keyboard and stores under a
work surface or table desk in the
lowered position. Shipped knocked
down.
Dimensions
Width of base is 24"; depth is 14".
Width of tray is 22"; depth is 11".
Height is adjustable from 22" to 30".
This stand can hold a keyboard or a
telephone or other small ancillary office
equipment (calculator, dictaphone, etc.)
or be used as a lectern, an ancillary
work surface, a personal work desk, or a
training desk.
IN LOWERED POSITION,
CAN BE STORED BENEATH
WORK SURFACE
This mobile stand tilts to four positions
within a 20° range; this adjustability
accommodates most workers, including
workers with special reach and access
needs and wheelchair users.
The stand accommodates the Scooter
document stand, ordered separately.
Options
Order the optional Scooter Document
Stand (M1190.) separately.
Limitations
The keyboard tray palm rest does not fit
on the Scooter stand.
L
Scooter Document Stand
M1190.
Description
This stand attaches to the base of the
Scooter platform for document display
and stores below the platform when not
in use. It includes an elastic band cursor.
Dimensions
Width is 17 1/2".
Depth is 4 3/8".
Height is 10 7/8".
The document stand automatically locks
in place when rotated upward.
The elastic-band cursor stretches the
width of the stand for reading
documents up to 15" wide.
L
ELASTIC-BAND
CURSOR FOR EASE
OF READING
DOCUMENT STAND
PIVOTS DOWN AND
BEHIND SCOOTER STAND
WHEN NOT IN USE
Freestanding Monitor Lift
NP494.
Description
This monitor lift sits on a work surface. It
has a counterbalance mechanism that
permits the user to raise or lower 15 to
35 pounds of equipment over a 7" height
range. The monitor lift includes a nonskid mat to keep equipment from sliding
in the tray.
Dimensions
For bottom tray:
• Width is 10".
• Depth is 12 3/4"
For monitor tray:
• Width is 12 3/4".
• Depth is 12 3/4"
Lift height adjustment is 7".
7" HEIGHT RANGE
Because it is freestanding, this monitor
lift enables any work surface to provide
an adjustable-height platform for
computer equipment.
The monitor lift is not secured to the
work surface; therefore, it can be
positioned to suit the exact needs and
work habits of the individual user. It does
not require the work surface to be
physically altered to accommodate the
monitor lift.
NOT PHYSICALLY
SECURED TO
WORK SURFACE
NON-SKID MAT
L
Machine Support Tray
G7710.
Description
This freestanding tray supports a
computer monitor or other electronic
equipment. It rotates 349° and tilts within
a 20° range.
Dimensions
Width and depth are 18 1/8".
Height is adjustable to 4 3/4".
The nonskid surface prevents slipping.
The adjustability that this tray provides
for a computer monitor is particularly
helpful to workers with visual and
musculoskeletal impairments.
Two 3" wire access holes manage wires
and cables, and an automatic pivot stop
prevents tangled wires.
L
WIRE ACCESS HOLES
MANAGE WIRES
AND CABLES
Turntable
G7712.
Description
This freestanding platform holds a
computer monitor and rotates 349° for
shared use.
Dimensions
Width is 18".
Depth is 30 1/8".
Height is 1 7/8".
A 2" wire access hole manages wires
and cables, and an automatic pivot stop
prevents tangled wires.
REQUIRES MINIMUM
35" CLEARANCE
For use in an open panel frame, the
turntable requires a minimum 35" inside
panel frame clearance.
Use with an open panel frame requires a
pass-through cover.
L
REQUIRES PASS-THROUGH
COVER WHEN USED WITH
OPEN PANEL FRAME
Work Tools Introduction
Work Tools
Introduction
Easily movable work tools maximize the efficiency of work areas, organize the work
process, and provide additional usable space by keeping materials off the work
surface. In addition, work tools can fill the special needs of workers with disabilities by
putting items closer to their reach and by limiting or reducing the weight and volume
to be lifted. These tools can also help organize the work sequence for persons with
cognitive or visual impairment.
L
Work Tools Rail Tools
Rail Tools
Rail-hung work tools provide accessible yet out-of-the-way storage, organization of
often-used items, and space for visual display. Rail tools hang from the rail on a tool
bar, which itself attaches to either a panel or a wall strip.
In placing tool bar-hung work tools effectively, consider the depth of the tools, which
affects usable work surface space, and how the tools attach to the tool bar, which
affects the use of vertical space.
When a tool bar is used over a work surface, place deeper tool bar tools to the side
and shallower tools in the center. This provides an unobstructed primary work area
and accessible storage.
Tool bars and work tools allow optimum placement of tools and materials for workers
with visual, reach, or mobility limitations.
SHALLOW TOOLS
TOWARD CENTER
WIDER TOOLS
AT SIDES
ALL TOOLS EASILY
ACCESSIBLE—WITH
PLENTY OF ROOM
ON WORK SURFACE
L
Placing a tool bar adjacent to a work surface makes use of corner space that is often
wasted; this is especially important in a small workstation. Deeper rail tools can
provide substantial storage without decreasing the amount of primary work area.
TOOL BAR MAKES USE
OF CORNER SPACE
Tools placed on tool bars outside a workstation provide a drop-off or pick-up point that
can minimize work interruptions. The outside tool bar can also provide display or
storage space.
On an open shelf, deeper rail tools allow for the efficient use of space.
WORK TOOLS OUTSIDE OFFICE
MINIMIZE INTERRUPTIONS
AND ADD CONVENIENCE
L
Tool Bar
A3610.
Description
This tool bar attaches to a panel or wall
strips and has one rail to hold work
tools.
Dimensions
Available in 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", and
60" widths to match all standard panel
widths.
Height is 3 1/2".
Depth is 1 1/2".
The tool bar attaches to the panel
hanger slots that are at 1" increments.
Order work tools separately.
Limitations
The tool bar cannot be used within a
flipper door unit.
L
ATTACHES TO SLOTTED
HANGER RAIL AT END OF
EACH PANEL—ADJUSTABLE
IN 1" INCREMENTS
Paper Tray
G7110.
Description
This tray hangs from a rail or stands
alone to horizontally store letter- or
legal-size papers. The tray comes with
four clips that allow trays to stack
vertically.
ATTACHES
AT TOP
Dimensions
Height is 2 7/8".
CAN BE
STACKED
Depth is 12 1/4".
CAN ALSO BE
FREESTANDING
ON SHELF OR WORK
SURFACE
Paper Tray, Metal
G7111.
Description
This tray hangs from a rail to store
folders and documents. Each tray has a
front lip for labeling. Package contains
six.
9" (229)
11" (279)
ATTACHES AT TOP
Dimensions
Available in 4" (nominal), 6", and 9"
widths; actual width of 4" tray is
3 3/4".
TOP
2-3/4" (70)
SIDE
Height is nominal 2 3/4".
Depth is 9" on the 4"- and 6"-wide trays
and 11" on the 9"-wide tray.
3-3/4" (95)
6" (152)
9" (229)
TOP
TOP
2-3/4" (70)
SIDE
L
ATTACHES
AT TOP
Vertical Tray
G7120.
Description
alone to vertically store papers, binders,
and folders.
Dimensions
Height is 7 5/8".
Depth is 12 1/4".
SHELF
Because the trays extend beyond the
front edge of the shelf when placed
straight on, they will not allow a flipper
door to close tightly. The trays can be
placed completely inside a flipper door
unit if used sideways.
CAN ALSO BE
FREESTANDING
Vertical Tray, Metal
NP282.
Description
This tray hangs from a tool bar, rail tile,
or rail, or it stands alone to hold small
forms.
Dimensions
Width is 4".
Height is 4 1/2".
Depth is 9".
ATTACHES
AT TOP
The bottom lip extends beyond the sides
of the tray to provide easy access to
forms.
SHELF
CAN ALSO BE
FREESTANDING
L
Diagonal Tray
G7130.
ATTACHES
HERE
Description
alone to store papers and folders. It has
three transparent dividers that move to
support left- or right-handed activities.
Dimensions
Width is 13 1/4".
Height is 10 1/8".
Depth is 12 1/8".
SHELF
CAN ALSO BE
FREESTANDING
Diagonal Tray
NP283.
Description
This tray hangs from a tool bar, rail tile,
or rail, or it stands alone to hold small
forms.
Dimensions
Width is 10".
Height is 2 1/4".
Depths are 6" and 9".
Forms held in the tray can be slanted to
the left or right, depending on the user's
work preference.
ATTACHES
AT TOP
SHELF
CAN ALSO BE
FREESTANDING
L
Arch
G7150.
Description
This arch hangs from a rail to hold
papers, folders, binders, and books.
Dimensions
Double arch is 7" wide, 7 1/4" high, and
4 1/2" deep.
Triple arch is 10" wide, 10" high, and
5 3/4" deep.
ATTACHES
AT MIDDLE
The arch is available with two or three
arched dividers.
Organizer Tray
G7210.
Description
This sectioned tray hangs from a rail to
store and organize small items.
Dimensions
Width is 11 1/4".
Height is 1".
Depth is 6 5/8".
L
ATTACHES
AT TOP
Mini-Shelf
G7310.
Description
This shelf hangs from a rail to hold or
display small items.
Dimensions
Height is 2 5/8".
Depth is 6 1/2".
ATTACHES
AT TOP
For vertical storage, use a 5"-deep rail
divider above the mini-shelf.
Certain applications restrict the use of
the mini-shelf to only the top rail of the
Newhouse Group tool fence. For
appropriate applications, see the
Newhouse Group Furniture Planning
Guide.
Options
To divide items on the mini-shelf, order
the small-size Rail Divider (G7320.05)
separately.
L
CAN BE USED WITH
SMALL RAIL DIVIDERS
Rail Divider
G7320.
Description
This divider hangs from a rail to
separate books, folders, and binders on
a shelf.
Dimensions
Small divider is 1" wide, 2 1/2" high, and
5" deep.
Large divider is 2" wide, 5 3/8" high, and
10" deep.
ATTACHES AT
TOP AND BOTTOM
SMALL DIVIDERS CAN BE USED
WITH MINI-SHELF
The 5" depth is for use with the minishelf; the 10" depth is for use with the 15
1/2"-high shelf.
LARGE DIVIDERS CAN BE USED WITH
15 ⁄«™"-HIGH SHELF AND…
L
…ABOVE WORK SURFACE
Mini-Tackboard
G7410.
Description
This cork surface snaps onto a rail to
display notes and other small papers.
Dimensions
Width is 10".
ATTACHES AT
TOP AND BOTTOM
Height is 3".
Depth is 1/4".
Message Holder
G7411.
Description
This holder hangs from a rail and has
three arches to hold message pads and
notes. Package contains four.
ATTACHES
AT MIDDLE
Dimensions
Width is 2 1/2".
Height is 4 3/8".
Depth is 2 7/8".
Day Calendar Holder
G7412.
ATTACHES
AT TOP
Description
This holder hangs from a rail or sits
on a work surface to hold standard
3 1/2" x 6" calendar refills. Package
contains four; calendar refills are not
included.
Dimensions
Width is 7 5/8".
Height is 3 3/4".
Depth is 7 1/2".
L
CAN ALSO BE
FREESTANDING
Card File
G7413.
Description
This file hangs from a rail or sits on a
work surface to hold standard
2 1/4" x 4" cards. Package contains four;
cards are not included.
ATTACHES
AT TOP
Dimensions
Width is 3".
Height is 2".
CAN ALSO BE
FREESTANDING
Depth is 7 1/4".
Tape Dispenser
G7414.
Description
This dispenser hangs from a rail and
holds 3/4"-wide tape. Package contains
four; tape is not included.
Dimensions
Width is 1 5/8".
ATTACHES
AT TOP
Height is 2 7/8".
Depth is 5 3/8".
Hanger Peg
G7149.
Description
This peg twist-locks into place on a rail
to hold clipboards, keys, scissors, or
other small items. Package contains
four.
Dimensions
Width is 3/4".
Height is 1 1/2".
Depth is 1 1/4".
L
HOLDS FABRIC
SWATCHES, KEYS,
OR OTHER
SMALL ITEMS
Work Tools Armature Tools
Armature Tools
HOLDS TELEPHONE TRAY
OR DOCUMENT STAND
OFF WORK SURFACE
ARMATURE ATTACHES TO WORK
SURFACE AT BACK OR SIDES
The armature, a movable support arm, holds a variety of organizing tools above the
work surface. The armature allows tools not in use to be moved easily out of the way.
L
Armature
G7510.
Description
This armature attaches to a hanging or
freestanding work surface, credenza,
or Arrio work surface to elevate a
document stand or telephone tray.
Dimensions
Width is 12 7/8", adjustable to 19".
Height is 4 3/8".
The armature pivots 360° and extends
6" from the initial position.
The armature frees space on the work
surface and brings documents and
phone equipment into closer reach—
these benefits are particularly
advantageous for workers with limited
reach.
HOLDS TELEPHONE TRAY
OR DOCUMENT STAND
OFF WORK SURFACE
When squared-edge work surfaces with
grommets are used with Series 3
panels, the fit is tight between the work
surface and the panel. An alternative is
to attach the armature in the space
created by the grommet, although the
room left for cable passage will be less.
With other work surfaces, there is
enough room between the work surface
and the panel or frame to accept the
armature.
Options
Order these products separately:
Limitation
The armature cannot clamp onto the
side of a wall-attached or Arrio work
surface at the point where the work
surface support or leg is attached or
onto the side of a wall-attached work
surface when a work surface support
panel is used.
L
Document Stand
G7610.
Description
This adjustable, translucent stand
attaches to an armature to hold
documents. It includes a horizontal
cursor.
Dimensions
Width is 10 1/2".
Height is 12".
The total vertical adjustment is 5 1/2".
When the document stand is raised to
the maximum height it will pivot 330°; at
all other heights it will pivot 180°. The
stand tilts back from a vertical position.
The document stand must be attached
to an armature. Order the Armature
(G7510.) to attach the document stand
to an Action Office, Ethospace, or Arrio
freestanding systems work surface or to
a Relay work surface or credenza. Order
the Armature (D4294.) to attach the
stand to a Newhouse Group table desk
with cable port or the table with
adjustable keyboard tray.
L
TOTAL VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT
IS 5 ⁄«™"
Telephone Tray
G7630.
Description
This tray attaches to an armature to hold
a telephone.
Dimensions
Available in 9" (nominal) and 13" widths.
Actual width of 9" tray is 8 7/8"; actual
width of 13" tray is 13".
Actual depth of 9" tray is 10 3/8"; actual
depth of 13" tray is 9 1/2".
The 13"-wide telephone tray features a
forward tilt and includes a receiver rest
that mounts on the front of the tray.
FOR STANDARD-SIZE
TELEPHONE
The 9"-wide telephone tray does not
have a forward tilt and does not include
a receiver rest.
Both trays pivot 210°.
Both telephone trays must be attached
to an armature. Order the Armature
(G7510.) to attach the tray to an Action
Office, Ethospace, or Arrio freestanding
systems work surface or to a Relay work
surface or credenza. Order the Armature
(D4294.) to attach the tray to a
Newhouse Group table desk with cable
port or the table with adjustable
keyboard tray.
L
FORWARD-TILT
MECHANISM
RECEIVER REST
SIZED TO HOLD
LARGE-SET
TELEPHONE

AO2 PIW Pgs-a.pm6 - Hartman Office Furniture, Inc.

Transcription

Similar documents

Inspiring Surface Design

GlASS FibER REiNFORcEd CONcREtE

Building Code Training – August 30th at Burgundy Basin Inn

4M605051 Raaco Kufry na náradie Polypropylene XL - 34

Christmas Card order form15.pub - Little Sisters of the Poor Pittsburgh

HOW TO BUILT A LOMOWALL

ultraform - Canadian Plywood Association

Making PV Panels Smarter

MA6900

SPEED RACER WARDROBE A List of parts